JP2019000413A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine notifies a player of a result of determination using a pattern corresponding to a result of determination which indicates that second special information satisfies a special condition when determination means determines that the second special information corresponding to a second special information game round to be executed during execution of the first special information game round corresponding to first special information satisfying a predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, although the game machine notifies the player of the result of the determination using a pattern corresponding to a result of determination which indicates that second special information does not satisfy a special condition when the determination means determines that the second special information corresponding to the second special information game round to be executed during execution of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying a predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 84

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, etc. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

  In the gaming machines as described above, for the purpose of improving the fun of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, providing a more healthy game, etc. Improvement of technology is desired.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following forms.

[Form]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Determination result notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means using a pattern;
Game times execution for executing the game times when the game operation is terminated once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means using a symbol is started. Means,
A first entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means includes
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance portion. And
The acquired information storage means includes
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. And means for storing each of the second special information which is the special information,
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time that is a game time for notifying a result of determination by the determination means for the first special information; and a result of determination by the determination means for the second special information. Means for executing in parallel the second special information game times which are game times;
The privilege granting means is:
When the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege grant means when a predetermined condition is established for granting a privilege;
When the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition, a special condition establishment privilege granting means for granting a privilege is provided,
The determination result notification means includes:
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed is When the determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is performed using the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Corresponding to the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition are executed, although the result is notified. If the determination means determines that the second special information to be satisfied satisfies the specific condition, it corresponds to a determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition Using the above design Gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a means for performing the specified condition satisfaction notifying process of notifying the result of determination.

  According to the said form, the interest improvement of a game can be aimed at.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for jackpot lottery etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 1st start openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 2nd starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table (Electrical character release lottery success / failure table) used when performing an electrical accessory release lottery. It is a time chart explaining the point provision production (case 1) which the pachinko machine of a 1st embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision effect X1 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision effect X2 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision production X3 is performed. It is explanatory drawing explaining a timer effect and a button press effect. It is a time chart explaining the point provision production (case 2) which the pachinko machine of a 1st embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the color of a stage. It is explanatory drawing explaining the effect during standby. It is explanatory drawing explaining the point provision production in which a point is not provided. It is explanatory drawing explaining the timer effect and button press effect which are performed by game times. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a start port. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot and reach information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variation time. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flowchart which shows a power combination opening / closing control process. It is a block diagram which shows centering around the electrical structure of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command response process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the structure of a game time setting information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows production information setting processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the jackpot effect scenario table. It is explanatory drawing explaining the effect scenario table for reach. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production scenario corresponding to temporary variation time T = t4 of the jackpot production scenario table as an example. It is explanatory drawing explaining the point grant scenario table for jackpot and reach. It is explanatory drawing explaining the point grant scenario for jackpot and reach. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production scenario table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production scenario corresponding to temporary variation time T = t24 of the production scenario table for non-reach as an example. It is explanatory drawing explaining the point provision scenario table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing explaining each point provision scenario for non-reach. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is an image figure of the production | generation pattern produced | generated based on the production | presentation scenario and point provision scenario set to the process target game time. It is explanatory drawing explaining the effect pattern table for point provision effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect pattern for point provision effects currently recorded on the effect pattern table for point provision effects. It is a flowchart which shows a point provision production | presentation execution process. It is a flowchart which shows a point accumulation | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process at the time of point filling. It is a flowchart which shows a button press effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a point reset process. It is a flowchart which shows a stage display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production | presentation scenario and point provision scenario of the continuous production last game time in the modification 8 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the modification 9 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the point provision production in the modification 10 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the modification 13 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the provision log | history area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the provision log | history area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the point provision production in the modification 14 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the point provision effect of a multiplication aspect. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode of the image of a pearl in the case where a mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during execution of one point provision effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display mode of the accumulate | stored point. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode which does not display the boundary line of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to 1 point as a display mode of the accumulate | stored point. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the display mode of the accumulation | storage point was changed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the structure by which the position (image) which has the function to accumulate | store the provided point is displayed on the display surface 41a by multiple pieces (plural places). It is explanatory drawing explaining the point provision production in which the number of provision points is displayed at the time of a start. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a threshold reach | attainment effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a carry over change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a timer time extension effect. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for winning lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 1st start openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 2nd starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table (Electrical character release lottery success / failure table) used when performing an electrical accessory release lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in a gaming machine. It is a time chart explaining a special bonus process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance process for start ports. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for 1st start openings. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift process for 1st start openings. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for 1st start openings. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for 1st start openings. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for 2nd start openings. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information shift process for 2nd start openings. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for 2nd start openings. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for 2nd start openings. It is a flowchart which shows a low-accuracy time variation time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a highly accurate high frequency time variation time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a highly accurate low frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows an open / close scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flowchart which shows a power combination opening / closing process. It is a block diagram which shows centering around the electrical structure of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a state memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows a display mode switching process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special 1 game round effects. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for main display areas. It is a flowchart which shows special 1 game round effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation time measurement process for special 1s. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special 2 game times effect. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for main display areas. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting process of the effect pattern for small hits at the time of a special bonus. It is a flowchart which shows special 2 game round effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time measurement process for special 2. It is a flowchart which shows a special bonus effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Application to other configurations:
D. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc .:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17.

  An opened window portion 18 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at the time of the big hit lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of the big win or at the time of reaching. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent out from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for a player to perform an input operation for a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball launching by the game ball launching mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and the operation handle 25 Is provided with a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the first and second rotations based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  A game ball launch button 26 for operation by the player is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched to the front of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same launch intensity as when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front, and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called “right strike”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to release the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is disposed inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, similarly to the weight button 25b. In this way, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with the right hand.

  FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is composed of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided to the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30 and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. The nails 42 and the windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special map unit 37, a universal map unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general prize opening 32 is a ball opening through which a game ball can enter and is provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The first start port 33 is a ball entrance where a game ball can enter. The first start port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a jackpot lottery described later is executed.

  The second start port 34 is a entrance for allowing game balls to enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed. In addition, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

  The through gate 35 includes a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as an opportunity for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical instrument release lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to an open state where the electric combination 34a is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second start port 34 and is second. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an open / close door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the grand prize winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the main control device 60 executes a big hit lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot or the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable prize-winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b transitions from a closed state where a game ball cannot enter to an open state where a game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied After that, the transition is again made to the closed state. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36 a of the variable winning device 36, 15 paying balls are paid out by the payout device 71.

  Further, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The 1st symbol display part 37a and the 2nd symbol display part 37b are respectively comprised by the segment indicator by which the some segment light emission part was arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the basis of a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first start port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is configured as a display mode until a segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a big hit lottery is performed in response to a game ball entering the first start port 33. Then, the first symbol variation display or predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the big hit lottery is executed when the game balls enter the first start port 33 are also referred to as first start port game times.

  The 2nd symbol display part 37b is a display part for displaying a 2nd symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the basis of a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second start port 34. When the big winning lottery is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 34, the second symbol display unit 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. Then, the variation display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the big hit lottery is executed when the game balls enter the second start port 34 are also referred to as second start port game times.

  Here, the time from the start of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b until the stop display is displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the first symbol variation display displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed to the stop display is also referred to as a second variable time.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first holding display part 37c and a second holding display part 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol display part 37b.

  The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting port 33 with the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first start port 33 are held.

  The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of hold of the second start port 34 according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second start opening 34 are held.

  The universal map unit 38 includes a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electrification member opening lottery is performed with the passage of the through gate 35 as an opportunity, the universal map unit 38 causes the light emitting display to be turned on, blinked, or displayed in a predetermined manner. When the electrification opening lottery is completed, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. A game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special map unit 37, the universal map unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light-emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, You may be comprised by the various display apparatus which can show a lottery result and a lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. In addition, the structure of the display apparatus with which the variable display unit 40 is provided is not limited to the symbol display apparatus 41, For example, you may be comprised by various display apparatuses, such as a plasma display apparatus, an organic EL display apparatus, or CRT.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variation display or predetermined display based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol variation display or predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variation display or predetermined display based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, the symbol variation display or predetermined Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the symbol variation display or the predetermined display triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but when a big hit is won The effect display during the opening / closing execution mode is also performed. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. The liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 and corresponds to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. It is a design. When a game turn is triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33, a liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed on the display surface. When a game turn is executed that is displayed on 41a and triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b The design symbol is displayed on the display surface 41a.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 as the liquid crystal symbols. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design by which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a symbol which is variably displayed.

  FIG. 3B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 3A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from below. A variable display that scrolls up is displayed. As shown in FIG. 3B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the big win lottery by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the mode of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, but the number of symbol columns, the number of effective lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the symbols of each symbol column Various modes can be adopted as the mode of the variable display of symbols such as the number.

  Here, the game times means from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the stop display ends. This is a unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big hit lottery every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit 37a or the In either one of the two symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 After the symbol row is variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game time is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is a time from when the variable display is started until a predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is a time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 3B, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on winning in the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second reserved display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of reserved game times based on winning in the second starting port 34 is displayed. The reserved game times are unexecuted game times, and fluctuations for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 Say game times that have not started displaying. The number of reserved game times that can be held based on winning at the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first hold display area Ds1 can display hold displays corresponding to the four hold game times (hereinafter also referred to as first hold game times display). Further, the number of reserved game times that can be held based on the winning at the second start port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second hold display area Ds2 can display hold displays corresponding to the four hold game times (hereinafter also referred to as second hold game times display).

  Further, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first execution game number display area J1, a second execution game number display area J2, and a stage St are displayed. In the first execution game time display area J1 and the second execution game time display area J2, the game time to be executed (the game time being executed) is a game time based on winning in the first start port 33 or a second start. It indicates whether the game is based on winning in the mouth 34. The first execution game number display area J1 displays game times based on winnings at the first start port 33, and the second execution game number display area J2 displays game times based on winnings at the second start port 34. Is done. In addition, when the reserved game times displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 are executed as game times, an image indicating the hold game times displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 is displayed as the first execution game times. Move to display area J1. When the reserved game times displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 are executed as game times, an image indicating the reserved game times displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 is displayed in the second executed game times display area. Move to J2. Hereinafter, the display shown in the first execution game number display area J1 is also called a first execution game number display, and the display shown in the second execution game number display area J2 is also called a second execution game number display.

  The stage St is used for a point giving effect described later. How to use the point giving effect and the stage St will be described in detail later.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3 (b), the display surface 41a blinks and lights up in synchronization with the first symbol change display and the stop display displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special symbol unit 37. The first synchronous display section Sync1 that performs display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37 Part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, The 1-synchronization display section Sync1 is turned on. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a variable display, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 is blinking, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a stop display, the second synchronization display is performed. The part Sync2 is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a includes the main display area MA, the first execution game times display area J1, the second execution game times display area J2, the stage St, the first synchronous display section Sync1, and the second. Although the synchronous display portion Sync2 is configured to be displayed, a configuration in which the display surface 41a does not display part or all of these displays may be employed.

A2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured with the main control device 60 as a center, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the program recorded in the ROM 63 is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the functions of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 is supplied with power of DC stable 24V from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, various winning entrances and through gates such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning apparatus 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Further, the MPU 62 executes a big hit lottery based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the second start port 34, The open / close door drive unit 48b for opening / closing the open / close door 48a and the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuit.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed. Further, when the electrification opening is selected as a result of the electrification opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electrification accessory driving unit 44b so that the electrification accessory 34a is opened. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the result of entering the ball. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a game ball is entered into the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first start opening 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize ball.

  A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 performs launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. An operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14 and driving control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, an effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. Various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control apparatus 100, etc. are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. The presence / absence of reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are variably displayed are grasped. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for jackpot lottery. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, the display setting of the main display unit 45, the symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. When distributing the jackpot type, a jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is deviated and changed.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of entering are stored in the holding information storage area. 64b is stored in the first reserved area Ra in time series. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering are stored in the holding information storage area 64b. 2 is stored in time series in the reserved area Rb.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the determination table stored in the determination table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Thus, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is checked against a hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not the jackpot random counter C1 is a jackpot.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the table. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. . In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the second starting port 34 is updated. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not the error occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not the error occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach is the stop of a combination of symbols that may be a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for a portion of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in the state of the remaining symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 3B, the symbol is first displayed in the symbol row Z1 and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a symbol is displayed in the symbol row Z2, and a reach is achieved. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state that the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when the reach effect is being performed, or prior to the reach display, it is determined whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, the variation type counter CS returns to zero.

  The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41. In determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 465, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e is performed. A lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in a closed state.

  Note that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the special information in the present invention. It corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

  Next, the success / failure table will be described. The success / failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when the jackpot lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the big hit lottery. When the big hit lottery in the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to. In the case of jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 collates with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. And a success / failure table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when a game ball enters the second start port 34, and storing them as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first start / failure table (low probability mode), a first start / fail table (high probability mode), and a second start / fail table (low probability mode). The four success / failure tables for the probability mode and the second start opening / failure table (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success / failure table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the first start / failure table. FIG. 6A shows a first start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 6B shows a first start port success table (high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the first start / fail table (for the low probability mode). Yes. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the five values 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are out of place. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the first start / fail table (for high probability mode). Has been. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values 0 to 15 are out of place. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success / failure table for the second start port. FIG. 7A shows a second start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 7B shows a second start port success table (high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 7A, five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the second start opening / failing table (for the low probability mode). Yes. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the five values 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are out of place. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the success / failure table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). Has been. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values 0 to 15 are out of place. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the low probability mode hit / fail table is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the high probability mode hit / fail table. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability that the high probability mode is a big hit is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

  Although not adopted in the success / failure table in the present embodiment, “small hit” may be provided as a result of the big hit lottery.

  “Small Win” is a result of the success / failure that does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode, although it is the transition trigger to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed. On the other hand, “displacement” is a result of success / failure that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and does not trigger the transition for the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing a difference in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing door 36b of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode
(2) Aspects of opening / closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of jackpot lottery after opening / closing execution mode ends

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (2) opening / closing execution mode, occurrence of a game ball (winning) in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the open / close door 36b in the open / close execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the open / close door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to be continuously opened until 1.6 seconds elapses or until the number of balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. Can do.

  The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the frequency of occurrence of entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing mode of the open / close door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may be set longer than the low-frequency winning mode, or the opening limit number for one opening may be set longer. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the configuration may be such that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning modes are not provided as the opening / closing execution mode, and the above-described high-frequency winning mode is set during the opening / closing execution mode. That is, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set so as to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches ten.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type is distributed using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a sorting table in the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to when the big hit lottery based on the entrance of the game ball to the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to in the case of lottery lottery based on the entrance of game balls.

  As shown in the allocation table for the first start port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 8R probability variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot type based on the first start port 33. ing.

  In the 8R probability variation jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-probability mode, The jackpot that the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the 8R normal jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low probability mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends The jackpot that the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 24” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and “25 to 39” is the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

  As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R probability variable jackpot and 16R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot type based on the second start port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 24” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “25 to 39” is the 16R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is the jackpot based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, 2 The difference between the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening 34 and a clear difference in the advantage for the player are provided.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the jackpot type. Therefore, the mode of jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest in the 16R probability variable jackpot, the next highest in the 8R probability variable jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. Thus, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. In addition, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop the segment display unit to be displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. The display mode is determined. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 after the end of the above (3) opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball in the same mode is continued in the same mode. When the comparison is made in the situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are such that the frequency at which the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high. Can be set.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of becoming an electrification opening win in the electric accessory release lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning an electric combination opening in the electric combination opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, the time for opening the electric utility item 34a once is set longer when the power combination is won than in the low frequency support mode.

  Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the electrification opening is elected in the high frequency support mode and the electrification state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the next one after the completion of the one disengagement state. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the time that is secured from the time when one lottery opening lottery is performed to the time when the next lottery opening lot is performed is set to be relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball enters the second start port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success / failure table (electricity accessory release lottery success / failure table) used when executing the electrical accessory release lottery.

  FIG. 9 (a) shows an electrical accessory release lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), in the electric component release lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric component release counter C4 that is elected to win the electric utility. Value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 to be detached. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electrified product release lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electrified role is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the electrification release is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

  FIG. 9 (b) shows an electrical accessory release lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), in the electric component release lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the values of the electric agent release counter C4 that is elected to win the electric utility. Value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as values of the electric accessory release counter C4 to be detached. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric component release lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric combination release win is made with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the electrification release is won in the high-frequency support mode, the electrical accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

  As described above, the high-frequency support mode is set to have a higher probability that a game ball will enter the second start port 34 than in the low-frequency support mode, according to the electric component release lottery success / failure table. .

A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining a point giving effect (case 1) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The point giving effect is an effect of giving points at a predetermined timing during the execution of game times. Then, every time 10 points are accumulated, a button press effect is executed. The button press effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 during the period in which the button press effect is being executed, or after the elapse of the period in which the button press effect is being executed, in the jackpot lottery related to the game times, An effect suggesting the possibility of winning (expectation) is executed. In addition, an effect suggesting the possibility of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery related to the game round (expected degree) only when the player presses the rendering operation button 24 during the period in which the button pressing effect is being executed. May be executed. Hereinafter, the point giving effect (Case 1) will be specifically described along the time chart.

  FIG. 10 shows a point grant effect and a button press effect executed in one game time as a time chart. In the game times shown in FIG. 10, the effect a1 is executed simultaneously with the start of the change of the symbol. When the effect a1 is executed, an image indicating a change in the liquid crystal design is displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined character image is displayed. Further, along with the display of these images, sound output and lamp lighting are also executed. After the start of the fluctuation, as shown in the figure, the point giving effect X1 is executed at a predetermined timing. The illustrated [+ 4P] indicates that 4 points are awarded in the point giving effect.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the point giving effect X1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 11A, an image corresponding to the effect a1 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Thereafter, during the execution of the production a1, the turtle character passes from the right to the left on the upper part of the display surface 41a. As shown in FIG. 11B, at the timing when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl displaying the number of points to be given is dropped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), the image corresponding to the dropped pearl is the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points given at the timing when it reaches the stage St in the lower center of the display surface 41a. Changes and accumulates. That is, the number of pearls displayed on the stage St corresponds to the accumulated number of points. At this time, the color of the stage St changes from white to red. The change in the color of the stage St will be described in detail later.

  The number of points awarded in the point granting effect is notified to the player for the first time at the timing when the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a and a pearl image showing the number of points given is displayed. The Therefore, in the period until the point giving effect is started and the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the number of points given. As a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of points given is not displayed on the pearl image dropped by the turtle character. By doing in this way, the player has a sense of expectation for the number of points during the period until the dropped pearls reach the stage St and the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of given points is displayed. Can be granted. Moreover, although mentioned later, in this embodiment, the point provision production in which a point is not provided may be performed (refer FIG. 18). In this case, the turtle character passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a without dropping a pearl, which means the provision of points. Therefore, when the configuration in which the number of points given is not displayed in the pearl image dropped by the turtle character as in this modification, the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a as the first step. At this point, the player can be made aware that the point giving effect will be executed, and an expectation can be given. Then, as the second stage, when the turtle character drops the pearl, the player can recognize that the executed point granting effect is not a point granting effect in which no points are given. A sense of expectation can be imparted. After that, when the pearl dropped by the turtle reaches stage St and the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points given is displayed, the player can recognize the expectation and An uplifting feeling can be imparted. That is, when this modification is adopted, the timing at which the turtle character appears, the timing at which the pearl meaning the provision of points from the turtle character is dropped, and the dropped pearl reaches the stage St and is given. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation step by step at three timings when the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. In FIG. 10, the number of points accumulated by executing the point giving effect is shown as “accumulated points”. Since 4 points are accumulated by the execution of the point granting effect X1 for giving 4 points, <4P> is illustrated as an accumulation point.

  After the point giving effect X1 is executed, the point giving effect X2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in FIG. 10, 3 points are awarded in the point giving effect.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the point giving effect X2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 12A, in the point granting effect X2, the turtle character passes through the upper part of the display surface 41a from the right to the left during the execution of the effect a1, like the point granting effect X1. To do. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is located at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl displaying the number of points to be given is dropped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12C, the image corresponding to the dropped pearl is changed and accumulated into the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points given at the timing when the stage St is reached. When the point giving effect X2 is executed, 3 points are given, the accumulated points become 7 points, and 7 pearls corresponding to the accumulated points are displayed on the stage St.

  As shown in FIG. 10, after the point giving effect X2 is executed, the point giving effect X3 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the figure, 5 points are awarded in the point giving effect.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the point giving effect X3 is executed. As shown in FIG. 13 (a), in the point granting effect X3, as with the point granting effect X1 and the point granting effect X2, during the execution of the effect a1, the upper part of the display surface 41a is viewed from the right of the turtle character. Pass left. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is located at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl displaying the number of points to be given is dropped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13 (c), the images on the stage St are one image of a shellfish and two images indicating two points at the timing when the image corresponding to the dropped pearl reaches the stage St. The pearl image changes and is displayed. The accumulated points are 12 points, but the accumulated points are 10 points or more. Therefore, in this embodiment, the accumulated points for 10 points are displayed as an image of one shellfish. Also, a timer indicating the time until the button press effect is executed is displayed below the shell image. An effect in which shellfish and a timer are displayed is also called a timer effect.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer effect and a button press effect. FIG. 14A shows a state in which a timer effect is executed. As shown in the drawing, a shell image showing 10 accumulation points is displayed in the vicinity of the stage St. The image of the shellfish shows that a button press effect is executed later. Also, a timer indicating the time until the button press effect is executed is displayed below the shell image. The timer is counted down as time passes. In addition, among the accumulated points that became 12 points by executing the point granting effect X3, the remaining 2 points other than 10 points corresponding to 10 pearls changed to shellfish are 2 on the stage St. Displayed as a pearl.

  Even during the period in which the timer effect is being executed, the effect a1 is executed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. When the remaining time of the timer indicated by the timer effect becomes 0 (zero), the button press effect is executed.

  FIG. 14B shows a state where a button press effect is executed. The button press effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect operation button 24. Specifically, an image in which the shellfish that was being displayed in the timer effect is opened is displayed, and a letter “Press!” Is displayed.

  Further, in this example, the liquid crystal design variably displayed in the main display area MA as the effect a1 immediately before the button press effect is started, that is, immediately before the remaining time of the timer due to the timer effect becomes zero. Automatically stop (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo stop). Then, when the liquid crystal design is in a pseudo stop state, a button press effect is executed, and when the player presses the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing, an effect a2 is started as shown in FIG. The liquid crystal design starts to change again.

  In the pseudo-stop state, the liquid crystal symbol is not completely stopped and slightly fluctuates, and the liquid crystal symbol is variably displayed in the internal processing of the pachinko machine 10. The pseudo stop state of the liquid crystal symbol is a display state for allowing the player to recognize the liquid crystal symbol as if it has shifted to the stop display for the effect. In this way, by performing a pseudo stop of the symbol in one game time and starting the variation again, the player is made to recognize as if the notice effect is continuously executed across the game times. This effect is also called a pseudo continuous notice effect in the present embodiment.

  That is, in this description, the button press effect is used as an opportunity to switch from the pseudo continuous notice effect to the execution of the effect a2. By using the button press effect in this way, a player who temporarily recognizes that the jackpot lottery has been missed by visually recognizing the virtually stopped liquid crystal design is being executed. When the player presses the presentation operation button 24, the player can feel as if the winning result of the jackpot lottery has been temporarily avoided, and can give the player a sense of relief and expectation.

  In addition, when the point giving effect is executed during the game times, points are given and the points are accumulated. The timer effect is started every time 10 points are accumulated, and the button press effect is executed at the timing when the remaining time of the timer becomes zero. Therefore, every time the point giving effect is executed in the game times, a sense of expectation can be given to the player. In addition, when 10 points are accumulated, a button press effect is executed, and when the player presses the button at the timing when the button press effect is executed, the liquid crystal design indicating the false stop result is then displayed again. Since various effects such as an effect that fluctuates and an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the game times are executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tightness.

  After the button press effect is executed, the display of the shell image corresponding to the timer effect and the button effect disappears, and the two pearl images indicating the accumulation points for the remaining two points are displayed. It becomes.

  When the game round is completed without accumulating 10 points or more in spite of the point accumulating effect and the accumulated points, the accumulated points are reset (accumulated points: 0). And may be carried over to the next game round. Whether the accumulated points are reset or carried over at the end of the game round is determined by a predetermined process by the pachinko machine 10. This process will be described in detail later.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the point giving effect in all game times but executes the point giving effect in some game times. In particular, it is executed at a high frequency in the game times that are reach (the jackpot lottery is “off”) and the game times that are jackpots.

  FIG. 15 is a time chart for explaining the point giving effect (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In this description, a case will be described in which the accumulated points given in the point giving effect are accumulated across game times.

  As shown in the drawing, in the game times U1, the fluctuation starts and the effect b1 is executed. In the production b1, an image showing the variation of the liquid crystal pattern is displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined character image is displayed. Thereafter, at a predetermined timing, the point giving effect Y1 is executed. As shown in the figure, 5 points are awarded in the point giving effect. Therefore, the accumulation point is 5 points. Thereafter, the variation of the game times U1 ends. At this time, in the point giving effect (Case 2), at the end of the change of the game times U1, the accumulated points are not reset but carried over to the next game time U2.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the column of “Stage St color” in FIG. 15, in order to indicate to the player whether the accumulation point is carried over or not carried over in the game round, The color of the stage St is controlled as follows.
(1) If no points are accumulated, the stage St is set to white.
(2) When the points are accumulated and the accumulated points are carried forward, the stage St is set to yellow.
(3) When the points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over, the stage St is set to orange.
The color of the stage St is controlled as described in (1) to (3) above.

  As shown in the column “Stage St Color” in FIG. 15, in the case of the point granting effect (case 2), the stage St changes from white to yellow when the points are first accumulated in the game times U1. . Thereafter, in the game times U2, the accumulated points are carried over to the game times U3, so that the color of the stage St is maintained in yellow. When the game time U3 is started, the accumulation point is not carried over to the next game time in the game time U3, so the color of the stage St changes from yellow to orange. Thereafter, the game times U3 end with the points accumulated to the end, so that the color of the stage St is maintained orange during the period in which the game times U3 are being executed.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the color of the stage St. FIG. 16A shows the stage St when no points are accumulated. The color of the stage St is set to white. FIG. 16B shows a stage St when points are accumulated and accumulated points are carried forward. The color of the stage St is set to yellow. FIG. 16C shows the stage St when the points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over. The color of the stage St is set to orange. Thus, it is suggested to the player that the accumulation point is carried over or not, using the color of the stage St so as to be recognizable.

  By suggesting to the player whether the accumulation point will be carried over or not, for example, if the color of the stage St is yellow indicating that the accumulation point is carried over, the accumulation point will be Even if it is not 10 points or more, there is a high possibility that the accumulated points will be 10 points or more in the next game round due to the accumulated points carried over from that game round and the points given in the next game round. It is possible to make the player infer that the player has a sense of expectation.

  Returning to FIG. When the game time U1 ends and the game time U2 starts, the effect b2 is executed. Thereafter, the point giving effect Y2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the figure, 6 points are awarded in the point giving effect. Therefore, the accumulation points are 11 points. At this time, since the accumulated points are 10 points or more, the image of 10 pearls changes to a shell image, but a timer indicating the time until the button press effect is displayed during the game times U2. “Waiting” is displayed instead. Hereinafter, the effect in which the characters “standby” are displayed is also referred to as a standby effect.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a stand-by effect. As shown in the drawing, when the standby effect is executed, the characters “standby” are displayed below the shell image. The stand-by effect indicates that the button press effect corresponding to the accumulated points for the 10 points is executed in the next game time without the button press effect being executed in the game time. Then, at the point of time when the game press operation is executed in which the button press effect corresponding to the 10 points of accumulation points is executed, the timer effect is executed instead of the standby effect, and the button press corresponding to the 10 points of accumulation points is performed. A countdown of the time until the performance is executed is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, after the point giving effect Y2 is completed, the point giving effect Y3 is executed at a predetermined timing. In the point giving effect, 0 points are given. That is, no points are awarded even though the point giving effect is executed. Therefore, the accumulation point remains 11 points.

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in which no points are given. In FIG. 18, the point giving effect Y3 executed in the game times U2 is shown.

  When the point giving effect is started, the turtle character appears from the upper right end of the display surface 41a and proceeds toward the center, as in the normal point giving effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 18B, even if the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, the turtle character does nothing, as shown in FIG. It proceeds to the left as it is and advances to the upper left end of the display surface 41a. By executing the point giving effect [0P] in this way, it is possible to give an inflection to the player's sense of expectation. Thereafter, the symbol stops and the game round U2 ends. The accumulated points in the game times U2 are set to be carried over to the next game time (game times U3).

  When the game time U3 is started, an effect b3 is executed, and a timer effect is executed instead of the standby effect that was executed in the game time U2. In FIG. 15, the timer effect 1 is written to distinguish it from another timer effect to be executed later. The timer effect 1 is an effect corresponding to the button press effect 1 executed most recently. That is, the time displayed on the timer in the timer effect 1 is the time until the button press effect 1 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the point giving effect Y4 [+ 3P] and the point giving effect Y5 [+ 7P] are executed at a predetermined timing after the game time U3 is started. A total of 10 points are awarded by the two point giving effects. Therefore, the accumulation points are 21 points. As described above, since the button pressing effect is executed once for every accumulation point of 10 points, the button pressing effect 2 is executed in addition to the button pressing effect 1 in the game time U3. Therefore, when the point giving effect Y5 is executed and the accumulated points of 21 points are accumulated, the timer effect 2 corresponding to the button press effect 2 is executed.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timer effect and a button press effect executed in the game times U3. FIG. 19A shows a state in which timer effect 1 and timer effect 2 are executed. As shown in the figure, the shellfish image and timer corresponding to the timer effect 2 are displayed on the left side of the shell image and timer corresponding to the timer effect 1. As described above, on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 1, the time until the button press effect 1 is executed is counted down and displayed. On the timer corresponding to the timer effect 2, the time until the button press effect 2 is executed is counted down and displayed. Therefore, the time displayed on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 1 is different from the time displayed on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 2. Thus, by displaying a plurality of images corresponding to the timer effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the button press effect is executed twice, and to give a further expectation. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15, a button press effect 1 is executed. FIG. 19B shows a state in which the button press effect 1 is executed. When the button press effect 1 is started, an image of the shell that was displayed in the timer effect 1 is displayed, and a character “Press!” Is displayed. The image corresponding to the timer effect 2 is displayed as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 15, after the button press effect 1 is completed, the effect b4 is executed. Even during the execution of the effect b4, the timer effect 2 counts down and displays the time until the button press effect 2 is executed. Thereafter, when the time that has been counted down in the timer effect 2 is displayed as 0, the button press effect 2 is executed. FIG. 19C shows a state where the button press effect 2 is executed. When the button pressing effect 2 is executed, an image in which the shellfish displayed in the timer effect 2 is opened is displayed, and a character “Press!” Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, after the button press effect 2 is executed, the effect b5 is executed, and then the symbol is stopped and the game times U3 are ended. The point giving effect (Case 2) has been described above.

  In the present embodiment, it is set so that the probability that the button press effect is executed in the game times is higher in the case of the big win than in the case where the result of the big win lottery in the game times is not a big win. Yes.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the button press effect, when the button press effect is executed, the result of the jackpot lottery becomes “big hit” or “disappears (reach occurs)”. It is possible to make the player infer that the probability is high, and to give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, by executing the point giving effect, a player who recognizes that the button pressing effect is executed when the accumulated points become 10 points or more is expected every time the point giving effect is executed. Can be granted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are a case where the accumulated points accumulated in the game times are reset as an end of the game times and a case where the accumulated points are carried over to the next game times without being reset. Since the accumulated points may be reset as the end of the game round, the player is requested to accumulate 10 points or more by the end of the game round, and the player's expectation for the point giving effect The feeling can be further increased. Furthermore, a player who recognizes that points have been accumulated due to the execution of the point giving effect when the game is started is aware of when the game times that the accumulated points may end may be reset. Thus, attention can be paid to the manner in which the accumulated points are accumulated, that is, the manner in which the point giving effect is executed.

  In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game time, even if the accumulated game points are not accumulated more than 10 points in the game time being executed, if the game point is carried over to the next game time, Since the points accumulated in are effective, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation that the accumulated points do not accumulate 10 points or more.

A4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In step S10101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10102.

  In step S10102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10103.

  In step S10103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10104. Note that the variation type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 26) described later.

  In step S <b> 10104, a winning opening process for the starting opening accompanying winning in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the winning process for the start opening in step S10104 will be described later. After executing Step S10104, the process proceeds to Step S10105.

  In step S10105, a through winning process for winning through the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through winning process in step S10105 will be described later. After executing step S10105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for start-up>
Next, the winning process for the start opening will be described. The start-up winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 20: S10104) of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a winning process for a start opening. In step S10201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start port 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 33 (start winning prize). If it is determined in step S10201 that the game ball has won the first start opening 33 (S10201: YES), the process proceeds to step S10202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10203.

  In step S10203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that a game ball has won the first start port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10204.

  In step S10204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first start reservation number RaN indicates the number of reservations based on winning in the first start port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10209.

  If it is determined in step S10201 that the game ball has not won the first start port 33 (S10201: NO), the process proceeds to step S10205 to determine whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 34. 2 Determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34.

  If it is determined in step S10205 that the game ball has won the second start port 34 (S10205: YES), the process proceeds to step S10206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10205 that the game ball has not won the second starting port 34 (S10205: NO), the winning process for the starting port is terminated.

  In step S10207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10208.

  In step S10208, a start hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as a second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second start reserved number RbN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10209.

  In step S10209, it is determined whether the number N of start suspensions (RaN or RbN) set in step S10204 or step S10208 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step S10209, if the number N of starting suspension is not less than the upper limit value (S10209: NO), the winning process for the starting port is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S10209, when the number N of starting suspension is less than the upper limit (S10209: YES), the process proceeds to step S10210, and 1 is added to the number N of starting suspension in the corresponding suspension area, and then the process proceeds to step S10211. 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved number CRN). The total reserved number CRN indicates the total value of the first start reserved number RaN and the second start reserved number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10212.

  In step S10212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20), and the variation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 26) is obtained. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reserved area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in step S10210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20), and Each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S10210. If the second start hold number RbN is set as a processing target, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20). Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reserved area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reserved number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S10210. After executing Step S10212, the process proceeds to Step S10213.

  In step S10213, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is performed based on information (holding information) on each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. This type of determination is performed before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

  In step S10214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (destination determination information) of the destination determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS ) As a pending command.

  The hold command indicates that the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has been won and the determination result (predetermined determination information) based on the hold determination information based on the hold information acquired based on the win. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm before the information becomes the target of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 26: step S10703) of a normal process described later.

  In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold on the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing in accordance with is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning at the second start port 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold on the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing in accordance with is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  After executing step S10214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the start port.

<Determination processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 21: S10213) of a winning process for the start opening.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, based on the hold information, the hold information is mainly used to determine whether the jackpot lottery is successful, whether the jackpot type is determined, whether there is a reach, whether the game time is variable, and so on. This is a process executed before the control device 60 becomes the target of the big hit lottery.

  In step S10301, a jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot / reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing Step S10301, the process proceeds to Step S10302.

  In step S10302, a variable time information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process for determining the variation time of game times. Details of the variable time information acquisition process will be described later.

  After executing step S10302, the destination determination process is terminated.

<Obtain and reach information acquisition processing>
Next, the jackpot / reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the previous determination process (FIG. 22: S10301).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot / reach information acquisition process. In step S10401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read out by winning the start opening in the start opening winning process (FIG. 21). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10402, and the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery by the current winning is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the pre-determination process executed by the winning prior to the current winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the big winning lottery by the current winning. Thus, the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery by the current winning is executed as the game time is determined.

  In step S10402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the big win lottery by the current winning is executed as a game time (S10402: YES), the process proceeds to step S10403, and the acceptance table storage area Reference is made to the success / failure table for the low probability mode stored in 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10405, and it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10402 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode when the jackpot lottery by the current winning is executed as a game time (S10402: NO), the process proceeds to step S10404 and is used for the high probability mode. As a result of referring to the success / failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10405, and it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to jackpot as a result of referring to the success / failure table for high probability mode.

  In step S10405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S10405: YES), the process proceeds to step S10406, and is stored in the storage area by winning at the current start port. The value of the big hit type counter C2 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10407, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 that has been distributed this time is acquired based on a winning to the first start port 33, the first start port distribution table is referred to, If it is acquired based on a winning at the second start port 34, the second start port distribution table is referred to. After executing Step S10407, the process proceeds to Step S10408.

  In step S10408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S10408 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S10408: YES), the process proceeds to step S10409, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10408 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S10408: NO), the process proceeds to step S10410, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated.

  In step S10405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S10405: NO), the process proceeds to step S10411 and is stored in the storage area by winning at the current start port. The value of the reached reach random number counter C3 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10412, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10413, where it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach as a result of referring to the reach determination table.

  If it is determined in step S10413 that the generation corresponds to the reach occurrence (S10413: YES), the process proceeds to step S10414, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the destination determination process result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10413 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach (S10413: NO), the destination determination process is terminated as it is.

<Variation time information acquisition processing>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the previous determination process (FIG. 22: S10302).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step S10501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area is acquired by winning the start opening in the start opening winning process (FIG. 21). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10502.

  In step S10502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a win. Specifically, the presence / absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery determined by the jackpot / reach information acquisition process. If it is a jackpot (S10502: YES), the process proceeds to step S10503.

  In step S10503, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the jackpot variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing Step S10503, the process proceeds to Step S10507.

  In step S10507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the fluctuation time information acquisition process ends.

  If it is determined in step S10502 that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S10502: NO), the process proceeds to step S10504, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. If it is determined in step S10504 that a reach has occurred (S10504: YES), the process proceeds to step S10505.

  In step S10505, referring to the reach occurrence change time table stored in the change time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, change time information corresponding to the value of the current change type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10507, and the obtained variation time information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the present variation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S10504 that no reach occurs in the current game round (step S10504: NO), the process proceeds to step S10506, and the change time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the change time table storage area 63d is displayed. Referring to, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10507, and the obtained variation time information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the present variation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN are larger. Yes. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to is determined by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game times. Is different. At the time of executing the variable time acquisition process as one process of the destination determination process, that is, at the time of acquiring the variable time of the pending game times that are the target of the destination determination process, the pending game that is the target of the process The number of reservations at the time when the times are executed as game times is unknown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is acquired when it is assumed that the first start hold number RaN = 0 (and the second start hold number RbN = 0). Therefore, the fluctuation time acquired by this fluctuation time acquisition process is the actual fluctuation time when the reserved game time that is the target of the previous determination process is executed as the game time (the fluctuation time acquired in the variable time setting process described later). The value may be different from (time). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time acquired in the fluctuation time acquisition process executed as one process of the previous determination process is also referred to as “temporary fluctuation time”. In the present embodiment, the value of the temporary variation time is used in the process performed when executing the point giving effect. Processing using the temporary variation time will be described later.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN are larger. However, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation time is set to be shorter as the value of the total reserved number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved pieces CRN may be used. The smaller the total number of reserved pieces CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold numbers RbN is larger. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of the second start reserved number RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant number without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach is not generated so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode is used. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, and may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variation time that is easy to select and the variation time that is difficult to select at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach reach may be different Good. Further, a variation time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation time table for normal jackpot, a variation time table for outreach and a variation time table for complete losing may be set individually.

<Winning winning process>
Next, a through winning process will be described. The through winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20: step S10105).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a through winning process. In step S10601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S10601 that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S10601: YES), the process proceeds to step S10602, and whether or not the reserved item SN SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether. Note that the accessory reserve number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory release lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10601 that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S10601: NO), the through-winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S10602 that the number is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory reserve number SN (S10602: YES), the process proceeds to step S10603, and 1 is added to the accessory reserve number SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10604.

  In step S10604, the value of the motor combination release counter C4 updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the power combination holding area 64c of the RAM 64. Then, the through winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10602 that the value of the reserved item SN is not less than the upper limit (S10602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved item SN is the upper limit, The through-winning process is terminated without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S10701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10702.

  In step S10702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demonstration video for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10703.

  In step S10703, output data such as a startup command set in step S10702, a timer interrupt process, or a command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step S10703, the process proceeds to Step S10704.

  In step S10704, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10705.

  In step S10705, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S10706. In step S10706, a game times control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot lottery, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing Step S10706, the process proceeds to Step S10707.

  In step S10707, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10708.

  In step S10708, a power support process for driving and controlling the motor combination 34a provided at the second start port 34 is executed. In the electric combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened. The details of the power combination support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10709.

  In step S10709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly, the start of the command output process in step S10703). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached. If it is determined in step S10709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S10709: NO), in steps S10710 and S10711, until the next normal process execution timing is reached. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time. Specifically, in step S10710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S10711, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S10709: YES), the process returns to step S10703, and the processes from step S10703 to step S10708 are performed. Run.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S10703 to step S10708 changes according to the game state, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 26: S10706).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S10801, it is determined whether or not it is in a special gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned off when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special gaming state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period.

  If it is determined in step S10801 that any of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S10801: YES), it is determined that the game is in the special gaming state, and the processing in and after step S10802 is performed. The game times control process is terminated without executing any of them. In other words, in the special game state, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10801 that the game is not in the special gaming state (S10801: NO), the process proceeds to step S10802.

  In step S10802, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is in a variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when the variable display is started for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display is finished.

  If it is determined in step S10802 that the main display unit 45 is not in a variable display (S10802: NO), the process proceeds to a game round start process in steps S10803 to S10805. In step S10803, it is determined whether or not the total reserved number CRN is “0”. The case where the total reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved number is “0” for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step S10803 that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (S10803: YES), this game number control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10803 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (S10803: NO), the process proceeds to step S10804.

  In step S10804, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S10805, change start processing for starting change display on the main display unit 45 and change display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Details of the variation start process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10806.

  In step S10806, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing Step S10806, the game times control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10802 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display mode (S10802: YES), the game turn progression processing in steps S10807 to S10809 is executed.

  In step S10807, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol sequence starts to vary until all the symbol sequences are stopped, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S10807, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time information stored in the variation time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the variation time information is set in a variation time setting process (FIG. 30) described later. The value of the set variation time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started.

  If it is determined in step S10807 that the variation time has not elapsed (S10807: NO), the process proceeds to step S10808, and variation display processing is executed. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round. After executing Step S10808, the game times control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S10807 that the variation time has elapsed (S10807: YES), the process proceeds to step S10809, and the variation end process is executed. In the variation end process, the result display unit is displayed so that the pattern display to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the variation start process (FIG. 29), which will be described later, is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game round. Control display. After executing Step S10809, the game times control process is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 27: S10804).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S10901, it is determined whether or not the reserved area that is the processing target for executing the data setting process is the first reserved area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 5), the hold information stored first (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra) Information) is stored first in the hold information (first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored in time series in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 5). If it is stored in the holding area prior to the holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, the first hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is earlier than the first hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the processing of step S10901, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  If it is determined in step S10901 that the processing target reserved area is the first reserved area Ra (step S10901: YES), the data setting process for the first reserved area in steps S10902 to S10907 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S10901: NO). ), Data setting processing for the second reserved area in steps S10908 to S10913 is executed.

  In step S10902, 1 is subtracted from the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra, and then the process proceeds to step S10903, where 1 is subtracted from the total hold number CRN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10904. In step S10904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10905.

  In step S10905, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing Step S10905, the process proceeds to Step S10906.

  In step S10906, when the second result display unit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the current variable display is the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10907.

  In step S10907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, corresponding to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the first reserved area Ra, that is, the first start port 33. A command at the time of shift including information indicating that the command is present is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S10907 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal process (FIG. 26). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold to the display control device 100. To do. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  When it is determined in step S10901 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S10901: NO), The process proceeds to step S10908.

  In step S10908, 1 is subtracted from the second start holding number RbN of the second holding area Rb. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10909. In step S10909, 1 is subtracted from the total reserved number CRN, the process proceeds to step S10910, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10911.

  In step S10911, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing Step S10911, the process proceeds to Step S10912.

  In step S10912, when the second result display unit flag in the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10913.

  In step S10913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, corresponding to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, the second start port 34. A command at the time of shift including information indicating that the command is present is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S10913 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal process (FIG. 26). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 27: S10805).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the variation start process. In step S11001, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high probability mode flag is turned on when the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the probable big hit is completed. After that, it is turned OFF when a normal jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S11001 that the mode is the high probability mode (S11001: YES), the process proceeds to step S11002.

  In step S11002, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the high-probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 6B. Determine whether. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S11001: NO), the process proceeds to step S11003.

  In step S11003, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. Determine whether. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11004.

  In step S11004, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S11002 or step S11003 is a big win win. In step S11004, in the case where the result of the determination of success / failure is a jackpot winning (S11004: YES), in step S11005 to step S11012, in order to set the processing for setting the game result in the case of the jackpot winning and the stop result. Execute the process.

  In step S11005, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S11005 that the second result display section flag is not ON (S11005: NO), the process proceeds to step S11006, and the first start port allocation table (see FIG. 8A) is referred to. To make a distribution decision. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of a numerical range per 16R probability variation jackpot, a numerical range per 8R probability variation jackpot, a numerical range per 16R normal jackpot, or a numerical range per 8R normal jackpot Is included.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11005 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S11005: YES), the process proceeds to step S11007, and the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 8B). Referring to, perform the distribution determination. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step S11006 or step S11007. The process proceeds to step S11008.

  In step S11008, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type assigned in step S11006 or step S11007 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S11008 that the game result is a probable big hit (S11008: YES), the process proceeds to step S11009.

  In step S11009, a stop result setting process for probability variation big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is a variation in the state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the current game round that will be won for the probability variation jackpot. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is obtained by referring to the stop result table for probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11009, the process proceeds to Step S11010.

  In step S11010, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 (the jackpot type flag) is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON when it is a 16R probability variation big hit, and the 8R probability variation flag is turned ON when it is an 8R probability variation big hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11008 that the jackpot type assigned in step S11006 or step S11007 is not a probabilistic jackpot (S11008: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, The process proceeds to S11011.

  In step S11011, a normal big hit stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process for normal jackpots varies in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display part 37a or the second result display part 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11011, the process proceeds to Step S11012.

  In step S11012, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 (hit jackpot type flag) is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON when it is a 16R normal big hit, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON when it is an 8R normal big hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11016.

  In step S11004, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S11002 or step S11003 is not a jackpot winning prize (S11004: NO), the process proceeds to step S11013 to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether you are doing it.

  In step S11013, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the game time (S11013: YES), the process proceeds to step S11014.

  In step S11014, a stop result setting process for reach is executed. In this game round, which is a stop result for reach, a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the first result display part 37a or the second result display part 37b to end the variable display. is there. Specifically, the stop result data address information corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the reach stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11014, the process proceeds to Step S11016.

  If it is determined in step S11013 that no reach occurs in the game time (S11013: NO), the process proceeds to step S11015.

  In step S11015, an outage stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process at the time of detachment is to end the variable display in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first result display part 37a or the second result display part 37b in the current game round that becomes a detachment result. This is a process for setting. Specifically, the stop result data address information corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for outage in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11015, the process proceeds to Step S11016.

  In step S11016, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set a variable time that is a time required for the current game round in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b based on whether or not a big hit or a reach has occurred. It is processing of. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S11016, the process proceeds to Step S11017.

  In step S11017, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S11017 that the second result display flag in the RAM 64 is not ON (S11017: NO), the process proceeds to step S11018, and the first variation command is set. The first change command includes information indicating that the current game time relates to the hold information acquired based on the winning at the first start port 33, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And information on the variation time set in step S11016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11017 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S11017: YES), the process proceeds to step S11019, and the second variation command is set. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning at the second start port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And information on the variation time set in step S11016. After executing Step S11018 or Step S11019, the process proceeds to Step S11020.

  In step S11020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on presence / absence of a jackpot and the presence / absence of reach as a result of the allocation determination. That is, in the type command, as information on the jackpot type, information on 16R probability variation jackpot information, information on 8R probability variation jackpot, information on 16R normal jackpot, information on whether or not the 8R regular jackpot, information on whether or not a reach has occurred, and a result of a miss Contains information.

  The variation command and type command set in steps S11018 to S11020 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal process (FIG. 26). Based on the received change command and type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect at the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing Step S11020, the process proceeds to Step S11021.

  In step S11021, the variable display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second result display flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second result display unit flag is ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is identified as the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S11021, the variation start process is terminated.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The change time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a change start process subroutine (FIG. 29: S11016).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variation time. In step S11101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11102.

  In step S11102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If any flag is ON (S11102: YES), the process proceeds to step S11103.

  In step S11103, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the big hit variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11107, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S11102 that the big win lottery relating to the current game round is not a win (S11102: NO), the process proceeds to step S11104, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since the main process (S11104) is executed when the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round is not won in step S11102, reach will occur in the game rounds that are not won the jackpot lottery in step S11104. It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach has occurred (S11104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S11105. Note that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when the occurrence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3 is specified.

  In step S11105, with reference to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating reach is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11107, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S11104 that no reach will occur in the current game round (S11104: NO), the process proceeds to step S11106, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11107, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table indicates that the fluctuation time increases as the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN increase. It is set to be shorter. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to is determined by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game times. Is different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN are larger. However, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation time is set to be shorter as the value of the total reserved number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved pieces CRN may be used. The smaller the total number of reserved pieces CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold numbers RbN is larger. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of the second start reserved number RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant number without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach is not generated so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode is used. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, and may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variation time that is easy to select and the variation time that is difficult to select at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach reach may be different Good. Further, a variation time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation time table for normal jackpot, a variation time table for outreach and a variation time table for complete losing may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 26: S10707).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S11201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special gaming state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the special gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S11201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S11201: NO), the process proceeds to step S11202, and it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11202 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S11202: NO), the process proceeds to step S11203, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  When it is determined in step S11203 that the opening period flag is not ON (S11203: NO), the process proceeds to step S11204, and the timing at which the symbol variation display on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is ended. It is determined whether or not. In step S11204, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display is finished (S11204: NO), the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is determined in step S11204 that it is the timing when the variable display is finished (S11204: YES), the process proceeds to step S11205, and the game result of the current game round (the result of the jackpot lottery) is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not it is compatible. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R probability change flag, the 8R probability change flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the flags is ON (S11205: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S11205 that the game result of the current game round (the result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (S11205: YES), the process proceeds to step S11206, and the high probability mode Turn off the flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11207.

  In step S11207, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the special gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, “3000” (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 for determining the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11207, the process proceeds to Step S11208.

  In step S11208, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal process (FIG. 26). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S11208, the process proceeds to step S11209, where the opening period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S11203 that the opening period flag is ON (S11203: YES), the process proceeds to step S11210.

  In step S11210, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is “0”. If it is determined in step S11210 that the opening period has ended (S11210: YES), the process proceeds to step S11211, and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11212.

  In step S11212, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Check. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step S11212, the process proceeds to Step S11213.

  In step S11213, the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the big hit type flag (16R probability change flag, 8R probability change flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 is checked. If it is determined in step S11213 that the big hit type flag stored in the RAM 64 is a 16R probability variation flag or a 16R normal flag (S11213: YES), the process proceeds to step S11214, and is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11213 that the big hit type flag stored in the RAM 64 is an 8R probability variation flag or an 8R normal flag (S11213: NO), the process proceeds to step S11215 and is provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. “8” is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing Step S11214 or Step S11215, the process proceeds to Step S11216.

  In step S11216, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S 11202 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S 11202: YES), the process proceeds to step S 11217, and a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed. Specifically, when the grand prize winning opening 36a is closed, the variable prize driving unit 36c is set in the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is “1” or more. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big prize opening 36a is being opened, the variable prize driving unit is provided on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big prize opening 36a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the special winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the big prize opening / closing process will be described later. After executing Step S11217, the process proceeds to Step S11218.

  In step S11218, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S11219: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S11218: YES), the process proceeds to step S11219, and the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing Step S11219, the process proceeds to Step S11220.

  In step S11220, a round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step S11220, the process proceeds to Step S11221.

  In step S11221, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the ending period in the special gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set in each ending period. Specifically, “3000” (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 for determining the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11221, the process proceeds to Step S11222.

  In step S11222, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10603 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing Step S11222, the process proceeds to Step S11223.

  In step S11223, the ending period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S11201 that the ending period flag is ON (S11201: YES), the process proceeds to step S11224.

  In step S11224, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S11223), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step S11224 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S11224: YES), the process proceeds to step S11225.

  In step S11225, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11226, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing Step S11226, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11224 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not “0” (S11224: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the prize winning opening / closing process will be described. The big prize opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 31: 11217) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special prize opening / closing process. In step S11301, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S11301 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S11301: NO), the process proceeds to step S11302, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S11302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S11302: YES), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S11302: NO), the process proceeds to step S11303.

  In step S11303, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11303 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S11303: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11303 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11304, and the variable prize driving unit is opened to open the big prize opening 36a. Let 36c be a driving state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11305.

  In step S11305, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since all the winning modes that are set are the high-frequency winning modes, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 36 a, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64 d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. If the low-frequency winning mode is set in the pachinko machine 10, for example, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and “6” is set in the winning counter area PC. May be set. After executing Step S11305, the process proceeds to Step S11306.

  In step S11306, a release command is set. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The release command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the sub-side control devices to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a is started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by external output processing (FIG. 26: step S10703). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been started, and the effect contents on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Is updated to the content corresponding to the start of the release of. The sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received release command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been started, and the display contents of the effect on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the large winning opening 36a has been opened. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S11301 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S11301: YES), the process proceeds to step S11307, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0”. To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S11307: NO), the process proceeds to step S11308.

  In step S11308, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11308 that no winning has occurred (S11308: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11308 that a winning has occurred (S11308: YES), the process proceeds to step S11309, and the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11310.

  In step S11310, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S11310 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S11310: NO), the main winning a prize opening / closing process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S11307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S11307: YES), or when the value of the winning counter area PC is determined to be “0” in step S11310 (S11310: YES), the process proceeds to step S11311 to execute a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11312.

  In step S11312, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11313, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S11313 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S11313: YES), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11313 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S11313: NO), “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S11314, the process proceeds to step S11315 to set a close command. Thereafter, the special prize opening / closing process is terminated.

  The set closing command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 which are the control devices on the sub side to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed. In the external output process (FIG. 26: step S10703), the signal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the one-round large winning opening 36a has been completed, and the contents of the effects on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and the effect on the symbol display device 41 is ended with the opening of the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 31: S11226).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S11401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot as the jackpot type flag is turned on in the RAM 64. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S11401 that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag in the RAM 64 is ON (S11401: YES), the process proceeds to step S11402, and flag erasure processing is executed. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing Step S11402, the process proceeds to Step S11403.

  In step S11403, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S11404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the game state is shifted to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11405.

  In step S11405, 100 is set to the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11406.

  In step S11406, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11401 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S11401: NO), the process proceeds to step S11407, and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11408.

  In step S11408, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S11409, where 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11410.

  In step S11410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is transmitted as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power combination support process will be described. The electric utility support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 26: S10708) of normal processing.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the power combination support process. In step S11501, it is determined whether support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S11501 that the supporting flag is not ON (S11501: NO), the process proceeds to step S11502.

  In step S11502, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the electrified object opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be opened is turned ON, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S11502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S11502: NO), the process proceeds to step S11503.

  In step S11503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S11503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S11503: NO), the main role support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11503: YES), the process proceeds to step S11504.

  In step S11504, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step S11504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S11504: YES), the process proceeds to step S11505, and after setting the out-of-display, the main role support process is terminated. By setting the out-of-display, the symbol change display in the general-purpose unit 38 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S11504: NO), the process proceeds to step S11506.

  In step S11506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved item number SN is greater than “0”. If it is determined in step S11506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is “0” (S11506: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0” (S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step S11507.

  In step S11507, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S11508 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S11507 (S11507: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step S11508 (S11508: YES), the process proceeds to step S11509, and the electric-powered article opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. The winner will be won (see FIG. 9B). Further, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 simultaneously with the lottery for opening the electric accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11510.

  In step S11510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S11509 is a support win. In step S11510, when it is determined that the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery is support winning (S11510: YES), the process proceeds to step S11511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter 64 is provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11510 that the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery is not support winning (S11510: NO), the process proceeds to step S11512 without executing the process of step S11511.

  In step S11512, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S11512 that the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode (S11512: YES), the process proceeds to step S11513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11512 that the winning / raising lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S11512: NO), the main role support process is terminated as it is.

  In step S11513, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S11513 that the game number counter area is not “0” (S11513: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11513 that the game number counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S11514, and the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11515.

  In step S11515, the low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the electronic role support process is terminated.

  The low frequency support command set in step S11515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 26: step S10703). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode.

  If it is determined in step S11507 that the opening / closing execution mode is selected (S11507: YES), or if it is determined in step S11518 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (S11508: NO), the process proceeds to step S11516, and the electric component opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric charge holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric charge release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric charge release lottery is performed. Winning. At the same time as the lottery for the opening of the electric accessory, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11517.

  In step S11517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S11516 is a support win. If it is determined in step S11517 that the support is not won (S11517: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11517 that the support win is selected (S11517: YES), the process proceeds to step S11518, the support win flag is turned ON, and “2” is set in the second round counter area RC2. Then, the main power support process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S11502 that the support winning flag is ON (S11502: YES), the process proceeds to step S11519, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. If it is determined in step S11519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S11519: NO), since the variation display of the pattern in the normal unit 38 is being performed, the main role support process is continued. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11519: YES), the process proceeds to step S11520.

  In step S11520, a win display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the general map unit 38 is terminated in a state where the hit display is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11521, where the supporting flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S11501 that the in-support flag is ON (S11501: YES), the process proceeds to step S11522, and an electric combination opening / closing control process for opening / closing the electric combination 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

<Electric power switch control processing>
Next, the electric role opening / closing control process will be described. The power combination opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the power combination support process (FIG. 34: S11522).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the electrical combination opening / closing control process. In step S11601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (S11601: YES), the process proceeds to step S11602.

  In step S11602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S11602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S11602: NO), the main utility opening / closing control process is terminated. In other words, when the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric switch opening / closing control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11602: YES), the process proceeds to step S11603, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to a closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the duration of opening of the electric accessory 34a is “0”, the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is now electrically operated. As a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step S11603, the process proceeds to Step S11604.

  In step S11604, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, and then the process proceeds to step S11605, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S11605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S11605: NO), the main role opening / closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S11605: YES), the process proceeds to step S11606, and the supporting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S11601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S11601: NO), the process proceeds to step S11607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S11607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11607: NO), the main utility opening / closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11507 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11607: YES), the process proceeds to step S11608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to an open state is executed. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11609.

  In step S11609, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode (S11609: NO), the process proceeds to step S11610, and it is determined whether or not it is the high-frequency support mode. To do.

  If it is determined in step S11610 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S11610: YES), the process proceeds to step S11611, and “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11609 that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode (S11609: YES), or if it is determined in step S11610 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (S11610: NO), the process proceeds to step S11612. “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing control process is terminated.

A5. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. A part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in part of the ROM 93 area.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, an effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected, and a display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control apparatus 100 includes an MPU 102 which is a chip in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 41 to display it.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106. Further, it is possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are respectively referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side. The ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

A6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described.

  In step S11701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling the command received from the main MPU 62 to be stored and read out. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step S11701, the process proceeds to Step S11702.

  In step S11702, command response processing is executed. The command handling process is a process executed in response to the command received from the main MPU 62. Details of the command response processing will be described later. After executing Step S11702, the process proceeds to Step S11703.

  In step S11703, point grant effect execution processing is executed. The point giving effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point giving effect during the game times. Details of the point giving effect execution process will be described later. After executing Step S11703, the process proceeds to Step S11704.

  In step S11704, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process in step S11702 and the point giving effect execution process in step S4703. After executing Step S11704, the process proceeds to Step S11705.

  In step S11705, an audio output control process for performing audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the command corresponding process in step S11702. After executing step S11705, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Command processing>
Next, command response processing will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37: S11702).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command response processing. In step S11801, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S11801 that a hold command has been received (S11801: YES), the process proceeds to step S11802. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11801 that a hold command has not been received (S11801: NO), the process proceeds to step S11806.

  In step S11802, a winning update process is executed. In the update process at the time of winning a prize, the number of hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, the number of hold information acquired based on the win to the second start port 34, and these hold A process for enabling the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S11802 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of hold information acquired based on winning in the first start port 33 is also referred to as “first hold number”, and the number of hold information acquired based on winning in the second start port 34 is referred to as “first hold number”. Also referred to as “second reserved number”, the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing Step S11802, the process proceeds to Step S11803.

  In step S11803, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33 identified in step S11802, and the number of hold information acquired based on the win to the second start port 34 Based on, the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is controlled. After executing Step S11803, the process proceeds to Step S11804.

  In step S11804, the contents of the hold command are stored in the game times setting information storage area 94d. That is, the information acquired by the destination determination process executed by the main MPU 62 is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 92 by the hold command, and the information of the destination determination process included in the transmitted hold command is stored in the game times setting information storage area. 94d is stored.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the game times setting information storage area 94d. The game time setting information storage area 94d includes a first start port game time setting information storage area and a second start port game time setting information storage area. FIG. 39A shows a first start opening game number setting information storage area, and FIG. 39B shows a second start opening game number setting information storage area. Since the first start opening game times setting information storage area and the second start opening game times setting information storage area have the same configuration, the first start opening game times setting shown in FIG. The information storage area will be described, and the description of the game start setting information storage area for the second start port shown in FIG. 39 (b) will be omitted.

  As shown in the drawing, the first start opening game times setting information storage area is divided into a first determination information area and an effect information area. Each information stored in the first start game number setting information storage area is stored for each reserved game number. The reserved game times (n = 1 to 4) shown in the first start port game number setting information storage area are changed from the reserved game times of the first start port (n = 1) to the reserved game times of the first start port (n = 1). The reserved game times are executed in the order of n = 4).

  In the first determination information area of the first start opening game number setting information storage area, information acquired by the first determination process executed by the main MPU 62 for each reserved start game number (n) for the first start opening (hereinafter, referred to as the first determination information storage area). , Also referred to as destination determination information). The destination determination information is information acquired by the destination determination process executed by the main side MPU 62, and is information transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the sound light side MPU 92 by the hold command. The sound light side MPU 92 stores the information included in the hold command in the first determination information area of the first start opening game number setting information storage area.

  The effect information area of the first start game number setting information storage area is a storage area in which information set by the effect information setting process described later is stored based on the information stored in the previous determination information area. The effect information area will be described later.

  In the first determination information area of the first start opening game number setting information storage area, for each reserved game number, the presence / absence of jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of reach, and the temporary variation time are stored. As described above, the temporary variation time is determined based on the assumption that the first start hold number RaN = 0 and the second start hold number RbN = 0 when the hold game time is executed as a game time. Is the fluctuation time.

  The destination determination information stored in the destination determination information area and the effect information stored in the effect information area are linked to each reserved game number itself, and each time a game number is executed, the stored area is adjacent. Shift to the storage area of the reserved game times. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), when the game times are executed once, the destination determination information and the effect information stored in the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 2) are stored in the reserved game times ( n = 1) is shifted to the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 3), and the previous determination information and effect information stored in the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 2) are shifted to the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 2). The previous determination information and the effect information stored in the storage area of game times (n = 4) are shifted to the storage area of reserved game times (n = 3).

  The description returns to FIG. After executing Step S11804, the process proceeds to Step S11805. In step S11805, effect information setting processing is executed. The effect information setting process is a process of making various determinations based on information stored in the game times setting information storage area and setting various items related to effects to be executed in each game time. Details of the effect information setting process will be described later. After executing Step S11805, the process proceeds to Step S11806.

  In step S11806, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S11806 that a change command and a type command have been received (S11806: YES), the process proceeds to step S11807.

  In step S11807, effect setting processing is executed. The effect setting process is a process for setting an effect to be executed in the game times. The effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S11807, the process proceeds to step S11808.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11806 that the change command and the type command have not been received (S11806: NO), the process proceeds to step S11808 without executing step S11807.

  In step S11808, processing for responding to other commands received from the main MPU 62 is executed. After executing step S11808, the command corresponding process is terminated.

<Renewal process at the time of winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning a prize will be described. The update process at the time of winning a prize is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for command processing (FIG. 38: S11802).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning a prize. In step S11901, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S11901 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33 (S11901: YES), the process proceeds to step S11902, and the sound light Update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the first start port 33. In the update process of the first reserved number counter area, the information in the first reserved number counter area is updated to the information on the number of held items included in the held command that has been read this time. After executing Step S11902, the process proceeds to Step S11904.

  In step S11901, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S11901: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that the transmission is based on the winning to 34, the process proceeds to step S11903, and the update processing of the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound side RAM 94 is executed. . The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 the number of reserved information acquired based on winning at the second start port 34. In the update process of the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information on the reserved number included in the command to be read this time. After executing Step S11903, the process proceeds to Step S11904.

  The reason why the processes in steps S11902 and S11903 are as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not. For this reason, when the power supply is shut off in a situation where the hold information related to winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 stores the hold information. While stored and held, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if the configuration in which the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area is counted up every time the hold command is received in the sound emission control device 90 is adopted, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold memory. Inconvenience may occur that the number of held information and the number of held information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of hold, and the voice light emission control device 90 receives the hold command every time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved items included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

  In step S11904, update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound side RAM 94 is executed. The total number-of-holds counter area is the sum of the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on winnings to the first start port 33 and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on winnings to the second start port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In the update process, the information on the total reserved number counter area is the sum information of the reserved number information measured in the first reserved number counter area and the reserved number information measured in the second reserved number counter area. Update to After executing step S11904, the update process at the time of the final winning is finished.

<Production information setting process>
Next, the effect information setting process will be described. The effect information setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 38: S11805) of the command response process.

  As described above, the effect information setting process is a process of making various determinations based on information stored in the game times setting information storage area and setting various items related to effects to be executed in each game time. The various items thus set are stored in the effect information area of the game times setting information storage area. For convenience of explanation, first, description will be made on the effect information area (see FIG. 39) of the game times setting information storage area (first start port game times setting information storage area, second start port game times setting information storage area). To do. Thereafter, the effect information setting process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the effect information area of the first start game number setting information storage area includes a point grant effect flag, a continuous effect final game number flag, and a carry forward game number flag for each reserved game number. , A storage area for the total number of granted points, production scenario No, and point grant scenario No.

  The point grant effect flag will be described. The point granting effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the game times are set to game times for executing the point giving effect.

  The continuous effect final game times flag will be described. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is a point giving effect in a case where accumulated points are carried over across game times and the accumulated points are used over a plurality of game times. And the last game time of the game times which perform a continuous effect is also called a continuous effect last game time. The continuous effect final game times flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game times are set to the continuous effect final game times.

  The carry-over game times flag will be described. In the present embodiment, the carry-over game times are game times executed before the continuous effect final game time among the game times for executing the continuous effect, that is, the game times in which the accumulation points are carried over. The carry-over game times flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game times are set to the carry-over game times.

  Note that the above-described point granting effect flag, continuous effect final game times flag, and carry-over game times flag stored in the effect information area are set to the effects of game times corresponding to these flags in the effect setting process described later. Thereafter, it is turned off (reset) by updating the game times setting information storage area (FIG. 51: S12112).

  More specifically, the continuous production final game times and the carry-over game times will be described. For example, in the case of the point giving effect (case 2) in FIG. 15, the accumulated points are a series of three games of game times U1 to U3. The point giving effect is a continuous effect executed over three game times. The game times U1 and U2 are game times in which accumulated points are carried over, and are therefore carry-over game times. The game time U3 is the last game time of the continuous effect since it is the last game time among the game times in which the continuous effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game times for executing a continuous effect is referred to as the number of executed games Np. In the case of the point giving effect (case 2) in FIG. 15, since the continuous effect is executed using three game times, Np = 3. The number of executed games Np is used in the process (effect information setting process).

  The production scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as production scenario No.) will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect scenario refers to various types of effects executed in the processing target game times, such as the type of moving image executed in the processing target game times, the timing of executing the moving images, the timing of executing the point giving effects, and the like. This is a program in which items are set. The sound light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of effect scenarios. The production scenario No. is a code given corresponding to each production scenario, and is used to specify one production scenario.

  A point grant scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as a point grant scenario No.) will be described. In the present embodiment, the point grant scenario is a program in which the number of points given in the point grant effect set for each effect scenario is set. The sound light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of point giving scenarios. The point grant scenario No. is a code given corresponding to each point grant scenario, and is used to specify one point grant scenario. This completes the description of the effect information area of the game times setting information storage area.

  Next, the production information setting process will be described. In the effect information setting process, effect information stored in the effect information area corresponding to the reserved game times being processed (point grant effect flag, continuous effect last game times flag, carry forward game times flag, total number of points awarded) , Production scenario No., point grant scenario No).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect information setting process. The processing executed in the effect information setting processing is mainly composed of three processing groups.

  The processing group of step S12003 to step S12008 is a processing group for setting the production information of the processing target game times when the result of the big winning lottery of the processing target game times is “hit” or “disappearance (reach occurrence)”. is there.

  The processing group of steps S12011 to S12015 is a case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “out (reach non-occurrence)”, and the processing target game times are set as the continuous effect final game times. And a processing group for setting the production information of the processing target game times.

  The processing group of step S12016 to step S12018 is a case where the result of the big win lottery of the processing target game times is “disappearance (no reach)”, and the processing target game times have continuity with other game times. This is a processing group for setting the effect information of the processing target game times when the point giving effect is not executed (when the continuous effect is not executed) or when the point giving effect is not executed.

  The details of the production information setting process will be described below. For convenience of explanation, the determination process (step S12001, step S12002, step S12010) for determining which of the three processing groups is executed will be described first. The processing group from step S12016 to step S12018 will be described, the processing group from step S12003 to step S12008 will be described, and finally the processing group from step S12011 to step S12015 will be described.

  In step S12001, the information stored in the game times setting information storage area is read. When the processing target game times are based on the game balls entering the first start port 33, the information recorded in the first start port game time setting information storage area is read and the processing target game times are the second. When it is based on the game ball entering the start port 34, the information recorded in the second start port game number setting information storage area is read. After executing step S12001, the process proceeds to step S12002.

  In step S12002, the result of the big win lottery of the processing target game times is “big hit” or “out (reach occurrence)” based on the information in the destination determination information area corresponding to the processing target game times in the game time setting information storage area. Determine if there is. In step S12002, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is neither “big hit” nor “miss (reach occurrence)”, that is, when it is determined that it is “out (reach non-occurrence)” (S12002: NO), the process proceeds to step S12010.

  In step S12010, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect final game number flag of the reserved game number (preceding reserved game number) immediately before the processing target game number is ON. By executing this process, a continuous effect is set in which the previous reserved game number (the preceding reserved game number) is set to the carry-on game number and the process target game number is set to the continuous effect last game number. It is determined whether or not execution is possible. In the present embodiment, in the case of executing a continuous production in which the game times in which the result of the jackpot lottery is “out (reach non-occurrence)” is set as the continuous production final game times, the number of game times for executing the continuous production ( Since the number of executed games Np) is set to 2, the preceding game number that is the target of the determination as to whether or not the continuous effect final game number flag is ON is the preceding pending game one before the processing target game number. Only once.

  At the time when the effect information setting process in the processing target game times is executed, if the point reservation effect is not executed in the preceding reservation game times immediately before the processing target game times, or the preceding reservation game times When the point granting effect is set to be executed once (the continuous effect is not executed), the continuous effect final game times flag of the preceding reserved game times is set to OFF. It should be noted that at the time when the effect information setting process in the processing target game times is executed, the preceding reserved game times immediately before the processing target game times are not set as the carry-over game times in the continuous effects, and the processing target games There is no case where the continuous effect final game times flag of the preceding reserved game times is set to OFF because the preceding reserved game times one time before is the carry-over game times. The reason will be described below.

  At the time when the effect information setting process in the processing target game times is executed, the effect information of the preceding reserved game times is already set, but in the present embodiment, the effect information setting process in the processing target game times is executed. Along with this, there is a case where the production information of the previously reserved advance game times is corrected (reset). In the present embodiment, after the continuous production final game times are set, the preceding reserved game times executed prior to the continuous production final game times are set (reset) as carry forward game times. . Therefore, at the time when the effect information setting process in the process target game times is executed (that is, when the effect information of the process target game times is not yet set), the preceding reserved game times immediately before the process target game times are It is not set to carry-over game times in continuous production. Note that the case where the previously set advance pending game times effect information is corrected (reset) will be described in detail when the processing group of steps S12003 to S12008 and the processing group of steps S12011 to S12015 are described.

  If it is determined in step S12010 that the continuous effect final game number flag of the preceding reserved game number one time before the processing target game number is ON (S12010: YES), the process proceeds to step S12016. That is, the process proceeds to the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018. As described above, the processing group of step S12016 to step S12018 is a case where the result of the big win lottery of the processing target game times is “disappearance (no reach)”, and other processing times in the processing target game times. This is a processing group for setting effect information of the processing target game times when a point giving effect that does not have the continuity is executed (when a continuous effect is not executed) or when a point giving effect is not executed. In the present embodiment, at the time of setting the effect of the processing target game times, the setting of the continuous effect final game times is given priority for the preceding pending game times that are already set as the continuous effect final game times. It is not corrected (reset) to the carry-over game times in the continuous performance. Therefore, in step S12010, if the continuous effect final game times flag of the preceding reserved game times immediately before the processing target game times is ON, the processing target game times do not have continuity with the preceding reserved game times. A processing group for setting an effect (processing group in steps S12016 to S12018) is executed.

  In step S12016, it is determined by lottery whether or not the point giving effect is executed in the processing target game times. The point giving effect in the process is a point giving effect that is executed once in the processing target game times without having continuity with other game times. In the present embodiment, the lottery in this process is performed using a predetermined random number, and the probability that a lottery result of executing a point giving effect is 50% is set. After executing Step S12016, the process proceeds to Step S12017.

  In step S12017, the result of the lottery in step S12016 is determined. If it is determined that the lottery result is that the point giving effect is executed in the processing target game round (S12017: YES), the process proceeds to step S12018.

  In step S12018, the total of points awarded in the point granting effect executed in one processing target game time (total given points) is determined. In this process, the total granted points are determined by a predetermined lottery, and the total granted points are set to be between 0 points and 9 points. That is, it is set so that 10 points are accumulated in the processing target game times and the button press effect is not executed. This is to prevent the player from giving an unnecessary expectation by causing the button press effect to be executed in the game times in which the result of the jackpot lottery is neither “hit” nor “miss” (reach occurrence). After executing Step S12018, the process proceeds to Step S12009.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result of step S12016 is determined in step S12017 and it is determined that the lottery result is that the point giving effect is not executed in the processing target game times (S12017: NO), step S12018 is not executed. The process proceeds to step S12009.

  In step S12009, the effect information area of the game times setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the matters determined in steps S12016 to S12018 are recorded in the effect information area of the game times setting information recording area. For example, when it is determined that the point granting effect is executed once in the processing target game times, the point giving effect flag is set to ON, the continuous effect final game times flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game times flag is set to OFF. The total granted points are set to the value of the total granted points determined in step S12018. The production scenario No and the point grant scenario No are set to NULL. In the present embodiment, only for the game times for which the continuous effect final game times flag is ON, an effect effect pattern to be executed in the game times is generated from the effect scenario and the point grant scenario. As for the effects to be executed in the game times in which the continuous effect final game times flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read out from an effect pattern table prepared in advance. The effect pattern table that is set when the point granting effect is executed once in the processing target game times will be described later.

  Further, when it is determined that the point granting effect is not executed in the processing target game times, the point giving effect flag is set to OFF, the continuous effect final game times flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game times flag is set to OFF. The total granted point is not set and is NULL. The production scenario No and the point grant scenario No are not set and are NULL.

  In step S12009, after updating the effect information area of the game times setting information recording area, the effect information setting process ends.

  Next, the process group of step S12003 to step S12008 will be described. As described above, the processing group of steps S12003 to S12008 shows the effect information of the processing target game times when the result of the big winning lottery of the processing target game times is “big hit” or “out (reach occurrence)”. This is a processing group to be set.

  As described above, in step S12002, based on the information in the destination determination information area corresponding to the processing target gaming times in the gaming number setting information storage area, the result of the big winning lottery of the processing target gaming times is “big hit” or “off ( It is determined whether or not “reach occurrence”. If it is determined in step S12002 that the result of the big win lottery of the processing target game times is “big win” or “out (reach occurrence)” (S12002: YES), the flow proceeds to step S12003.

  In step S12003, the continuous effect final game times flag of the preceding reserved game times before the process target game times in the game time setting information storage area is read, and the continuous effect final game times flag is continuously OFF as viewed from the process target game times. The number of pre-reserved game times is specified. In this process, by specifying the number of preceding pending game times for which the continuous effect final game number flag is continuously OFF as viewed from the processing target game times, the preceding reserved game times before the processing target game times are identified. Is used as a carry-over game time, and it is determined whether or not a continuous effect using the processing target game time as a continuous effect final game time is executable. Although the production information of the preceding reserved game times prior to the processing target game times has already been set, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect final game times flag is continuously turned off as viewed from the processing target game times. The preceding reserved game times are determined as game times that can be reset as carry-over game times. Hereinafter, the number of preceding reserved game times in which the continuous effect final game number flag is continuously OFF as viewed from the processing target game number is also referred to as a resettable game number Fn.

  For example, in the case of the first start game number setting information storage area shown in FIG. 39 (a), if the processing target game number is the reserved game number (n = 4), the reserved game number (n = 4) ), The continuous effect final game times flag of the reserved game times (n = 3) and the reserved game times (n = 2), which are consecutive game times as viewed from), is continuously OFF. In this case, the resettable game The number of times Fn = 2. Note that the first start opening game number setting information storage area shown in FIG. 39A shows a case where the reserved game number (n = 4) is the processing target game number of the effect information setting process. Information in the effect information area of the reserved game times (n = 4) is not set. That is, information of the effect information area is set by the effect information setting process.

  In addition, if the number of preceding pending game times in which the continuous effect final game number flag is continuously OFF as viewed from the processing target game number is 0, the resettable game number Fn = 0 is set. To do.

  After executing Step S12003, the process proceeds to Step S12004.

  In step S12004, based on the resettable game frequency Fn specified in step S12003, the number of game times that can be used for continuous production (hereinafter, the number of executed games Np) is determined. In the present embodiment, the number of executed games Np is determined by lottery using random numbers. As described above, since the resettable game number Fn is the number of game times that can be used as a carry-over effect, the maximum value that can be taken as the executed game number Np is the final number of consecutive effects in the resettable game number Fn. The value obtained by adding 1 as the number of game times. Therefore, in step S12004, the number Np of execution games which becomes a value below Fn + 1 is determined by predetermined lottery. The random number used for the lottery may be acquired when the game ball enters the start port corresponding to the processing target game round, or may be acquired when the lottery is executed. When the resettable game number Fn = 0, the number of executed games Np is inevitably 1. After executing Step S12004, the process proceeds to Step S12005.

  In step S12005, an effect scenario is determined based on the temporary variation time of the processing target game times. As described above, the effect scenario includes various items related to effects executed in the processing target game times, such as the type of moving images executed in the processing target game times, the timing of executing the moving images, the timing of executing point giving effects, and the like. Is a set program. In the present embodiment, the effect scenario is determined with reference to the jackpot effect scenario table or the reach effect scenario table stored in the sound side ROM 93. When the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game round is “Big Jack”, the stage scenario is determined using the jackpot stage scenario scenario table. When the jackpot lottery result is “Out (reach occurs), the reach stage scenario” A production scenario is determined using a table.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a jackpot effect scenario table. As shown in the figure, in the jackpot effect scenario table, four types of effect scenarios correspond to one variation time (temporary variation time) that can be set for the processing target game times. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a reach effect scenario table. Similar to the jackpot effect scenario table, four types of effect scenarios correspond to one variation time (temporary variation time) that can be set for the processing target game times.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an effect scenario corresponding to the temporary variation time T = t4 in the jackpot effect scenario table as an example. FIG. 44 (a) shows a jackpot effect scenario (effect scenario Esc (D1) to effect scenario Esc (D4)) corresponding to the temporary variation time T = t4. As shown in the figure, each of the four types of effect scenarios is set corresponding to the length of the temporary variation time T = t4, and the type of effect to be executed, the point giving effect, and the button press effect are executed. The timing is different. In the figure, “pseudo-continuous” indicates a pseudo-continuous effect, “Bt” indicates a button press effect, and “Pe” indicates a point grant effect.

  Further, the variation time of the game times varies depending on the number of reserved game times when the game times corresponding to the effect scenario are executed. In this embodiment, the greater the number of reserved game times, the shorter the variation time of the game times. Therefore, in this embodiment, each production scenario is prepared for each number of reserved game times.

  FIG. 44 (b) illustrates that one type of effect scenario (effect scenario Esc (D1)) is prepared for each number of reserved game times (first start reserved number RaN: 0 to 4). It is explanatory drawing. As shown in the figure, each effect scenario has the same effect animation and point execution effect execution times, etc., but the effect scenario that is applied when the number of reserved game times is large has a shorter execution time. It is set to be.

  In step S12005 (FIG. 41), four types of effect scenarios corresponding to the provisional variation time of the processing target game times are specified from the jackpot effect scenario table (or reach effect scenario table), and the four specified effect scenarios are specified. One effect scenario is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. Note that the process of selecting one of the five effect scenarios shown in FIG. 44B is selected according to the number of reserved game times immediately before the game times corresponding to the effect scenario are executed. After executing Step S12005, the process proceeds to Step S12006.

  In step S12006, a point grant scenario corresponding to the number Np of executed games is determined based on the determined effect scenario. The point grant scenario is a program in which the number of points given in the point grant effect set for each effect scenario is set. In this process, a point grant scenario is determined based on the jackpot / reach point grant scenario table stored in the sound side ROM 93.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a jackpot / reach point grant scenario table. As shown in the figure, two point granting scenarios are set corresponding to each production scenario and each number of executed games Np (1 to 4) determined in step S12004. In this process, two point grant scenarios are identified based on the determined production scenario and the number of executed games Np, and one point grant scenario is selected from the two specified point grant scenarios by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. decide. Actually, as shown in FIG. 45, in the jackpot / reach point grant scenario table, two point grant scenarios No. are set corresponding to each number of executed games Np. When the point grant scenario No. is determined, the point grant scenario corresponding to the point grant scenario No is read from the sound side ROM 93.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a jackpot / reach point grant scenario. As shown in the figure, in each point grant scenario, the value of the grant point suitable for the effect scenario executed in the processing target game times is set in the order of execution of the point grant effect set in the effect scenario, and the number of executed games Corresponding to Np, the total number of points awarded in each preceding game round is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the point grant scenario Psc (A2g) is a case where the effect scenario set in the processing target game times is Esc (A2) and the number of executed games Np = 4. Selected. In Psc (A2g), the number of points awarded in the processing target game times is set for each point granting effect to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46, the first point grant effect in the processing target game times is 1 point, the second point grant effect is 2 points, the third point grant effect is 3 points, the fourth time In the point giving effect, 1 point is given, and 2 points are given in the fifth point giving effect.

  In each point grant scenario, the total number of points awarded in the point grant effect executed in the preceding game times 1 to 3 is set. In FIG. 46, the game time executed immediately before the game time (processing game time) is referred to as preceding game time 1, and the game time executed immediately before the preceding game time 1 is indicated. The preceding game number 2 is indicated, and the game number executed immediately before the preceding game number 2 is indicated as the preceding game number 3. In the case of the point grant scenario Psc (A2g) of FIG. 46 exemplified above, the total number of points awarded in the preceding game round 1 executed immediately before the processing game round is 5 points. The total number of awarded points in the preceding game round 2 executed immediately before is 4 points, and the total number of awarded points in the preceding game round 3 executed immediately before the preceding game round 2 is 1 point. The timing for executing the point giving effect in each of the preceding game times 1 to 3 and the number of points given in one point giving effect are the variation time of each preceding game number and the total given points in the effect setting process described later. Determined based on the number. After executing Step S12006, the process proceeds to Step S12007.

  In step S12007, it is determined whether or not the number Np of executed games determined in step S12004 is 2 or more. That is, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect is executed with the processing target game times set as the continuous effect final game times and the preceding game times set as the carry-over game times. More specifically, in the case where a continuous production with the preceding game times set as the carry-over game times is executed, it is necessary to reset (correct) the production information already set for the preceding game times. By determining whether or not the number of executed games Np is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not resetting is necessary. If it is determined in step S12007 that the number of executed games Np is 2 or more (S12007: YES), the process proceeds to step S12008.

  In step S12008, the total awarded points for each preceding game number stored in the point award scenario set for the processing target game times are read. That is, the total awarded points in the point giving effect executed at each preceding game round are read. After executing Step S12008, the process proceeds to Step S12009.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12007 that the number of executed games Np is not 2 or more (S12007: NO), the process proceeds to step S12009 without executing step S12008.

  In step S12009, the effect information area of the game times setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the matters determined in steps S12003 to S12008 are recorded in the effect information area of the game times setting information recording area. For example, when it is decided to use the preceding reserved game times before the processing target game times as carry-over game times and execute the continuous effect using the processing target game times as the continuous effect final game times, it is used as the carry-over game time. The point giving effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the preceding game times is set to ON, the continuous effect final game times flag is turned OFF, and the carry-over game times flag is reset to ON. As the total awarded points, the total awarded points in each preceding game number read in step S12008 are reset. The production scenario No and the point grant scenario No are reset as NULL. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the effect to be executed in the game times is created from the effect scenario and the point grant scenario only for the game times for which the continuous effect final game times flag is ON. As for the effects to be executed in the game times in which the continuous effect final game times flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read out from an effect pattern table prepared in advance. The effect pattern table prepared for effects executed in game times in which the continuous effect final game times flag is not ON will be described later.

  Then, the point granting effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the processing target game times used as the continuous effect last game times is set to ON, the continuous effect last game times flag is set to ON, and the carry-over game times flag is set to OFF. The total granted points are set to NULL. The total awarded points are parameters used when determining the effects to be executed in the game times when the continuous effect final game times flag is not ON. In the continuous effect final game times, the effect scenarios and points for each point-giving effect Since the grant scenario is set, it is not necessary to set the total grant points. The production scenario No. sets the production scenario No corresponding to the production scenario determined in step S12005. The point grant scenario No. sets a point grant scenario No corresponding to the point grant scenario determined in step S12006.

  In the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing game round is “big jackpot” or “out of reach (reach occurrence)”, the continuous stage final game when the game round executes the series stage. If it is not set to the number of times, that is, even if the number of executed games Np = 1, it is considered that the continuous effect of the number of executed games Np = 1 is executed, and the game time is handled as the continuous effect final game number. In other words, when the result of the big win lottery of the processing game round is “big hit” or “out (reach occurrence)”, the continuous production final game round flag in the production information area corresponding to the game round is always set to ON. Is set. In this way, when a game round whose jackpot lottery result is “big jackpot” or “out of reach (reach occurrence)” determines the stage information of the game round to be executed after the game round, It avoids being reset as times. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the accumulation points in the game times in which the result of the big win lottery is “big hit” or “out (reach occurrence)” are not carried over to the game times to be executed later.

  In step S12009, after updating the effect information area of the game times setting information recording area, the effect information setting process ends.

  Next, the process group of step S12011 to step S12015 will be described. As described above, the processing group of Steps S12011 to S12015 is a case where the result of the big win lottery of the processing target game times is “out (no reach)”, and the processing target game times are determined to be a continuous production final game. It is a processing group for setting the production information of the processing target game times when set to times.

  As described above, in step S12010, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect final game number flag of the reserved game number (previous reserved game number) immediately before the processing target game number is ON. If it is determined in step S12010 that the continuous effect final game number flag of the preceding reserved game number one time before the processing target game number is not ON (S12010: NO), the process proceeds to step S12011. That is, it is determined that a continuous effect can be executed in which the reserved game time (preceding hold game time) immediately before the processing target game time is set as the carry-over game time and the processing target game time is set as the continuous effect final game time. If so, the process advances to step S12011.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of executing a continuous effect in which the game times whose jackpot lottery result is “out of reach (no reach)” set as the continuous effect final game times, The number of game times to be executed (execution game frequency Np) is set to 2. This is because when the result of the jackpot lottery is “disappearance (no reach)”, the player is not given unnecessary expectation by reducing the number of game times to execute the continuous performance. In addition, when the number of game times in which the continuous performance is executed becomes 3 or more, the player recognizes that the result of the big win lottery of the final game time of the continuous production is “big hit” or “out (reach occurrence)” It is possible to give the player the pleasure of counting the number of times that the continuous effect is executed, and to amplify the player's expectation as the number of times of executing the continuous effect is increased. Further, in the present embodiment, when executing a continuous performance in which the game times in which the jackpot lottery result is “out of reach (no reach)” is set as the continuous game final game times, Although the configuration in which the number of times (the number of executed games Np) is set to 2 is adopted, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which the number of executed games Np is set to 3 or 4 may be adopted.

  In step S12011, a continuous effect, ie, an execution game, in which the reserved game time (preceding hold game time) immediately before the process target game time is set as the carry-over game time and the process target game time is set as the continuous effect final game time. It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous production of the number Np = 2. In the present embodiment, it is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. In this embodiment, it sets so that the probability of becoming a lottery result of executing a continuous effect will be 20%. In other words, continuous performance (accumulation of accumulated points) is executed with a high probability when the jackpot lottery result is “big hit” or “missed (reach occurs)”, and the jackpot lottery result is “out (no reach)” In the case of ")", it is set to be executed with a low probability. By setting in this way, a strong sense of expectation can be given to a player who has recognized that accumulated points have been carried forward during the execution of game times. After executing step S12011, the process proceeds to step S12012.

  In step S12012, it is determined whether or not it is determined in step S12011 to execute a continuous effect (Np = 2).

  If it is determined in step S12011 that the continuous effect (Np = 2) is not to be executed (S12012: NO), the process proceeds to step S12016. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “out (reach non-occurrence)”, the point giving effect that does not have continuity with other game times is executed in the processing target game times. Since it is possible, the process by the process group of step S12016 to step S12018 is executed. Since the processing group in steps S12016 to S12018 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12011 that the continuous effect (Np = 2) is to be executed (S12012: YES), the process proceeds to step S12013.

  In step S12013, an effect scenario is determined based on the temporary variation time of the processing target game times. In the present embodiment, the production scenario is determined with reference to the production scenario table for non-reach stored in the sound side ROM 93.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-reach effect scenario table. As shown in the drawing, in the non-reach effect scenario table, two types of effect scenarios correspond to one variation time (temporary variation time) that can be set for the processing target game times.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an effect scenario corresponding to the temporary variation time T = t24 of the non-reach effect scenario table. As shown in the figure, each effect scenario has a variation time set corresponding to T = t24, and the type of effect to be executed, the timing at which the point giving effect is executed, and the like are different. Further, the button press effect is not set in the non-reach effect scenario. That is, it is set to the point grant scenario mentioned later so that 10 points or more awarded by the point grant effect may not be accumulated. In other words, the accumulation of 10 or more accumulation points is limited to the case where the result of the big win lottery is “big win” or “out (reach occurrence)”. By doing in this way, when the accumulation point is accumulated more than 10 points, a strong expectation can be given to the player.

  Similarly to the jackpot effect scenario and reach effect scenario described above, the variation time of the game time varies depending on the number of reserved game times when the game times corresponding to the effect scenario are executed. In this embodiment, the greater the number of reserved game times, the shorter the variation time of the game times. Therefore, in this embodiment, each production scenario is prepared for each number of reserved game times. After executing Step S12013, the process proceeds to Step S12014.

  In step S12014, a point grant scenario is determined based on the determined production scenario. In this process, a point grant scenario is determined based on the non-reach point grant scenario table stored in the sound side ROM 93.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the non-reach point assignment scenario table. As shown in the figure, one point grant scenario is set corresponding to each effect scenario. In practice, as shown in FIG. 49, in the non-reach point grant scenario table, one point grant scenario No. is set corresponding to each production scenario, and the point grant scenario of the point grant scenario to be executed The point grant scenario corresponding to No is read from the sound light side ROM 93.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each point grant scenario for non-reach. As shown in the figure, in each point grant scenario, the value of the grant point suitable for the effect scenario executed in the processing target game times is set in the order of execution of the point grant effect set in the effect scenario, and one point before The total number of points to be awarded in the preceding game round to be executed is set.

  After executing step S12014, the process proceeds to step S12015.

  In step S12015, the total awarded points of the preceding game times stored in the point award scenario set for the processing target game times are read. That is, the total awarded points in the point giving effect executed in the preceding game times are read. After executing Step S12015, the process proceeds to Step S12009.

  In step S12009, the effect information area of the game times setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the matters determined in steps S12011 to S12015 are recorded in the effect information area of the game times setting information recording area. In other words, since the preceding reserved game times before the processing target game times are used as carry-over game times and the continuous effects using the processing object game times as the continuous effect final game times are executed, the preceding games used as carry-over game times The point granting effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the times is set to ON, the continuous effect final game times flag is turned OFF, and the carry-over game times flag is reset to ON. As the total awarded points, the total awarded points in the preceding game times read in step S12015 are reset. The production scenario No and the point grant scenario No are reset as NULL. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the effect to be executed in the game times is created from the effect scenario and the point grant scenario only for the game times for which the continuous effect final game times flag is ON. As for the effects to be executed in the game times in which the continuous effect final game times flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read out from an effect pattern table prepared in advance.

  Then, the point granting effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the processing target game times used as the continuous effect last game times is set to ON, the continuous effect last game times flag is set to ON, and the carry-over game times flag is set to OFF. The total granted points are set to NULL. As described above, the total awarded points are parameters used when determining an effect to be executed in a game time when the continuous effect final game number flag is not ON. Since the production scenario and the point grant scenario are set, it is not necessary to set the total grant points. The production scenario No. sets the production scenario No. corresponding to the production scenario determined in step S12013. As the point grant scenario No, a point grant scenario No corresponding to the point grant scenario determined in step S12014 is set.

  In step S12009, after updating the effect information area of the game times setting information recording area, the effect information setting process ends.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 38: S11807) of the command response process.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. In step S12101, based on the game times setting information storage area (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the continuous effect final game times flag of the process target game times of this process is ON. If it is determined in step S12101 that the continuous effect final game times flag of the processing target game times is ON (S12101: YES), the process proceeds to step S12102.

  In step S12102, the effect scenario and point grant scenario set for the processing target game times are read based on the game times setting information storage area (FIG. 39). At this time, the effect scenario corresponding to the number of reserved game times at the time of this processing is read (see FIG. 44B). After executing Step S12102, the process proceeds to Step S12103.

  In step S12103, an effect pattern is generated based on the effect scenario set for the processing target game times and the point grant scenario.

  FIG. 52 is an image diagram of an effect pattern generated based on the effect scenario and the point grant scenario set for the processing target game times. In the effect scenario, the timing at which each point giving effect is executed and the timing at which the button press effect is executed are recorded. In the point grant scenario, the number of points given for each point grant effect set in the effect scenario is recorded. The sound light side MPU 92 generates an effect pattern by reading the effect scenario and the point grant scenario set for the processing target game times, and sets them as the effect patterns in the processing target game times. Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, only the game times for which the continuous effect final game times flag is ON, the effect effect pattern to be executed in the game times is generated from the effect scenario and the point grant scenario. As for the effects to be executed in the game times in which the continuous effect final game times flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read out from an effect pattern table prepared in advance. After executing Step S12103, the process proceeds to Step S12107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12101 that the continuous effect final game times flag of the processing target game times is not ON (S12101: NO), the process proceeds to step S12104.

  In step S12104, based on the game times setting information storage area (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the point grant effect flag of the processing target game times of this process is ON. If it is determined in step S12104 that the point-giving effect flag of the processing target game times is ON (S12104: YES), the process proceeds to step S12105. In other words, when the processing target game times are set to carry-over gaming times when continuous effects are executed, or when the point giving effects are set to be executed once in the processing target game times. Then, the process proceeds to step S12105.

  In step S12105, an effect pattern in the processing target game times is determined based on the variation time of the processing target game times and the total number of granted points. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time and the total number of points granted is specified from the effect pattern table for point giving effect stored in advance in the sound side ROM 93, and set to the effect pattern in the processing target game times. .

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect pattern table for point giving effects. As shown in the drawing, in the point giving effect effect pattern table, one effect pattern (point giving effect effect pattern) is stored corresponding to the variation time of the game times and the total given points.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the point giving effect effect pattern recorded in the point giving effect effect pattern table. As shown in the drawing, in the effect pattern recorded in the point giving effect effect pattern table, the number of points given in each point giving effect is set in addition to the timing at which the point giving effect is executed. In the present embodiment, in the game times in which the continuous effect final game times flag is ON, by generating the effect patterns of effects executed in the game times from the effect scenarios and the point giving scenarios, Although the number of points to be given is set, in the game times in which the continuous effect final game number flag is not ON, as shown in FIG. 54, the effect pattern in which the number of points given in each point giving effect is set in advance Is prepared.

  As described above, when the processing target game times are set to the carry-over game times when the continuous effects are executed, or the processing target game times are set to execute the point granting effects once. Since the same production pattern table can be used, the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, when it is set to carry-over game times in the case where a continuous effect is executed, the accumulated points are carried over to the next game time, and the point-giving effect is set to be executed once at the processing target game time. The accumulated points need to be reset at the end of the game round, but the display control when carrying over the accumulated points and the display control when not carrying over are performed by setting the carry-over game times flag in the point accumulation process described later. Since it is realized using, when it is set to carry forward game times in the case where the continuous effect is executed, and when it is set to execute the point giving effect in one of the processing game times, The same production pattern can be applied. After executing Step S12105 (FIG. 51), the process proceeds to Step S12107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12104 that the point giving effect flag of the processing target game times is not ON (S12104: NO), the process proceeds to step S12106. In other words, if the processing target game number is a game number in which the result of the jackpot lottery is “disappear (no reach)” and the point giving effect is not executed, the process proceeds to step S12106.

  In step S12106, an effect pattern is determined based on the variation time of the processing target game times. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time is specified from the effect pattern table for normal effect stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 93, and is set as the effect pattern in the processing target game times. In the effect pattern table for normal effects, one effect pattern is stored corresponding to each variation time of game times. After executing Step S12016, the process proceeds to Step S12107.

  In step S12107, the liquid crystal symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, the same symbol on the active line L is obtained when the result of the big win lottery of the current game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R regular jackpot. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as information on the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is 16R probability variation jackpot or 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same An even number of symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selection ratio is the same for the same odd symbol combination and the same even symbol combination, but instead the former is selected over the latter. A configuration with a higher rate may be used, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of “7” symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the big hit lottery for the current game round is a missed result, the presence or absence of reach is determined from the contents of the change command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L and corresponds to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the effective line L. Information is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established on the effective line L. Corresponding information is set as information on the current stop symbol. After executing Step S12107, the process proceeds to Step S12108.

  In step S12108, a variable display pattern setting process is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game time is identified from the contents of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information on the variation time and the information on the stop symbol identified in step S12107 above. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing Step S12108, the process proceeds to Step S12109.

  In step S12109, the effect pattern set in the processes of steps S12103, S12105, and S12106, the liquid crystal pattern to be stopped, and the variable display pattern are set in the effect command, and the process proceeds to step S12110.

  In step S12110, the set production command is transmitted to display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S12111.

  In step S12111, a hold information update process is performed. Specifically, the information of the total reserved number counter area is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing Step S12111, the process proceeds to Step S12112.

  In step S12112, an update process of the game times setting information storage area 94d (FIG. 39) is executed. When the game times to be processed are game times triggered by entering the first start port 33, the game time setting information (first determination) stored in the game time setting information storage area for the first start port Information and effect information) is shifted to the storage area of the next reserved game times as shown in FIG. When the game times to be processed are game times triggered by entering the second start port 34, the game time setting information stored in the second start port game time setting information storage area (first determination) Information and effect information) are shifted to the storage area of the adjacent reserved game times as shown in FIG. After executing step S12110, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Pointing effect execution processing>
Next, the point giving effect execution process will be described. As described above, the point giving effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point giving effect during the game times. The point giving effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interruption process (FIG. 37: S11703).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a point giving effect execution process. In step S12201, point accumulation processing is executed. The point accumulation process is a process for controlling the start of execution of the point giving effect and performing display control for displaying the points given in the point giving effect on the stage St as a pearl image indicating the accumulated points. is there. Details of the point accumulation processing will be described later. After executing Step S12201, the process proceeds to Step S12202.

  In step S12202, a point filling control process is executed. In the point filling control process, when 10 accumulation points are accumulated (filled), it is determined whether to execute the standby effect or the timer effect with the filling as an opportunity, It is the process which controls to perform an effect. Details of the point filling control process will be described later. After step S12202 is executed, step S12203 is executed.

  In step S12203, a button press effect process is executed. The button press effect process is a process for controlling execution of the button press effect. Details of the button pressing effect process will be described later. After executing Step S12203, the process proceeds to Step S12204.

  In step S12204, point reset processing is executed. The point reset process is a process for determining whether to reset or carry over the accumulation point when the game round ends, and to control the execution of the accumulation point reset. Details of the point reset processing will be described later. After executing Step S12204, the process proceeds to Step S12205.

  In step S12205, stage display control processing is executed. The stage display control process is a process for controlling the color of the stage St. Details of the stage display control process will be described later. After executing step S12205, the point giving effect execution process is terminated.

<Point accumulation processing>
Next, the point accumulation process will be described. The point accumulation process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 55: S12201).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing point accumulation processing. In step S12301, it is determined whether or not the point grant effect flag is ON. The point granting effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the execution of one point granting effect is started during the execution of the game, and turned off when the point granting effect ends. If it is determined in step S12301 that the point award effect flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the point award effect is not started (S12301: NO), the process proceeds to step S12302.

  In step S 12302, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the point giving effect based on the effect pattern set for the processing target game times. If it is determined in step S 12302 that it is the start timing of the point giving effect (S 12302: YES), the process proceeds to step S 12303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S 12302 that it is not the start timing of the point giving effect (S 12302: NO), this point accumulation process is terminated.

  In step S12303, the number of points to be given in the starting point giving effect is read from the effect pattern set in the processing target game times. After executing Step S12303, the process proceeds to Step S12304.

  In step S12304, a point giving effect moving image display start command corresponding to the number of points to be given is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point granting effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display a point giving effect effect moving image corresponding to the number of points to be given. After executing Step S12304, the process proceeds to Step S12305.

  In step S12305, audio output corresponding to the point-giving effect moving image corresponding to the number of points to be given is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point-giving effect moving image is started. . After executing Step S12305, the process proceeds to Step S12306.

In step S12306, the point giving effect execution flag is turned ON. After executing step S12306, the point accumulation processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12301 that the point award effect flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the point award effect is started (S12301: YES), the process proceeds to step S12307.

  In step S12307, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the point giving is completed in the started point giving effect. Specifically, in the point granting effect, after the pearl displaying the number of granted points is dropped by the turtle character (see FIG. 11), the timing when the pearl displaying the given number of points reaches the stage St. It is determined whether or not there is. In step S12307, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the point grant is completed in the started point grant effect (S12307: NO), this point accumulation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12307 that it is the timing when the point granting is completed in the started point granting effect (S12307: YES), the process proceeds to step S12308.

  In step S12308, the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is updated according to the number of granted points. The accumulation point counter Cpnt is a counter for counting the value of the accumulation point. In step S12308, when points are awarded in the point granting effect, a value corresponding to the number of points given is added to the accumulated point counter Cpnt. After executing Step S12308, the process proceeds to Step S12309.

  In step S12309, it is determined whether the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 10 or more. That is, it is determined whether or not points are given by the point giving effect and the accumulated points are 10 points or more. When it is determined in step S12309 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is not 10 points or more (S12309: NO), the process proceeds to step S12310.

  In step S12310, a point accumulation moving image display start command corresponding to the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The point accumulation moving image is a moving image that displays the number of pearl images corresponding to the accumulation points on the stage St. When the display side MPU 102 receives the point accumulated moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display an effect moving image for displaying the number of pearl images corresponding to the accumulated point counter Cpnt on the stage St. After executing Step S12310, the process proceeds to Step S12311.

  In step S12311, output of sound corresponding to the point accumulated moving image is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point accumulated moving image is started. After executing Step S12311, the process proceeds to Step S12312.

  In step S12312, the point grant effect execution flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the point accumulation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12309 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 10 points or more (S12309: YES), the process proceeds to step S12313.

  In step S12313, the value of the filled counter Cw is incremented by 1 (incremented). The filled counter Cw is a counter that is incremented by 1 every time 10 accumulation points are accumulated. After executing Step S12313, the process proceeds to Step S12314.

  In step S12314, 10 is subtracted from the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt. After executing Step S12314, the process proceeds to Step S12315.

  In step S12315, the unprocessed flag is turned ON. The unprocessed flag has not yet been determined whether to perform a stand-by effect or a timer effect on the accumulated points for 10 points when the accumulated points are accumulated for 10 points. It is a flag that is turned on when there is not, and turned off when the determination process is completed. Note that the determination process of whether to execute the standby effect or the timer effect for the accumulated points for 10 points is executed in a point filling control process described later. After executing Step S12315, the process proceeds to Step S12309 again.

  That is, the processing of step S12313 to step S12315 is repeated until the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt becomes less than 10. Then, the value of the filled counter Cw increases by the number of times step S12313 to step S12315 are executed. That is, when the accumulation points for 10 points are regarded as one accumulation point group, the number of accumulation point groups included in the accumulation points after the points are given by the point granting effect is counted, and the accumulation point group Is added as the filled counter Cw (S12313), and the accumulation point corresponding to the number of accumulation points added to the filled counter Cw is subtracted from the accumulation point counter Cpnt (S12314).

  Then, after executing the processing of step S12313 to step S12315, the process again proceeds to step S12309, and when it is determined that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is not 10 points or more (S12309: NO), the process proceeds to step S12310. Since the processing after step S12310 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing during point filling>
Next, the point filling control process will be described. The point filling control process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 55: S12202).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the control process at the time of point filling. In step S12401, it is determined whether the unprocessed flag is ON. As described above, the unprocessed flag is used to determine whether to perform a stand-by effect or a timer effect when the accumulated points are accumulated for 10 points. This flag is turned on when the processing has not yet been performed, and turned off when the determination processing is completed.

  If it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is ON (S12401: YES), the process proceeds to step S12404. The processing from step S12404 to step S12411 is a process for determining whether to execute the standby effect or the timer effect for the accumulation points for 10 points, and to control the execution of any effect. is there. Therefore, when it is determined that the unprocessed flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that 10 points have been accumulated, accumulation of 10 points is performed by executing the processing of steps S12404 to S12411. It is determined whether a stand-by effect is executed for the point or a timer effect is executed, and the execution of any effect is controlled.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S12401: NO), the process proceeds to step S12402.

  In step S12402, it is determined whether a variation command / type command has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new game round. If it is determined in step S12402 that a variation command / type command has been received, that is, if it is determined that it is time to start a new game (S12402: YES), the flow proceeds to step S12403.

  In step S12403, it is determined whether or not the filled counter Cw = 0. If it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S12403: NO), the process proceeds to step S12404. That is, if one or more accumulation point groups corresponding to the accumulation points for the 10 points described above exist, the process proceeds to step S12404.

  Here, when it is determined in step S12402 that the variation command / type command has been received (S12402: YES), and in step S12403, it is determined that the filled counter Cw = 0 is not satisfied (S12403: NO). The reason for proceeding to step S12404 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing either the standby effect or the timer effect is the timing at which a new game is started in addition to the timing at which 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated. When the game time in which the effect during standby is executed is finished and the next new game time is started and the new game time is the continuous game final game time, Instead, a timer effect is executed. Referring to FIG. 15, the stand-by effect that has been executed in the game time U2 that is the carry-over game time is switched to the timer effect 1 at the timing when the game time U3 that is the last continuous effect game time is started.

  Accordingly, even if it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S12401: NO), it is determined that it is the timing at which a new game round is started by executing step S12402 (S12402: If it is determined that there is one or more accumulation point groups (accumulation points for 10 points) by executing step S12403 (S12403: NO), the process proceeds to step S12404, and steps S12404 to S12411 are performed. By executing this process, it is necessary to determine whether to execute the standby effect or the timer effect for the accumulation points for 10 points. Therefore, when it is determined in step S12402 that the variation command / type command has been received (S12402: YES), and in step S12403, it is determined that the filled counter Cw = 0 is not satisfied (S12403: NO). The process proceeds to step S12404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12402 that a variation command / type command has not been received (S12402: NO), and if it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw = 0 (S12403: YES). ), This point filling control process is terminated.

  In step S12404, it is determined whether or not the carryover game times flag of the processing game times is ON. If it is determined in step S12404 that the carry-over gaming times flag of the processing game times is ON (S12404: YES), the process proceeds to step S12405.

  In step S12405, a standby effect moving image display start command corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the standby effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the standby effect moving image corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw. For example, in the case of the filled counter Cw = 1, one image (see FIG. 17) indicating the standby effect is displayed. In the case of the filled counter Cw = 2, two images indicating the standby effect are displayed. After executing Step S12405, the process proceeds to Step S12406.

  In step S12406, output of sound corresponding to the standby effect moving image is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the standby effect moving image is started. After executing Step S12406, the process proceeds to Step S12411.

  In step S12411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the control process at the time of filling the point is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12404 that the carry-over gaming times flag of the processing target gaming times is not ON (S12404: NO), the process proceeds to step S12407.

  In step S12407, the time until the button effect is executed is acquired based on the effect pattern of the processing target game times. For example, when one button press effect is executed in the processing target game time, a time until the button press effect is executed is acquired, and two button press effects are executed in the process target game time. The time until the two button press effects are executed is acquired. After executing Step S12407, the process proceeds to Step S12408.

  In step S12408, a timer effect moving image display start command corresponding to the remaining time until each button press effect is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the timer effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a timer effect moving image corresponding to the remaining time until each button press effect. For example, when one button press effect is executed in the processing target game times, a timer effect moving image is displayed in which the time until the button press effect is executed is counted down. In the case of executing the button press effect twice in the processing target game time, the timer effect moving image displayed by counting down the time until the first button press effect is executed is displayed and the second button is displayed. A timer effect moving image is displayed in which the time until the press effect is executed is counted down (see FIG. 19A). After executing Step S12408, the process proceeds to Step S12409.

  In step S12409, output of sound corresponding to each timer effect moving image is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the timer effect moving image is started. After executing Step S12409, the process proceeds to Step S12410.

  In step S12410, the value of the filled counter Cw is reset to zero. After executing Step S12410, the process proceeds to Step S12411.

  As described above, in step S12411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the control process at the time of filling the point is ended.

<Button press effect processing>
Next, the button press effect process will be described. The button pressing effect process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 55: S12203).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the button press effect process. In step S12501, it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the button press effect based on the effect pattern set for the processing target game times. If it is determined in step S12501 that the timing for starting the button press effect is reached (S12501: YES), the process proceeds to step S12502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12501 that the timing for starting the button press effect is not reached (S12501: NO), the button press effect process is terminated.

  In step S 12502, a button press effect moving image display start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the button pressing effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the button pressing effect moving image (see FIG. 14B) on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S12502, the process proceeds to step S12503.

  In step S12503, output of sound corresponding to the button pressing effect moving image is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the button pressing effect moving image is started. After executing step S12503, the button press effect process is terminated.

<Point reset processing>
Next, the point reset process will be described. The point reset process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 55: S12204).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing point reset processing. In step S12601, it is determined based on the effect pattern set for the processing target game times whether or not it is the timing of the end of the game times. If it is determined in step S12601 that it is the timing of the end of the game (S12601: YES), the process proceeds to step S12602.

  In step S12602, it is determined whether or not the carry-over gaming times flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12602 that the carry-over gaming times flag is not ON (S12602: NO), the process proceeds to step S12603.

  In step S12603, the accumulation point counter Cpnt is reset (Cpnt ← 0). That is, game times other than the carry-over game times that are carried over to the accumulation point do not carry over the accumulation points, and therefore the accumulation point counter Cpnt corresponding to the accumulation point in the game time is set to 0 at the end of the game time. After executing step S12603, the point reset process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12601 that it is not the timing of game end (S12601: NO), and when it is determined in step S12602 that the carryover game times flag is ON (S12602: YES), the accumulation point counter This point reset process is terminated without resetting Cpnt.

<Stage display control processing>
Next, the stage display control process will be described. The stage display control process is a process for controlling the color of the stage St. The stage display control process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 55: S12205).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the stage display control process. In step S12701, it is determined whether the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is zero. If it is determined in step S12701 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 0 (S12701: YES), the process proceeds to step S12702.

  In step S12702, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to white is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to white. In the present embodiment, when the points are not accumulated, the stage St is set to white even if the processing game time is a carry-over game time or a continuous effect final game time. After executing step S12702, the stage display control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12701 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is not 0 (S12701: NO), the process proceeds to step S12703.

  In step S12703, it is determined whether or not the carryover game times flag of the processing game times is ON. If it is determined in step S12703 that the carry-over game times flag of the processing game times is ON (S12703: YES), the process proceeds to step S12704.

  In step S12704, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to yellow is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to yellow. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the points are accumulated in the carry-over game times, the color of the stage St is set to yellow. After executing step S12704, the stage display control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S12703 that the carry-over gaming times flag of the processing game times is not ON (S12703: NO), the process proceeds to step S12705.

  In step S12705, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to orange is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display a stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to orange. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the points are accumulated in the last stage of the continuous effect, the color of the stage St is set to orange. After executing step S12705, the stage display control process is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the V interrupt process by quickly reflecting the contents of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S12801, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the process of clearing the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. The compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S12802.

  In step S12802, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process thereafter executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. In step S12901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instruction.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction for the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the image is stored. Hereinafter, details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S13001, command response processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 62) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the presentation operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24. If it is determined that it is the reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24, the presentation operation is performed. Image rendering and display control are started so that an effect mode corresponding to pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period for accepting the pressing of the presentation operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S13001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect of the effect such as the notice effect or the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90, and the effect image corresponding to the aspect is displayed. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41.

  In step S13002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command handling process (S13001) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S13003.

  In step S13003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S13002), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. In addition to specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S13004.

  In step S13004, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S13003) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S13005, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” or “disappearance (reach occurrence)”, the button pressing effect is set according to the rendering scenario. ing. Therefore, by executing the button press effect, when the button press effect is executed, the player who has recognized that there is a high probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a “hit” or “out (reach occurrence)” On the other hand, expectation can be given.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the execution of the button press effect is set in the effect scenario, the accumulated point is 10 points by executing the point giving effect until the button press effect is executed. Points are awarded so that the above is achieved. Therefore, by executing the point giving effect, the player who recognizes that the button pressing effect is executed when the accumulated points become 10 points or more is expected every time the point giving effect is executed. Can be granted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are a case where the accumulated points accumulated in the game times are reset upon the end of the game times, and a case where the accumulated points are carried over to the next game times without being reset. Since the accumulated points may be reset at the end of the game round, the player is requested to accumulate 10 points or more by the end of the game round, and the player's expectation for the point giving effect The feeling can be further increased. Furthermore, the player who recognizes that the game times are started and the points are accumulated by the execution of the point giving effect is conscious of the time when the game times that the accumulated points may be reset, It is possible to focus on the manner in which the accumulated points are accumulated, that is, the manner in which the point giving effect is executed.

  In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game time, even if the accumulated game points are not accumulated more than 10 points in the game time being executed, if the game point is carried over to the next game time, Since the points accumulated in are effective, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation that the accumulated points do not accumulate 10 points or more.

  In the present embodiment, the color of the stage St suggests to the player whether or not the accumulation points will be carried forward. Therefore, even in game times where the accumulation points do not accumulate more than 10 points, the accumulation points will be 10 in the next game times. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of accumulating more than points, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation in game times where the accumulated points are not accumulated more than 10 points.

  In the present embodiment, a button press effect is adopted as a process executed when 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated. At the timing when the accumulated points are accumulated 10 points or more and a sense of achievement is given to the player, the player is actively involved in the game by executing the button press effect, and the player's expectation is further increased. Can be further enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the accumulation point is suggested to the player as a pearl image on the stage St, so that the player can always be aware of the accumulation point.

  In this embodiment, since the timer effect is executed, the button that is continuously executed after the time suggested by the timer effect is elapsed during the period from when the timer effect is executed until the button press effect is executed. An expectation can be given about the pressing effect. Also, since the remaining time until the button press effect is counted down by the timer effect, the suggested remaining time is reduced, and the player's expectation can be increased as the timing at which the button press effect is executed approaches. it can.

  Further, even if 10 accumulation points are accumulated, the standby effect is started, and the timer effect may not be executed immediately after accumulating 10 points. Therefore, the timer effect is performed immediately after accumulating 10 points. By recognizing whether or not to execute, it is possible to give the player a pleasure of guessing the timing at which the button pressing effect is executed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the timer effect is executed in the game times in which the button press effect is executed, when the timer effect is executed in the game times, the player can pay attention to the game times, and the expectation A feeling can be imparted.

  In the present embodiment, when 10 accumulation points are accumulated, and when the timer effect is executed in the subsequent game times, the standby effect is executed prior to the execution of the timer effect. Therefore, even in a period that occurs from the time when 10 accumulation points are accumulated until the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is made aware that the timer effect is executed in the subsequent game times by the execution of the standby effect. The player's expectation for the can be maintained.

  In this embodiment, whether or not the point giving effect is performed in a predetermined game time, the number of points given in the point giving effect, whether or not the accumulated point is carried over, whether or not the waiting effect is executed, whether or not the timer effect is executed, Each game content, such as in which game times a button press effect is executed, is determined based on special information of game times executed after the game times (hereinafter also referred to as subsequent game times). . More specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the subsequent game round is “big hit” or “out of reach (reach occurrence)”, a continuous performance in which the subsequent game round is set as the continuous game final game round is executed. In some cases, the game times are set to carry-over game times. That is, the processing contents of the game times are determined based on the special information of the later game times. By doing in this way, whether or not the point giving effect is executed, the number of points given in the point giving effect, whether or not the accumulated points are carried forward, whether or not the waiting effect is executed, whether or not the timer effect is executed, the button press effect, etc. With respect to each process, it is possible to have relevance over a plurality of game times. By providing a relationship between the processing contents of each game time and the processing contents of other game times, for example, when a predetermined process is executed in the game time being executed, the predetermined process and the game time Not only does the player make a guess about the relationship with the progress, but the player also makes a guess about the relationship between the predetermined processing and the progress of the subsequent game round. In other words, no matter how the game progresses during the game round that is being executed, various possibilities remain in the progress of the subsequent game round and the player's expectation can be maintained.

  Also, in this embodiment, the more the number of times the button press effect is executed in the continuous effect, the more the effect executed after each button press effect is developed (the degree of expectation that the jackpot lottery suggested by the effect is won) By preparing an effect scenario set so as to increase), each time the player presses the effect operation button 24 in the button press effect, the player's sense of expectation for the game can be increased. Therefore, even when the execution period of the continuous production is long, the decrease in the concentration of the player is suppressed by increasing the number of button press effects according to the length of the execution period of the continuous production, and the expectation is further increased. Can be increased.

A7. Modification of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are possible. In the modification described below, the description of the same configuration and processing as those in the above embodiment is omitted.

A7-1. Modification 1:
In 1st Embodiment, when performing a specific production, you may employ | adopt the structure which always gives a point. As an example of realizing the configuration, it can be realized by setting in advance in a production scenario and a point grant scenario.

  Specifically, after a predetermined effect (for example, a normal reach effect), a scenario in which a point award effect where the granted point is not 0 is executed and a case where a point award effect where the granted point is 0 are executed And point grant scenario. In this case, the case of executing a point granting effect where the grant point is not 0 and the case of executing the point granting effect where the grant point is 0 may be set as one effect scenario and a point granting scenario, You may set to another production | presentation scenario and a point provision scenario. In addition, instead of the configuration of executing the point granting effect with the granted point being 0 after the predetermined effect, a configuration in which the point giving effect is not executed after the predetermined effect may be adopted, or both of them may be adopted. Also good.

  On the other hand, after a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect), the effect scenario and the point award scenario are set so that a point award effect where the granted points are not always 0 is executed. As a specific effect, a specific reach effect or a specific cut-in effect may be adopted, or a dedicated effect for suggesting that a point giving effect where the granted points are not 0 may be adopted. Good.

  In this way, when a specific effect is executed in a game time, points are always given in the game time, so that a specific effect is executed for a player who wants to give points. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game and to pay attention to the game. In addition, when a specific performance is executed, it is possible to give an uplifting feeling to the player who wanted to give points, and to improve the interest of the game.

  For example, when the accumulation point is 9 points, and the point is given once more, if the accumulation point becomes 10 points or more and the button pressing effect is executed, the player is executed against the specific effect being executed. Can give a strong sense of expectation. In such a situation, when a specific performance is executed and points are given, a strong sense of achievement can be given to the player.

A7-2. Modification 2:
In 1st Embodiment, when the accumulation | storage point in the game time in execution is carried over to the next game time, you may employ | adopt the structure by which a point is always provided by the game time after the said game time. As an example of realizing the configuration, it can be realized by setting in advance in a production scenario and a point grant scenario.

  Specifically, a point giving effect in which the granted points are not always 0 is set in the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set in the last stage of the continuous effect. Further, in the point grant scenario, the number of points that the total awarded points are not always 0 is set for the carry-over game times after the first carry-over game time among the carry-over game times in the continuous performance.

  By doing in this way, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player who wants to give points that the accumulated points are carried over when the game round ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even at the end of the game round. In addition, when accumulated points are carried over at the end of a game round, it is expected that a player who wanted to give points will be awarded points at a game round executed after the game round. In addition to being able to impart a feeling, it is possible to impart an exhilarating feeling and to improve the interest of the game.

  For example, if the player recognizes that if the accumulated points are carried forward, points will be awarded in the next and subsequent game rounds, and the game round is likely to end while the accumulated points are 9 points. In some cases, if accumulated points are carried forward, points will always be given in subsequent game rounds and button press effects will be executed, giving players a strong expectation that accumulated points will be carried forward It is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation that the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in the game times being executed. In addition, when the accumulated points are carried over in such a situation, it is possible to give a strong sense of achievement to the player.

  In addition, when the accumulated points in the game times being executed are carried over to the next game times, the points are not necessarily given in the game times after the game times being executed, but in the game times being executed When a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a blue crayfish character appears) is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which points are always given at a game time after the game time. By doing in this way, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to a later game time to a player who has executed a predetermined effect during the game time being executed.

A7-3. Modification 3:
In 1st Embodiment, you may employ | adopt the structure which provides a restriction | limiting in the frequency | count which performs the point provision effect in which the point provided is 0 in the point provision effect performed in the series of game times in which a continuous effect is performed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a limit is imposed on the number of times that a point granting effect with zero grant points is executed in a point granting effect that is executed only once in a game. As an example of realizing the configuration, it can be realized by setting in advance in a production scenario and a point grant scenario.

  This will be specifically described. As described above, in the point grant scenario, the number of points awarded is set for each point grant effect executed in the continuous effect last game round. Therefore, there is a limit on the number of “0” that is set as the value of the number of granted points set for each point giving effect. For example, the value “0” is limited to be set three times or less as the number of granted points.

  In addition, in the effect pattern used for the game times in which the point giving effect is executed only once in the carry-over game time and the game time, the number of points set to “0” as the value of the number of granted points set for each point giving effect. Set restrictions.

  By doing in this way, giving a strong expectation that the point giving effect will be executed to the player who has recognized that the number of times the point giving effect has been given has reached the upper limit. Can do. This is because if the number of executions of the point granting effect with the granted point of 0 reaches the upper limit, points are always given when the point granting effect is subsequently executed. Therefore, even when the point granting effect with the granted point of 0 is executed, the player is given a sense of expectation that the number of executions of the point granting effect with the granted point of 0 will reach the upper limit. be able to.

  That is, in the case where the point giving effect is executed, if the given point is not 0, the point is given, so that the player can be given a sense of uplifting, and the given point is 0. Even so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation (a sense of expectation that the number of executions of the point grant effect with zero grant points will reach the upper limit). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation in both cases of executing a point granting effect in which the granted point is not 0 and a point granting effect in which the granted point is 0. Can do.

A7-4. Modification 4:
An effect (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled effect) that is executed when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in a predetermined game time may be configured to be executable in the game time. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs an unfilling effect in a predetermined | prescribed ratio, when an accumulation point does not reach 10 points.

  Furthermore, when an unfilled effect is executed, the more accumulated points immediately before the unfilled effect is executed, the higher the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game times is “hit” It is good also as a structure which becomes high.

  Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “hit” in the game time, the effect scenario in which the unfilled effect is executed is set to be easily selected. For example, when the production scenario is selected by lottery using lottery random numbers and lottery table data, the lottery table is executed so that the unfilled production is executed when the result of the big hit lottery is “big hit”. Set the data. Then, the lottery table data is set so that the probability that the effect scenario is selected is low (for example, less than 30%) except when the result of the jackpot lottery is “hit”. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “hit”, the point grant scenario applied to the effect scenario has a relatively large number of accumulated points immediately before the unfilled effect is executed (for example, 8 points or 9 points). ) Apply the point grant scenario set to On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery is “out (reach occurrence)”, the point granting scenario applied to the production scenario has relatively few accumulated points immediately before the unfilled production is executed (for example, A point grant scenario set to 4 points or 5 points) is applied.

  By doing in this way, even if the accumulation point does not reach 10 points or more in the predetermined game times and the button press effect is not executed, when the unfilled effect is executed, the more accumulation points, In the predetermined game times, the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery is “jacket” is high, and a sense of expectation can be given to the player. That is, in a case where the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in a predetermined game time and the button pressing effect is not executed, and the accumulated points are relatively large, the player is expected to execute the unfilled effect. A feeling can be imparted.

  In addition, the unfilled effect may adopt a configuration in which the contents of the effect differ depending on the amount of accumulation points before the unfilled effect is executed.

  In this way, regardless of the amount of accumulated points, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the unfilled effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, an effect that is executed after the unfilled effect is executed (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled development effect) may be configured to be executable in the game time. Also, the case where the accumulation point is less than 10 points and the unfilled development effect is executed after the unfilled effect is executed than when the accumulation point is 10 points or more and the button press effect is executed, You may employ | adopt the structure which the expectation degree (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the said game time is a "jackpot" becomes high. For example, when selecting an effect scenario by a lottery using random numbers and table data for lottery, an unfilled effect and an unfilled development effect are executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is “hit” Set lottery table data. Then, when the result of the big win lottery is other than “big win”, the lottery table data is set so that the probability that the production scenario is selected is low (for example, less than 5%). Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is other than “hit”, the lottery table data is set so that the probability that the effect scenario is selected is lower than the probability that the effect scenario including the button press effect is selected. Thus, the configuration can be realized.

  By doing in this way, the expectation degree (probability) that the result of the big win lottery of the game times is “big hit” in the case where the unfilled development effect is executed rather than the case where the button press effect is executed Is a high configuration. Therefore, even if the accumulation point does not reach 10 points in the game times and the button press effect is not executed, if an unfilled effect is executed, an unfilled development effect is subsequently executed for the player. Can give a strong sense of expectation. Furthermore, when the unfilled development effect is executed, the expectation (probability) that the result of the big hit lottery of the game times is “big hit” is higher than when the button press effect is executed. It is possible to give a stronger sense of expectation to the player who has recognized that the above has been executed. In summary, when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more, a button press effect is executed, so that a player can be given an expectation, and even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points. , Giving the player a sense of expectation that the unfilled effect will be executed, and if the unfilled effect is executed, giving the player a strong expectation that the unfilled development effect will be executed can do. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regardless of the situation of the game.

A7-5. Modification 5:
In the first embodiment, the first execution game number display shown in the first execution game number display area J1, the first hold game number display shown in the first hold display area Ds1, and the second execution game number display area J2 are shown. The display mode of each display (hereinafter also collectively referred to as game number display) of the second execution game number display and the second hold game number display shown in the second hold display area Ds2 is adopted. May be. Furthermore, you may employ | adopt the structure which has a temporal correlation with the timing which assign | provides a point (namely, timing which performs a point provision effect), and the timing which changes the display mode of a game time display.

  In this case, the display mode of the game times display may indicate the possibility (expected degree) of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery related to the game times corresponding to each game time display.

  Thus, by performing the change of the display mode of the game times display and the giving of the points with the correlation in timing, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation.

  For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the point giving effect is executed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second) after changing the display mode of the game times display during the execution of the game times. In this case, the player who has recognized that the display mode of the game times display has changed and has increased expectation further recognizes that the point giving effect has been executed within a predetermined time, thereby further strengthening the game. Expectation and uplifting feeling can be imparted. In addition, if the game times to be changed in the display mode of the game times display are game times being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation and a sense of excitement.

  Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which performs simultaneously the timing which changes the display mode of a game times display, and the timing which performs a point provision effect during execution of game times. In this case, the player's sense of expectation can be increased synergistically by causing the player to recognize the change in the display mode of the game times display and the execution of the point giving effect at the same time. In addition, if the game times to be changed in the display mode of the game times display are game times being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation and a sense of excitement.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the game times display is changed within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the point giving effect is executed during the game times. In this case, the player who has recognized that the point giving effect has been executed and has increased expectation will further recognize that the display mode of the game times display has changed within a predetermined time, thereby further strengthening the game. Expectation and uplifting feeling can be imparted. In addition, if the game times to be changed in the display mode of the game times display are game times being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation and a sense of excitement.

  Furthermore, you may employ | adopt the structure which has a correlation with the display mode after the change of game time display, and the number of points provided by point provision production. By doing in this way, when the display mode after the change of the game times display is a mode in line with the player's expectation, that is, the display suggesting that the display mode after the change of the game times display has a high expectation When it is a mode and when the number of points given by the point granting effect is relatively large, it is possible to give a stronger sense of expectation and superiority to the player.

  Furthermore, the higher the degree of expectation suggested by the display mode after the change of the game times display is, the more points are given by the point giving effect executed with a temporal correlation with the change of the display mode of the game times display. A configuration may be adopted. That is, when the display mode after the change of the game times display is the first display mode, the number of points given by the point granting effect executed with a temporal correlation with the change of the display mode is set to the first display mode. When the display mode after the change of the game times display is a second display mode that suggests a higher degree of expectation than the expectation level indicated by the first display mode, the change in the display mode and the time Adopting a configuration in which the average value of the second number of points is larger than the average value of the first number of points when the number of points given by the point granting effect executed with correlation is the second number of points. May be.

  By doing in this way, when the expectation (probability) that the result of the game win jackpot lottery is “big win” is high, there is a high probability of changing the display mode of the game times display to the second display mode, When the game times display is changed to the second display mode, the points are executed with a temporal correlation with the change of the display mode of the game times display than when the game times display is changed to the first display mode. Since there are many cases where the number of points given by the production is large, the change in the display mode of the game times display and the execution of the point granting production are executed with a correlation to the timing, so that the result of the jackpot lottery A player's expectation can be increased synergistically.

  In addition, all the said structures are realizable by setting the display mode of game times display to an effect scenario. For example, by using an effect scenario that is set so that the display mode of the game times display changes from white to red simultaneously with the execution of the point giving effect, during the execution of the game times, which is one of the above-described configurations, It is possible to realize a configuration in which the timing for changing the display mode of the game times display and the timing for executing the point giving effect are simultaneously performed.

  In addition, a point that is executed with a temporal correlation with the change of the display mode of the game times display for the effect scenario set to change the game times display to a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is high By applying a point grant scenario in which the value of the number of points given by the grant effect is set to a large value, the expectation degree suggested by the display mode after the change of the game times display, which is one of the configurations described above, is It is possible to realize a configuration in which the higher the number is, the greater the number of points given by the point granting effect executed with a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game times display. In addition, a shape, a pattern, a color, a character, etc. can be employ | adopted as a display mode of game times display.

  In addition, the effect that has a temporal correlation with the timing of changing the display mode of the game times display is not limited to the configuration that is the point giving effect, and is executed at the timing of changing the display mode of the game times display and the game times. A configuration may be employed in which a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) is performed and has a temporal correlation. Even in this case, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation for the result of the big hit lottery.

A7-6. Modification 6:
In the first embodiment, in the point award scenario (see FIG. 46), the number of points awarded is set in advance for each point award effect executed in the continuous effect final game times. You may employ | adopt the structure which sets the number of points provided in each point provision production in real time during execution. For example, in the point grant scenario, the total number of points given in the continuous production final game round and the number of points given in the continuous production final game round are set as information. It is good also as a structure which performs the lottery based on the said information after the start of times, and determines the number of points provided in each point provision effect. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to guess the pattern to which the points are given, and the player can be focused on the game.

A7-7. Modification 7:
In 1st Embodiment, it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation which reduces an accumulation point. In this way, it is possible to give an inflection to the player's sense of expectation for the game. Further, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the button press effect is executed when the point is increased and reaches 10 points. However, a predetermined number of points are accumulated from the start of the game round, and the points are A configuration may be adopted in which an effect to be subtracted is executed and a button press effect is executed when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number of points or less. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which 10 points are accumulated at the start of game times, the points are reduced as needed by the effect in which the points are subtracted, and the button press effect is executed when the point reaches 0 points.

A7-8. Modification 8:
In the said embodiment, although the structure which was previously set to the production | presentation scenario was employ | adopted as the timing which performs a point provision production, not only such a structure but another structure may be employ | adopted. This will be described in detail below.

  In the first embodiment, when setting the effect of the continuous effect final game times, the configuration using the effect scenario in which the timing for executing the point giving effect is set in advance is adopted. A configuration is employed that uses an effect scenario in which one or more timings at which the point granting effect can be executed, that is, the timings for performing the point granting effect (hereinafter also referred to as candidate timings) are set. Further, in the first embodiment, when setting the effect of the game times for executing the point giving effect using only one game time, and when setting the effect of the carry-over game times, the point giving effect In the present modification, as in the case of setting the production of the last game times of the continuous production, the configuration using the production pattern in which the number of points to be given in each point giving production is set in advance is adopted. A configuration using a production scenario in which one or more candidate timings are set is employed.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect scenario and the point grant scenario of the continuous effect final game times in Modification 8. FIG. 64 shows, as an example, an effect scenario and a point grant scenario for a carry-over game time and a continuous effect last game time related to a continuous effect in which the number of executed games (Np) = 2. Also in this modified example, similar to the first embodiment, the effect scenario of the continuous effect final game times is set based on the temporary variation time of the game times set as the continuous effect final game times. As described above, in the effect scenario in this modification, the timing for executing the button pressing effect is set, but the timing for executing the point giving effect is not set, and the timing for executing the point giving effect is set. Multiple candidate timings are set. In the effect scenario of FIG. 64, candidate timings are indicated by dashed arrows. The sound light side MPU 92, based on a point grant scenario to be described later, one or more timings (hereinafter, referred to as “the point grant effect”) when actually executing the game times from among a plurality of candidate timings set in the effect scenario. (Also called execution timing).

  In the first embodiment, as shown in the jackpot / reach point grant scenario table of FIG. 45, two point grants are made for each number of executed games (Np) for the point grant scenario corresponding to each production scenario. A scenario is set, and after determining the number of executions of continuous production, one of the two point granting scenarios set corresponding to the number of executions is determined by lottery. On the other hand, in this modification, one point grant scenario is set for each number of executed games (Np) with respect to the point grant scenario corresponding to each effect scenario. FIG. 64 shows a point grant scenario in which the number of consecutively executed execution games is two (that is, the number of execution games Np = 2). As shown in the figure, in the point granting scenario in the present modification, the total number of points to be given for each period until each button pressing effect set in the effect scenario (hereinafter, (Also referred to as total period grant points) is set, and for the carry-over gaming times, the value of the total giving points, which is the total number of points to be awarded in the gaming times, is set as in the above embodiment.

  The sound side MPU 92, for the continuous production final game times, the point granting execution timing based on the total period grant points and a plurality of candidate timings up to each button pressing effect period set in the production scenario, The number of points to be given in each point giving effect is determined. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 64, 13 points are set as the point grant scenario as a total period grant point from the start of the continuous effect final game round to the button press effect 1 (Bt1 in the figure), and candidates are included within the period. There are 10 timings set in the production scenario. Thus, for example, one or a plurality of execution timings are determined from the ten candidate timings, then the number of points to be given in the point granting effect executed at each determined execution timing is decided, and finally each point grant to be executed A configuration is adopted in which the number of points given in the production is determined by lottery using random numbers.

  In addition, the execution timing of each point giving effect and the number of points given in each point giving effect can be determined by various methods. For example, an arbitrary value with an upper limit of 13 points, which is the total period grant points for the period from the start of the continuous presentation last game round to the button press presentation stage 1, is determined by lottery, and the determined value is used as the first point grant stage. The number of points given in Next, an arbitrary value up to a value obtained by subtracting the number of points granted in the first point granting effect from 13 points of the total period granting points is determined by lottery, and the determined value is determined as the second point granting effect. Determine the number of points to be given by. In this way, the number of points to be awarded in the point granting effect is determined in order by lottery, and the determined number of points is subtracted from 13 points of the total period grant points, and finally the remaining number of points is 0. It draws until it becomes. Since the number of candidate timings from the start of the last stage of the continuous production to the button press production 1 is ten, if the remaining grant points are not zero at the end of the ninth lottery, The number of points awarded in the tenth point giving effect is automatically determined as the number of remaining points. In this way, after determining the number of executions of point granting effects and the number of points to be given in each point granting effect, the number of execution timings corresponding to the number of executions of point granting effects is selected from the candidate timings of the effect scenario. Determined by.

  As in this modification, by determining the timing for executing the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect by lottery, the execution timing and giving of the point giving effect even in the same effect scenario Since the number of points to be played is not patterned, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored and to make various assumptions, and to give a sense of expectation. For this reason, in this modification, only one point grant scenario is set for each number of executed games (Np) for the point grant scenario corresponding to each effect scenario. That is, in the present modification, with respect to the point grant scenario corresponding to each production scenario, even if only one point grant scenario is set for each number of executed games (Np), a plurality of point grant patterns are set. It is possible.

  In the above description, the method for determining the timing for executing the point giving effect in the last stage of the continuous effect and the number of points given in each point giving effect has been described. It can also be adopted in times. In the first embodiment, when the point granting effect is executed in the carry-over game times and when the point giving effect is executed in one game time, the execution timing of the point giving effect is set in advance in the effect pattern. However, as in the present modification, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, first, an effect scenario is determined based on the variation time of the carry-over gaming times. As shown in FIG. 64, a plurality of candidate timings are set in the effect scenario prepared for the carry-over game times, as in the effect scenario in the above-mentioned continuous effect final game times. Then, based on the candidate timing set in the game play effect pattern and the total awarded points set in the game play, the point giving effect is executed by lottery as in the case of the continuous play final game turn described above. And the number of points to be given in each point giving effect. In the first embodiment described above, an execution pattern in which the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are set in advance is used, but the timing for executing the point giving effect as in this modification example. And by determining the number of points to be given in each point giving effect by lottery, a plurality of candidates can be obtained as in the case of the continuous effect final game times of this modification without using the effect pattern as in the first embodiment. An effect scenario in which timing is set can be used. By doing in this way, even if it is an effect scenario in which the same effect is executed, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points given are not patterned, so that the player is prevented from being bored and the game It is possible for a person to make various assumptions and to give a sense of expectation.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, the effect pattern of a carry-over game time respond | corresponds to the total grant point set to the point grant scenario determined based on the continuous effect last game time, and the fluctuation time in a carry-over game time. The effect pattern was determined with reference to the point grant effect pattern table. On the other hand, in this modification, regardless of the total awarded points, the effect pattern is determined based on the variation time in the carry-over game times, and based on the candidate timing set for the determined effect pattern and the total granted points. Thus, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are determined. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a point granting effect pattern table corresponding to the variation time of the carry-over game times and the total granted points, and it is possible to provide a point granting effect pattern table corresponding to only the variation time. That is, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns that are suitable only for the variation time without considering the total granted points. And since the timing of giving points for each performance pattern is determined by lottery, the performance pattern and the timing for giving points are not patterned, and the player can always have a sense of expectation. .

A7-9. Modification 9:
In the above-mentioned modification 8, the point granting scenario records the total points awarded in the game times for the period corresponding to the carry-over game times, and each button press effect for the continuous effect last game times. The total period grant points until execution are recorded. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the following configuration can be adopted.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the modification 9. In this variation, the point grant scenario does not include the total points awarded for the period corresponding to the carry-over game times, and is given from the start of the carry-over game times to the most recently executed button press effect. The number of points to be set, or the number of points to be given from the button press effect to the next button press effect, that is, the total period granted points is set. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 65, the total points awarded during the period from the start of the carry-over game times to the execution of the button-down effect (Bt1) of the continuous effect last game times is set.

  The configuration of the production scenario is the same as that of the modification 8. In other words, one or a plurality of candidate timings are set in the effect scenario of the carry-over game times and the effect scenario of the continuous effect final game times. The timing for executing the point giving effect and the number of points given in each point giving effect are the number of points given before each button pressing effect set in the point giving scenario and each button set in the effect scenario. Based on the candidate timing up to the press effect, it is determined by lottery in the same manner as in the above-described modification 8. By doing in this way, the timing for executing the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are determined by lottery across the carry-over game times and the continuous effect final game times. As a result, the patterning between the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points given can be further suppressed.

A7-10. Modification 10:
The point giving effect is not limited to the effect mode (the effect that the turtle character gives points) shown in the first embodiment, and various modes can be adopted.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in the tenth modification. As shown in FIG. 66A, for example, an image showing a roulette for determining the points to be given may be displayed on the display surface 41a. In the roulette, numbers (for example, 0 to 19) corresponding to the number of points that may be given are displayed. After rotating the roulette, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the rotation of the roulette is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 66 (c), the number of points corresponding to the number indicated by the stopped arrow is given. To do. By setting the point granting effect in this manner, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the given points during the period when the roulette is rotating. In addition, since the roulette includes “0 (zero)” as the number of points to be given, a sense of urgency can be given to the player in addition to the sense of expectation.

  Furthermore, you may employ | adopt the structure where a point provision production straddles a some game time. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation of the roulette is not stopped in the game times in which the rotation of the roulette is started, but the rotation of the roulette is stopped in the game times after the game time. In this way, by executing a point giving effect (hereinafter also referred to as a carry-over point giving effect) across a plurality of game times, a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency for points given to the player for a long time across the game times can be obtained. Can be granted.

  For example, in the case where game times are held, if it is decided to give points in the game times, a carry-over point giving effect is provided in a game time (preceding game times) executed before the game times. The process which sets to the effect scenario of a prior | preceding game time so that the moving image of the roulette to show is displayed on the display surface 41a is performed. At the time when it is decided to give points in the reserved game times (pending game times), if the preceding game times have not yet been executed, the carry-over point giving effect is executed in the preceding game times. Set in the production scenario. In addition, at the time when it is determined that points are to be awarded in the reserved game times (pending game times), if the preceding game times that are executed prior to the reserved game times are already executed, In real time, display of a roulette movie showing a carry-over point giving effect in the preceding preceding game round is started. The point granting effect can be started from the preceding game times by displaying the roulette movie layer indicating the carry-over point giving effect as a layer higher than the effecting movie layer in the preceding game times. In this case, for example, by displaying a roulette video showing a carry-over point giving effect at a position close to the periphery of the display surface 41a, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the effect video in the preceding game round. can do.

  In addition, in the carry point giving effect of this modification, the roulette is rotated, and then the effect until the roulette rotation stops, that is, the effect that suggests that a point is given, is the first effect. The point that is given when the rotation is stopped is notified, and the pearl image indicating the accumulation point of the stage St is changed, and the accumulation point is displayed after the point is given, that is, the point is given. If the second effect is an effect indicating that the first effect is started, the first effect is started in the preceding game times, and the second effect is executed in the game times executed after the preceding game times. Various aspects can be employed.

  By adopting a configuration in which the first effect is started in the preceding game times and the second effect is executed in the game times executed after the preceding game times, the following effects can be created. The first effect can give the player a sense of expectation that points may be given. Since the second effect is an effect indicating that points are given, the player who recognizes the second effect is made to recognize that the points have been given, and give a sense of superiority and satisfaction. Can do. Moreover, the following effects can be created by combining the configuration of the first embodiment and the configuration of the present modification. Assuming that the preceding game times are the first game times and the game times executed after the preceding game times are the second game times, the first effect corresponding to the points given in the second game times is the first There are a case where the game starts and a case where the game starts. In other words, when the first effect is executed in a predetermined game time, points are awarded in the predetermined game time and in game times executed after the predetermined game time. In some cases, a player who recognizes that the first performance has been executed can be made to guess which case it is and can give a sense of expectation.

  In addition, as a configuration in which the first effect is started in the preceding game times and the second effect is executed in the game times executed after the preceding game times, the first game is from the start to the end of the first effect. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the second game round is executed from the start to the end of the second stage, and the stage of the roulette in the first stage is rotated. You may employ | adopt the structure which starts in the 2nd game round from the start of the production | generation which starts in game times, the roulette in rotation in the 1st production stops, and the 2nd production. Any of the configurations may be employed at the same time. When any configuration is adopted and a configuration in which the point giving effect does not cross the game times is combined, the player who recognizes that the first effect has been started in the predetermined game time is first played with roulette. The pleasure and expectation of guessing whether or not the rotation of the game stops at the game time is given. If the roulette stops at the game time, whether the points corresponding to the number of points given by the roulette being stopped are awarded at the game time or at the game time after the game time. Gives a sense of fun and expectation to guess what is granted. Therefore, stepwise enjoyment and expectation can be given to the player.

  In addition, as described in the first embodiment, the accumulation point may be reset when triggered by the end of the game round, or may not be reset, so that the player accumulates even at the end of the game round. You can draw attention to points. Further, according to the present modification, when the first effect is executed, a case where points are awarded in the predetermined game times, and a case where points are awarded in game times executed after the predetermined game times, and There is, and it is possible to make the player pay attention when shifting the game times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player various feelings of expectation when the game times are shifted.

  The first effect and the second effect in the present modification are not limited to the configuration described in the present modification, and various effects can be employed. For example, among the point giving effects in the first embodiment, the effect until the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and the pearl displaying the number of points given is dropped is adopted as the first effect. Then, the turtle character drops the pearl on which the number of points given is displayed, the pearl reaches the stage St, changes to a pearl image corresponding to the accumulation point, and the point giving effect ends. You may employ | adopt as a 2nd production.

A7-11. Modification 11:
In the said 1st Embodiment, according to the magnitude | size of the number of points provided in a point provision effect, the structure from which the aspect of the said point provision effect differs may be employ | adopted. For example, the color of the shell of the turtle, which is the character displayed in the point giving effect, is displayed in white when the assigned points are 0 to 2 points, and yellow when the given points are 3 to 6 points. When the number of points to be granted is 7 to 9 points, it is displayed in blue. When the number of points to be granted is 10 to 15 points, it is displayed in green, and the number of points to be granted is 16 to 20 points. In some cases, a configuration of displaying in red may be employed. Such a configuration can be realized by the following processing, for example. In step S12303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), after reading the number of granted points, the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point granting effect is determined according to the size of the read granted points. In step S12304, the point giving effect moving image display start command includes information on the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point giving effect, and transmits the command to the display-side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the point giving effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 reads the turtle shell color information included in the point giving effect moving image display start command, and changes the shell color according to the information. The process which displays the animation for production of the point provision effect which displayed the turtle on the symbol display apparatus 41 is performed. In this way, this configuration can be realized. With such a configuration, in addition to the display of the number of points displayed in the point giving effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and superiority by the color of the turtle shell.

  In addition, for example, in the first embodiment, the pearl dropped by the turtle character in the point giving effect employs a configuration in which the number of points given by the point giving effect is displayed. You may employ | adopt the structure from which the color of the pearl which a turtle drops differs according to the magnitude | size of the number of points provided in a point provision effect, without displaying a number. Such a configuration can also be realized by a process similar to the above-described process of displaying the color of the shell of the turtle in a different color according to the size of the number of points given in the point granting effect. That is, in step S12303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), after reading the number of granted points, the color of the pearl to be displayed in the point granting effect is determined according to the read granted point size. In step S12304, the point-giving effect moving image display start command includes information on the pearl color to be displayed in the point-giving effect, and transmits it to the display-side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the point giving effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 reads the pearl color information included in the point giving effect moving image display start command, and displays the pearl of the color corresponding to the information. The process which displays the animation for a point provision effect on the symbol display apparatus 41 is performed. In the case of this modification, since the number of points is not displayed on the pearl dropped by the turtle character in the point granting effect, the display side MPU 102 does not display the point number on the pearl dropped by the turtle character. Processing for displaying a moving image on the symbol display device 41 is executed. By doing in this way, even if the execution of the point giving effect is started, the player cannot clearly grasp the points to be given, and thus gives a sense of expectation with respect to the number of points given to the player. be able to. Furthermore, since the color of the pearls dropped by the turtle differs depending on the number of points given, the player is given the pleasure of guessing the number of points given based on the color of the pearls. Can do.

  Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure from which the character displayed in a point provision effect differs according to the magnitude | size of the number of points provided in a point provision effect. For example, the character to be displayed in the point giving effect is set as a turtle character when the given points are 0 to 2 points, and is set as an octopus character when the given points are 3 to 6 points. If the points to be awarded are 7-9 points, the crab character is set. If the points to be given is 10-15 points, the shark character is set. The points to be given are 16-20 points. In this case, a configuration in which the character is set as a whale character may be adopted. This configuration is also realized by the same processing as the configuration described above, that is, the configuration of changing the color of the shell of the turtle and the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle according to the number of points given in the point granting effect. be able to.

  In addition, when the point granting effect is executed and the points are given, the accumulated point exceeds the threshold (10 points), and the point granting effect to be executed is executed in other cases. You may employ | adopt the structure set to a different aspect. For example, in a state where the accumulated points are 3 points, when a point granting effect in which 9 points are given is executed, the accumulated points exceed 10 points. Instead of the turtle character displayed in the point giving effect, a configuration in which the character is set as a whale character may be adopted. In addition, when the point giving effect is executed and the points are given, the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points), and the number of points given by the point giving effect is equal to or larger than a predetermined size. In some cases, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect is set differently from the point giving effect executed in other cases. For example, when the point granting effect is executed and the points are given and the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points), and the number of points given by the point granting effect is 8 points or more , Adopting a configuration in which the character to be displayed in the point granting effect is set to a crab character instead of a turtle character, and the crab character is set to drop a pearl larger than a normal case Also good.

  Such a configuration can be realized by the following processing, for example. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), it is determined whether the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect to be executed before the button pressing effect, based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario, and the point giving This can be realized by determining whether or not the points given in the production are a predetermined size (for example, 8 points) or more. That is, in the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), the point granting effect to be executed is the last point giving effect to be executed before the button pressing effect based on the effect scenario and the point granting scenario. Video display for point granting effect set so that the crab character drops a larger pearl than usual when it is determined that the given points are equal to or greater than a predetermined size (for example, 8 points) The command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the point giving effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display effect display moving image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 where the crab character drops a pearl larger than a normal case. To do. In this way, this configuration can be realized. By adopting such a configuration, when the point granting effect in which the crab character drops a larger pearl than in a normal case is executed, the player is made more effective than when the normal point giving effect is executed. Expectation and superiority can be given. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a point giving effect will not be executed during the game, and also, whether a point giving effect in which the crab character drops a pearl larger than usual is executed. Such a feeling of expectation can be given to the player.

  In addition, the following configuration may be employed. For example, when the point giving effect is executed and the points are given, the accumulated point exceeds the threshold (10 points), and the super reach effect is executed after the button pressing effect executed when the accumulated point exceeds the threshold. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the point giving effect executed before the super reach effect is executed is set to a different aspect from the aspect of the point giving effect executed in other cases. . More specifically, in a state where the accumulation points are 5 points, a point grant effect in which 9 points are given is executed, the accumulation points exceed the threshold (10 points), and the accumulation points exceed the threshold When the super reach effect is executed after the button press effect executed by the button, the character displayed in the point giving effect executed before the super reach effect is executed is displayed during the normal point giving effect. Instead of a turtle character, a configuration in which a whale character is set may be employed. The normal reach effect is an effect that is executed when the symbol is in the reach state. The super reach effect is an effect that suggests to the player that the expectation (probability) of winning the big win lottery is higher than when only the normal reach effect is executed. In addition, the special reach production described later has a higher expectation (probability) of winning the big hit lottery than when only the normal reach production is executed and when the super reach production is executed in addition to the normal reach production. This is an effect that suggests to the player.

  In addition, this configuration is executed after the button pressing effect that is executed when the point giving effect is executed and the points are given and the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) and the accumulated points exceed the threshold. Not only when the production is a super reach production, but when the production executed after the button press production executed when the accumulated point exceeds the threshold is a special reach production, or that a lottery lottery is won The present invention may be applied in the case of an immediate notification effect (hereinafter also referred to as a single notification effect). That is, when the point giving effect is executed and the points are given, the accumulated point exceeds the threshold (10 points), and after the button pressing effect executed when the accumulated point exceeds the threshold, the special reach effect is executed. In the case of being executed or when a single announcement effect is executed, a configuration is adopted in which the aspect of the point giving effect to be executed is set differently from the aspect of the point giving effect executed in other cases To do.

  Such a configuration can be realized by the following processing, for example. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), it is determined whether the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect to be executed before the button pressing effect, based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. Then, when it is determined that the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect executed before the button pressing effect, the button pressing effect after the point giving effect is executed based on the effect scenario If the type of production is determined and the production is determined to be a specific type of production, such as a normal reach production, a super reach production, a special reach production, or a one-announcement production, depending on the type of production. Then, a special point giving effect different from the other cases is set as the point giving effect before the button pressing effect. In this way, the above configuration can be realized.

  In this way, when the point giving effect is executed and the points are given, the accumulated point exceeds the threshold value (10 points), and the effect executed after the button press effect executed when the accumulated point exceeds the threshold value Depending on the type of point, the point giving effect executed before the effect is executed adopts a configuration different from the point giving effect executed in other cases, so that points are given. In addition to giving a sense of expectation to the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and the pleasure of guessing the subsequent game. In addition, since there are a plurality of types of point giving effects, the player can be focused on the point giving effects that are executed each time.

  In other words, in this modification, the effect scenario set for a game time is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS corresponding to the game time. A point granting scenario is determined based on the presentation scenario determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS corresponding to the game times. Based on the grant scenario, the aspect of the point grant effect executed in the game round is determined.

A7-12. Modification 12:
In the said 1st Embodiment, the aspect which gives the progress of subsequent games may be employ | adopted for the aspect of provision of points. For example, 3 points, 3 points, 3 points, and 1 point given by each point giving effect suggest that the special reach effect is executed after the button press effect that is executed afterwards. After the button press effect is executed, the one-shot notification effect is executed after the aspect of giving the points to which 7 points, 7 points, and 7 points are given according to the configuration to be performed and each of the three point giving effects. A configuration that suggests this can be adopted. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, as follows.

  For point grant scenarios that are linked to an effect scenario that is set to execute a specific effect such as a special reach effect or a single announcement effect, By setting, for example, values of 3, 4, and 1 in advance to the number of granted points, the configuration can be realized. By doing in this way, a player can be made to pay more attention to the number of points given in each point granting effect. Moreover, based on the aspect of giving points, the player can make various guesses about the progress of the subsequent game, and the player can be given more expectation.

  In addition, the content suggested by the mode of giving points is not limited to the effect executed after that, for example, it may indicate the number of points given in the point giving effect executed after that, The result of the lottery may be suggested, or the carry-over of accumulated points may be suggested.

A7-13. Modification 13:
In the said 1st Embodiment, you may employ | adopt the structure which displays the information (henceforth point provision aspect information) regarding the aspect of provision of the already provided point. For example, a history of a mode in which points are granted may be displayed as the point grant mode information. And the history of the mode to which the point was given may be displayed with a color, a character, or the like.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the modification 13. FIG. FIG. 67 shows a state in which the pearl image indicating the points accumulated in the stage St in the point giving effect displays the history of the mode in which the points are given.

  FIG. 67 (a) shows the stage St accumulation points after the first (first) point giving effect is executed and 4 points are given from the state where the accumulation points are reset and a new game is started. It was. In the present modification, the points accumulated by executing the first point giving effect from the state where the accumulation points are reset and a new game is started are displayed as white pearl images on the stage St.

  FIG. 67 (b) shows the accumulation points of the stage St after the second point giving effect is executed and 2 points are given from the state where the accumulation points are reset and a new game is started. In the present modification, the points accumulated by executing the second point giving effect from the state where the accumulation points are reset and a new game is started are displayed as yellow pearl images on the stage St.

  FIG. 67 (c) shows the accumulation points of the stage St after the third point giving effect is executed and 3 points are given from the state where the accumulation points are reset and a new game round is started. In this modification, the points accumulated by executing the third point giving effect from the state where the accumulation points are reset and a new game is started are displayed as yellow-green pearl images on the stage St. .

  In this way, points are given by distinguishing the image indicating the points accumulated by executing each point granting effect by color for each point granting effect that triggered the accumulation point. A history of modes can be displayed. For example, when the player visually recognizes the image of the pearl indicating the accumulation point shown in the stage St of FIG. 67 (c), the player is given points in the order of 4 points → 2 points → 3 points. I can recognize that.

  This modification is realized by, for example, providing the sound history side RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 with a grant history storage area that is a storage area for storing the history of points given by the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be able to.

  68 and 69 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the grant history area. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the grant history storage area, the number of points given from the state in which the accumulated points are reset and a new game time is started (the number of times of point granting effects), and each number of grants are given. The color (displayed meal) for displaying the pearl image corresponding to the points accumulated by the point granting effect corresponding to is set in advance, and each time the point granting effect is actually executed, the granted point storage area A value indicating the point given to (hereinafter also referred to as a given point storage area) is stored. In the case of the grant history area shown in FIG. 68A, 4 points are given by the first point giving effect, 2 points are given by the second point giving effect, and 3 points are given by the third point giving effect. It can be seen that it was granted.

  FIG. 68 (b) shows the grant history storage area when the point granting effect is further executed once and 6 points are given from the state of FIG. 68 (a). In the granted history storage area of this modification, every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the given points are stored in the right storage area in the given point storage area. Since 9 points have already been accumulated in the 1st to 3rd grants, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the 4th grant, 1 point out of 6 given points is given. It is stored in the storage area in the same row as the first to third times, and the remaining 5 points are stored in the storage area in the right column. When displaying the pearl image corresponding to the accumulation point on the stage St, the rightmost column of the grant point storage area and the display color corresponding to the number of grants are read, and the pearl image is displayed on the stage St. Is displayed. Thus, by dividing the storage area into 10 points, the timer effect (or effect during standby) is executed when 10 points are accumulated, the accumulated points are subtracted by 10 points, and newly added to the stage St. Even if the points are accumulated, the stage St corresponds to the accumulated points with the display color corresponding to the number of points actually executed from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game is started. A pearl image can be displayed. Further, the grant history storage area shown in the present modification can also cope with a case where 10 points or more are awarded in one point grant effect.

  FIG. 69 shows a grant history storage area when a point granting effect is further executed once and 17 points are given from the state of FIG. 68 (b). In this case, 5 points out of 17 points are stored in the second column of the assigned point storage area, so that the storage area in the second column becomes 10 points. Of the remaining 12 points, 10 points are stored in the third column of the assigned point storage area, and the remaining 2 points are stored in the fourth column of the assigned point storage area. In this way, even when 10 or more points are awarded in one point granting effect, the rightmost column grant points in the grant point storage area and the display color corresponding to the number of grants are read. Thus, the pearl image corresponding to the accumulation point can be displayed on the stage St with the display color corresponding to the number of points actually executed from the state where the accumulation point is reset and a new game is started. .

  In addition, the timing for storing, reading, and resetting the points given to the given history storage area will be described. When storing the points to be granted in the grant history storage area, for example, when the number of granted points to be executed is read in step S12302 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), the points to be given are stored in the grant history storage. The structure memorize | stored in an area can be employ | adopted. At this time, as described above, every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the given point is stored in the storage area one right in the given point storage area.

  For reading of the grant history storage area, for example, in step S12310 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), the grant point in the rightmost column of the grant point storage area in the grant history storage area and the display color corresponding to the number of grants are displayed. A point accumulated moving image display start command for displaying a pearl image (point accumulated moving image) of a display color corresponding to the number of times of reading and adding points is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the point accumulation moving image display start command displays a pearl image corresponding to the accumulation point on the stage St with a display color corresponding to the number of points given.

  Regarding the resetting of the grant history storage area, for example, after resetting the accumulation point counter Cpnt in step S12603 of the point reset process (FIG. 59), the grant history storage area is reset. By executing such processing, the configuration in the modification can be realized.

  By adopting the configuration of the modified example, it is possible for the player to check the history of the points given points, such as the number of executions of point granting effects and the number of points given in one point giving effect. In addition, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for the game by allowing the player who has confirmed the history of the aspect to which the points have been given to guess the number of point giving effects to be executed thereafter, the number of points to be given, and the like. . In addition, when the aspect of giving points adopts a configuration that suggests the progress of the subsequent game as in the above-described modification 12, the player records the history of the aspect in which the points are given as in this modification. By enabling the player to confirm, the player can be further inferred about the progress of the subsequent game so that the player can pay attention to the game and give the player a sense of expectation. can do.

  In addition, in this modification, the history of the mode in which the points are given is displayed by the color of the pearl image indicating the accumulated points, but the character given to distinguish the points given for each point giving effect is displayed. It may be distinguished by a mark, a pattern, or the like. Moreover, you may display directly the point provided for every point provision production by the number. For example, when 3 points, 4 points, and 1 point are given by each of the 3 point giving effects, “3 · 4 · 1” is displayed on the display surface 41a. As described above, various display modes can be adopted as long as the player can recognize the history of the mode in which points are given.

  Moreover, the information which can identify only the number of points provided at the time of execution of the point grant production performed most recently as point grant mode information may be displayed. For example, among the pearl images displayed as the accumulation points on the stage St, only the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points given at the time of the most recently executed point granting effect is the other pearl images. You may employ | adopt the structure from which a color, a pattern, a shape, etc. differ.

A7-14. Modification 14:
You may employ | adopt the aspect which gives a point multiple times by one point provision production as the point provision production in the said 1st Embodiment. For example, of the point granting effects, the effect until the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and the pearl on which the number of points given is dropped is called a point grant suggesting effect, and the number of points given When the turtle character drops the pearl displayed with the symbol, and the pearl reaches the stage St, changes to a pearl image corresponding to the accumulation point, and the point granting effect is called the point granting effect. Then, after the point giving suggestion effect is executed once, the point giving execution effect is executed twice.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the point giving effect in the modification example 14. As shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which a point giving suggestion effect is being executed among the point giving effects. That is, the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, and the effect is shown until the start of dropping of the pearl on which the number of points given is displayed. FIG. 70B shows a state in which the first point giving execution effect is executed after the point giving suggestion effect is executed. As shown in the figure, the point giving execution effect is an effect indicating that 4 points are given. FIG. 70 (c) shows a state where the second point giving execution effect is executed after the first point giving execution effect is executed. As shown in the figure, the point giving execution effect is an effect indicating that 5 points are given. FIG. 70 (d) shows a state in which the point granting effect is finished while the second point giving effect is finished.

  By adopting such a configuration, a player who recognizes the point giving suggestion is then given a sense of expectation as to how many times the point giving execution effect is executed, that is, how many points are given. It can give a sense of expectation. In addition, when the point grant execution effect is executed a plurality of times after the point grant suggestion effect is executed once, it is recognized that the point grant suggestion effect has been executed, and thereafter the point grant execution effect is executed once. Unexpectedness and surprise can be given to a player who has been assumed to be.

  In addition, in FIG. 70, the example in which two point grant execution effects are executed for one point grant suggestion effect has been described, but N (N ≧ 2) for one point grant suggestion effect. (Integer) times of point giving execution effects may be executed. Moreover, the value of N may differ every time for every point provision production.

  The point giving effect in the present modification can be realized as follows, for example. For example, in the case of executing the point giving execution effect twice for one point giving suggesting effect, in the point giving scenario applied in the first embodiment, the point corresponding to the one point giving effect is shown. Dividing the value (for example, 9 points) into 2 (for example, 4 points and 5 points), giving one point (4 points) of the point value divided in the first point giving execution effect, and executing the second point giving This can be realized by giving the other point (5 points) of the point values divided by the effect. According to such processing, it is only necessary to acquire one point value set in the point grant scenario corresponding to the point grant suggestion effect to be executed. That is, even if the point giving execution effect is executed N times for one point giving suggestion effect, it is only necessary to acquire one point value set in the point giving scenario. And the value of the acquired point is divided into N and used for each point giving execution effect. Therefore, even if the point giving execution effect is executed N times in one point giving effect, the process for obtaining the point value to be given from the point giving scenario is the same regardless of the value of N. Therefore, processing can be simplified. Also, the point value set in advance in the point grant scenario can be set regardless of the value of N, and the setting of the number of points in the point grant scenario can be simplified.

  In addition, the point giving effect in the present modification can be realized as follows, for example. For example, in the case where two point grant execution effects are executed for one point grant suggestion effect, in the point grant scenario applied in the first embodiment, the points corresponding to the two point grant effects are displayed. Get the value. For example, when the number of points set as the first point giving effect in the point granting scenario is 4 points and the number of points set as the second point giving effect in the point giving scenario is 5 points Then, the value of the point corresponding to the two points giving effect is acquired. After executing the point giving suggestion effect once, the first point giving execution effect is executed using the four points of the number of points set as the first point giving effect in the point giving scenario, and then Then, the second point giving execution effect is executed using 5 points of the number of points set as the second point giving effect in the point giving scenario. Even in this way, the above configuration can be realized. According to such a process, when executing N point giving execution effects for one point giving suggesting effect, the number of point giving execution effects to be executed (N times) is determined from the point giving scenario. Since it is only necessary to acquire the value of the corresponding number (N) of points, there is no need to execute a process of dividing the value of the point corresponding to one point giving effect into N as in the above configuration, Processing can be simplified.

A7-15. Modification 15:
In the said 1st Embodiment, the aspect of the point provision production was an aspect which suggests that an addition process is performed to the accumulation | storage point already accumulate | stored in the stage St. For example, taking the point giving effect shown in FIG. 12 as an example, 4 points have already been accumulated in the stage St as accumulated points, and if the point giving effect is executed, the pearl dropped by the turtle A point giving effect in a form indicating that the displayed number of points (3 points) is added to the number of points already accumulated (4 points) is executed. As described above, the point giving effect in the first embodiment is an aspect that suggests that a newly added point is added to the accumulated points that have already been accumulated in the stage St (hereinafter referred to as an adding aspect). Called). And when the point granting effect of the addition mode is executed, the number of points as a result of adding the points given by the point granting effect of the addition mode to the points displayed as the accumulated points is the new accumulated point Is displayed. However, the aspect of the point giving effect is not limited to the addition aspect, and other aspects may be adopted. For example, you may employ | adopt the point provision effect of the aspect (henceforth a multiplication aspect) which suggests that a multiplication process is performed to the accumulation | storage point already accumulate | stored in the stage St.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in a multiplication mode. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the point giving effect of the multiplication mode is that after the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the turtle character drops a pearl as shown in FIG. 71 (b). However, “× 2” indicating multiplication processing is displayed on the pearl. And as shown in FIG.71 (c), when the pearl displayed as "x2" reaches | attains stage St, it will already be in stage St as an accumulation point corresponding to "x2" displayed on the pearl. The number of points obtained by multiplying the displayed 4 points by 2 (8 points) is displayed as a new accumulation point.

  Such a configuration can be realized as follows. For example, in the point grant scenario, a point value corresponding to the point grant effect of the multiplication mode is set. At this time, the value of the accumulated points until the point giving effect of the multiplication mode is X, the value to be multiplied to the accumulated points in the point giving effect of the multiplication mode is A, and the point giving effect of the multiplication mode set in the point giving scenario If the value of the point corresponding to Y is Y, the value of Y calculated as Y = XA−X is set in the point grant scenario as the value of the point corresponding to the point grant effect of the multiplication mode. In addition, the effect scenario is set so that a multiplication point giving effect is executed. In this way, the above configuration can be realized.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation for the value to be multiplied to the accumulated points to the player who has recognized the point giving effect of the multiplication mode, and the game with respect to the point giving effect of the multiplication mode Can attract attention. In addition, when a point giving effect in a multiplication mode is executed, a player who has recognized that a turtle character has appeared on the display surface 41a and has assumed that a point giving effect in an addition mode will be executed is given. , Can give surprises and greatly improve expectations.

  Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which controls (changes) the aspect of the point provision production effect of a multiplication aspect to the aspect according to the magnitude | size of the value multiplied by the accumulation | storage point. For example, adopting a configuration in which the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle differs depending on the value multiplied by the accumulation point, or a configuration in which the character that appears is different (for example, a configuration in which an octopus appears instead of a turtle) Also good. By doing in this way, a player can be made to pay attention to the point provision effect of a multiplication mode further.

  Furthermore, when the point provision effect of the multiplication mode is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of points than the result of multiplying the accumulated points that have already been accumulated is displayed as new accumulated points. For example, when 4 points have already been accumulated, the multiplication point giving effect is executed. In the point giving effect of the multiplication mode, “× 2” indicating the multiplication process is displayed on the pearl dropped by the turtle. In this case, normally, when “× 2” indicating multiplication processing reaches stage St, 8 points (4 points × 2) are displayed as new accumulation points. , The number of accumulated points (for example, 10 points) with more than 8 points is displayed. In this way, it is possible to give unexpectedness and happiness to a player who has recognized new accumulation points that are greater than the accumulation points as a result of multiplying the accumulation points that have already been accumulated.

  Moreover, as a point granting effect, there are a case where the point granting effect of the addition mode is executed and a case where the point granting effect of the multiplication mode is executed. It is possible to give a sense of urgency or tension as to whether it is executed or a point giving effect of multiplication mode is executed.

  Furthermore, when the point provision effect of the addition mode is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of points larger than the number of points added as a result of addition to the already accumulated points is displayed as new accumulated points. In this way, it is possible to give unexpectedness and happiness to a player who has recognized new accumulation points that are greater than the accumulation points as a result of adding to the accumulation points that have already been accumulated.

  In addition, the aspect of a point provision effect is not restricted to an addition aspect or a multiplication aspect, You may employ | adopt the structure which performs the point provision effect of various calculation aspects, such as a point provision effect of a subtraction aspect and a division aspect. By doing in this way, while being able to make a player pay attention to the point provision effect performed, an inflection can be provided to a player's sense of expectation.

  In addition, you may employ | adopt the structure from which the aspect of the said point provision effect changes during execution of one point provision effect. For example, during the execution of one point granting effect, the mode changes from the addition mode to the multiplication mode, from the multiplication mode to the addition mode, or during the execution of one point granting effect. You may employ | adopt the structure from which an aspect changes in multiple times. Thus, it can be made to recognize that the calculation method performed by point provision production has changed, and an unexpectedness can be given to a player. Also, depending on the calculation method executed by the point giving effect, the value of the new accumulated points after the calculation process may be greatly different, so by changing the mode of the point giving effect, the player can In addition, a sense of urgency can be given to the player, and an inflection can be given to the player's expectation.

  FIG. 72 shows, as an example, an image of a pearl dropped by a turtle when the mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during the execution of one point giving effect (hereinafter also simply referred to as a pearl image). It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode of. FIG. 72 (a) shows an image of a pearl when the point giving effect is an addition mode. In the image of the pearl, “+” that is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition is displayed, which suggests that the point giving effect is an addition mode. FIG. 72 (b) shows a pearl image when the point giving effect is a multiplication mode. In the image of the pearl, “x” that is an arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication is displayed, which suggests that the point giving effect is a multiplication mode.

  For example, when changing the mode from the addition mode to the multiplication mode during the point giving effect, the arithmetic symbol “+” indicating the addition displayed in the pearl image in FIG. 72A is rotated. Then, it is changed to “x”, which is an arithmetic symbol indicating the multiplication displayed in the pearl image of FIG. On the contrary, when changing the mode from the multiplication mode to the addition mode during the execution of the point granting effect, the “x” that is an arithmetic symbol indicating the multiplication displayed in the pearl image of FIG. 72B is rotated. Then, it is changed to “+” which is an arithmetic symbol indicating the addition displayed in the pearl image of FIG. By adopting such a configuration, the meaning can be changed greatly by the process of rotating the symbols of almost the same line drawing such as “+” and “×”. On the other hand, a great sense of urgency can be imparted, and an inflection can be imparted to the player's expectation.

  In addition, when changing the mode between the addition mode and the multiplication mode a plurality of times during the execution of one point giving effect, it is an arithmetic symbol displayed on the image of the pearl dropped and dropped “+” (Or “x”) may be continuously rotated. Then, the rotation of the arithmetic symbol is stopped at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the pearl reaches the stage St), and the operation is performed on the accumulation point by the operation (addition or multiplication) indicated by the arithmetic symbol at the time of the stop. Corresponding points (pearl images showing accumulated points) are displayed on the stage St. By doing in this way, a player can be made to pay attention to a point granting effect further.

A7-16. Modification 16:
In the first embodiment, as a display mode of accumulated points, one point is displayed as an image of one pearl on the stage St. However, the accumulated points are not limited to such a configuration. It can be displayed in various ways.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode of accumulated points. The display mode of the accumulated points shown in the present modification is a display mode in which a shape (image) having one meaning is not made until the number of points of the accumulation points reaches a threshold value (10 points). FIG. 73 (a) to FIG. 73 (j) show how points are accumulated from 1 point to 10 points. In the case of the display mode shown in FIG. 73, it is a display mode in which an image of one pearl is obtained only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to give the player an improvement in forming one meaningful image from partial images, and the number of accumulation points is 10 points. When one meaningful image is formed by reaching the above, a sense of achievement can be given to the player.

  In addition, in FIG. 73, the boundary line (contour line) of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is displayed, but the pearl corresponding to one point is not limited to such a display mode. A display mode that does not display the boundary lines of the partial images may be adopted.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode in which a boundary line of a partial image of a pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed as a display mode of accumulated points. As shown in the figure, since the boundary line of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize the accumulated number of points. Therefore, the accumulation point may reach the threshold value unconsciously by the player, and surprise can be given to the player.

  In addition, as described in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, as a display mode of accumulated points, a mode (image) that displays one meaning only after the number of points of accumulation points reaches a threshold value (10 points) is displayed. However, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which a shape (image) that makes one meaning is changed at a predetermined timing only when the number of points of the accumulation point reaches a threshold value (10 points). For example, as shown in FIG. 73, an accumulation point is displayed in a display form in which an image of one pearl is displayed only after the number of accumulation points reaches 10, and then the pearl is reached when the accumulation point reaches a threshold value. The image changes to a shellfish image showing a timer effect or a shellfish image showing a stand-by effect, and the accumulation point on the stage St shifts again to the 0 point state, and a new accumulation point is accumulated from the 0 point state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 75, as a display mode of the new storage points, the storage points are displayed in a display mode in which only one whale image is displayed when the number of storage points reaches 10 points. May be adopted. By doing in this way, a player can be made to pay attention to the accumulation point of stage St. In addition, the player can imagine what shape (image) is formed each time a meaningful shape (image) is changed only after the number of accumulated points reaches the threshold (10 points). And a new expectation can be given to the player.

  Further, for example, a configuration in which shapes (images) formed in the process of accumulating the accumulation points differ according to the expectation degree (probability) of winning the big hit lottery in the game round may be adopted. For example, when a single announcement effect is executed after the accumulation point reaches a threshold value and a button press effect is executed, an image of one mambo is formed as a shape formed in the process of accumulating the accumulation point. adopt. For example, when the special reach effect is executed after the accumulation point reaches the threshold and the button press effect is executed, an image of one shark is formed as a shape formed in the process of accumulating the accumulation point. adopt. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the accumulation point of the stage St, and increase the player's expectation in the process of forming an image showing the accumulation point. Can be made.

A7-17. Modification 17:
In the first embodiment, an amount that can be counted, which is a “point”, is employed as the object to be given, but an amount that cannot be counted may be employed. For example, instead of the point giving effect, an effect in which liquid is added to the container displayed on the stage St may be adopted.

A7-18. Modification 18:
In 1st Embodiment, although the structure which makes the threshold value of the accumulation point for performing a button press effect 10 points was employ | adopted, not only such a structure but the accumulation point for performing a button press effect Any positive value can be adopted as the threshold value.

A7-19. Modification 19
In 1st Embodiment, when the accumulation | storage point reached the threshold value, the structure which performs a button press effect was employ | adopted, However, Not only a button press effect but the structure which performs another effect may be employ | adopted. . For example, when the accumulation point reaches a threshold value, a predetermined reach effect may be executed instead of the button press effect. That is, reach is always achieved when 10 accumulation points are accumulated, so that each time a point is awarded, the player can be given a sense of expectation for reach. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific process such as a button press effect is not executed even when the accumulation point reaches a threshold value. By doing so, it is possible to cause the player to guess whether or not a specific process such as a button press effect is executed after the accumulation point reaches the threshold value, and to give the player a sense of urgency.

A7-20. Modification 20:
In the first embodiment, the suggestion as to whether or not the accumulation point is carried over is performed by changing the color of the stage St, but may be performed by other methods such as lighting, blinking, and changing the shape of the stage St. In addition, a dedicated lamp or the like for indicating whether or not the accumulation point is carried over may be provided.

A7-21. Modification 21:
In the first embodiment, in the period allocated to the button press effect (hereinafter also referred to as the button press effect period), the effect operation button 24 is operated according to the timing at which the player presses the effect operation button 24. An aspect may be adopted in which the effect executed in the period after the button press effect period ends is changed. The time from the start of the button press effect period to the timing when the player presses the effect operation button 24 is measured, and the button press effect period is determined after the effect operation button 24 is operated according to the measured value. This can be realized by reading out and executing effect image data from the effect storage area in which the effect corresponding to the period until the end is recorded. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the button press effect from being patterned, and to make the player pay attention to the button press effect.

A7-22. Variation 22:
In the first embodiment, the position (image) having the function of accumulating the assigned points is only the stage St displayed on the display surface 41a, but the position having the function of accumulating the assigned points. A configuration in which a plurality of (images) are displayed on the display surface 41a may be employed.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which a plurality (a plurality of positions) of positions (images) having a function of accumulating assigned points are displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in FIG. 76A, the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3 are displayed on the display surface 41a as positions (images) having a function of accumulating the given points. Has been. In this modified example, each stage St has a different function in production. Specifically, the effects that are executed when the number of points accumulated in each stage St reaches a threshold value are different.

  When the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, the timer effect (or standby effect) and the button press effect are subsequently executed. Then, after the button pressing effect is executed, a one-shot notification effect is executed. As described above, the one-shot notification effect is an effect that immediately notifies that the jackpot lottery has been won. Accordingly, the player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold value is executed with the button press effect triggered by the fact that the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold value. You can recognize that you have won the jackpot lottery in the game times.

  When the points accumulated in the second stage St2 reach the threshold value, a timer effect (or a standby effect) and a button press effect are executed thereafter. Then, after the button pressing effect is executed, the special reach effect is executed. As described above, the special reach production has a higher expectation (probability) for winning the big hit lottery than when the normal reach production is executed and when the super reach production is executed in addition to the normal reach production. This is an effect that suggests to the player that the price is high. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the second stage St2 have reached the threshold value is executed with the button press effect triggered by the fact that the points accumulated in the second stage St2 have reached the threshold value. It is possible to recognize that the degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery in the game round is high.

  When the points accumulated in the third stage St3 reach the threshold value, a timer effect (or a standby effect) and a button press effect are subsequently executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, the normal reach effect is executed. The normal reach effect is an effect that suggests to the player that the degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when the normal reach effect is not executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the point accumulated in the third stage St3 has reached the threshold value is executed with the button press effect triggered by the fact that the point accumulated in the third stage St3 has reached the threshold value. It can be recognized that at least a normal reach effect is executed in the game times.

  From the characteristics of each stage St, when the player is awarded points, the player desires that the points are accumulated most in the first stage St1 among the three stages St, and then It is desired that points are accumulated in the second stage St2, and finally, it is desired that points are accumulated in the third stage St3.

  In the point giving effect shown in FIG. 76, when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, a pearl image displaying the number of points given is not displayed. The turtle character proceeds from the right end to the left end on the display surface 41a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the turtle character passes over the target stage St for accumulating points to be given in the point giving effect, the number of points to be given is displayed. Drop a pearl. As shown in FIG. 76 (c), the dropped pearl changes to a pearl image indicating accumulation points after reaching the target stage St for accumulating the points to be imparted in the point provision effect, and the stage St Are accumulated as accumulation points.

  Such an effect is a stage St (first stage St1) in which points are accumulated in each point giving effect executed in the game time in the effect scenario and point giving scenario set in the game time in which the effect is executed. The second stage St2 and the third stage St3) can be realized by setting in advance.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the position (stage St) where the points are accumulated in the point giving effect, and to provide a new enjoyment to the player. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), points are accumulated in any stage St for a player who recognizes that a turtle character has appeared on the display surface 41a in the point giving effect. It is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether the number of points is given or not. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the player who recognizes that the turtle character is passing the upper part of each stage St is expected about the position where the points are accumulated (stage St). A feeling of urgency and a sense of urgency can be imparted, and a sense of expectation for the number of points to be imparted can also be imparted. Further, for example, when the pearl displaying the number of points given from the turtle character is dropped on the stage St (for example, the first stage St1) that the player expected, for the player , Can give a sense of superiority.

  In the point giving effect described in FIG. 76, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the number of points given is displayed. The configuration is such that the image is not displayed. However, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, an image of a pearl displaying the number of points given is displayed. A configuration may be adopted.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point giving effect in which the number of granted points is displayed at the start. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), in this point giving effect, when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, a pearl displaying the number of points given is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the turtle character passes the upper part of each stage St, the pearl on which the number of points given is displayed is divided into three stages St (first stage St1, first stage St1). 2 stage St2 and 3rd stage St3). And as shown in FIG.77 (c), the image of the pearl which shows the accumulation | storage point, after the pearl which displayed the number of points to be given reaches | attains the stage St which accumulate | stores the point provided in the said point provision effect. And accumulated as accumulation points in the stage St.

  Such an effect is different from the point award effect shown in FIG. 76 in that the number of points awarded is displayed at the start of the point award effect. In this case, the player who has recognized the number of points awarded does not necessarily want the points to be accumulated in the first stage St1, and the stage St in which the accumulated points reach the threshold value due to the point granting effect that is executed this time. In some cases (for example, the second stage St2 shown in FIG. 77), it may be desired that points are accumulated in the stage St. In this way, in the case of the point giving effect shown in FIG. 77, the player determines which stage St has a high expectation (probability) that is won in the jackpot lottery when the accumulated points reach the threshold value. In addition to consideration, the stage St at which points are desired to be accumulated is determined in consideration of the point accumulation status of each stage St at the present time. Therefore, by executing such a point giving effect, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of grasping the state of the game from various perspectives.

  In addition, in addition to the effect which gives a point (point granting effect), you may employ | adopt the structure which performs the other effect regarding a point. For example, when it is executed, an effect that causes any of the accumulation points of the three stages St to reach the threshold value (hereinafter also referred to as a threshold value effect) may be executed.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the threshold reaching effect. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the threshold reaching effect is started, the crab character passes through the display surface 41a from the right end to the left end with a pearl. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the crab character drops a pearl on the target stage St that causes the accumulation point to reach the threshold value. When the dropped pearl reaches the stage St, as shown in FIG. 78C, the accumulation point of the target stage St that causes the accumulation point to reach the threshold value changes to a display that has reached the threshold value. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), a timer effect corresponding to the stage St that has reached the threshold value is executed. In the example of FIG. 78, the accumulation point of the first stage St1 reaches the threshold value, and the timer effect image (whale character and timer image) prepared for the first stage St1 is displayed. As described above, when the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, the timer effect (or the effect during standby) and the button press effect are executed thereafter, and the button press effect is executed. After that, a one-shot announcement effect is executed.

  Such a configuration can be realized by making a setting related to the threshold reaching effect in advance in the effect scenario and the point granting scenario set for the game times for executing the threshold reaching effect.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give a player a new sense of expectation regarding points in addition to the point giving effect. Specifically, the game result varies greatly depending on which stage St the target threshold reaching effect reaches the threshold value, so that a great sense of expectation and urgency is given to the player. be able to.

  In the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3, the effects that are executed when the points accumulated in the stage St reach the threshold value are respectively one notification effect and special reach. Although it was the production and the normal reach production, it is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which other productions and processes are executed may be adopted.

  In addition, the points accumulated in each of the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3 are configured so that the points may be carried over across the game times and may not be carried over as in the first embodiment. It may be adopted. As in the first embodiment, the accumulation points may not carry over, so that the player can be given a sense of expectation so that the accumulation points on each stage reach a threshold value before the game round ends. In addition, the player who recognizes that accumulation of points has started in at least one of the stages is made aware of the timing of the end of the game round, and attention is paid to the manner in which accumulation points are given on each stage. be able to. In addition, even if the accumulation point on at least one of the three stages in the game times does not reach the threshold value because the accumulation point may carry over across the game times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the accumulated points are not reset at the end of the game time but are maintained until the next game time and the threshold value may be reached in the next game time. That is, such an expectation can be given to each accumulation point on the three stages, and there is an opportunity to give an expectation to the player as compared with the first embodiment. Can be increased.

A7-23. Modification 23:
In the first embodiment, an effect (hereinafter also referred to as a carry-over change effect) may be executed that makes it appear as if the game time being executed is changed from a game time that is not a carry-over game time to a carry-over game time.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the carry forward effect. In the game times shown in FIG. 79 (a), the color of the stage St is orange, indicating that the game times are not carry-over game times. When the carry-over change effect is executed in the game time, an octopus character on the yellow stage appears from the right end of the display surface 41a. When the yellow stage is displayed at the position of the stage St on the display surface 41a, it indicates that the game number is a carry-over game number.

  After the octopus character on the yellow stage appears, the yellow stage falls at the timing when the yellow stage and the octopus character pass above the stage St as shown in FIG. 79 (b). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79C, the yellow stage image is superimposed on the orange stage St, and then the color of the stage St changes from orange to yellow. That is, when the carry-over change effect is executed, the color of the stage St changes from a color (orange) indicating that it is not a carry-over game number to a color (yellow) indicating that it is a carry-over game number.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player who has recognized the execution of the carry-over change effect is made to recognize that the game time has been changed from a game time that is not a carry-over game time to a carry-over game time. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game times.

  Further, in this modification, an octopus character on the yellow stage appears in the same manner as the carry-over change effect, and the yellow stage and the octopus character pass above the stage St, but the yellow stage falls. In addition, an effect that the yellow stage and the octopus character simply pass from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a, that is, a dummy effect that appears to be a carry-over change effect is also executed. Guess whether the yellow stage image will fall or not for a player who recognizes that an octopus character on the yellow stage has appeared by performing a dummy effect that looks like a carry-over change effect As a result, it is possible to guess whether the game time is changed to a carry-over game time or not, and to give a sense of urgency. And when a yellow stage falls, a sense of superiority and an expectation can be provided with respect to a player.

  In such a configuration, settings relating to the carry-over change effect are set in advance in the effect scenario and the point grant scenario set in the game times for executing the carry-over change effect, and the carry-over change is performed in the stage display control process (FIG. 60). When the effect is executed, it can be realized by executing a process of setting the color of the stage St when the accumulation of points is started to the color of the stage St (orange) when it is not the carry-over game times. it can.

A7-24. Modification Example 24:
In the first embodiment, an effect in which the remaining time indicated by the timer effect is extended (hereinafter also referred to as a timer time extension effect) may be executed.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer time extension effect. In the game times shown in FIG. 80A, the timer effect is being executed. When the timer time extension effect is started, as shown in FIG. 80A, a fish character with a timer (hereinafter also referred to as an extension timer) hung appears from the right end of the display surface 41a. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), when the fish character hanging the extension timer passes through the upper part of the shell and the timer image showing the timer effect, the extension timer hanging by the fish character falls. And superimposed on the timer image indicating the timer effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80C, the remaining time until the button pressing effect indicated by the timer image representing the timer effect is extended.

  That is, the remaining time until the button press effect before being extended in the process is a time set as a dummy remaining time (hereinafter also referred to as a dummy remaining time). Then, when the remaining time of the dummy remaining time approaches 0 (zero), or after it becomes 0 (zero), the timer time extension effect is executed, and the remaining time indicated by the timer effect timer is changed to the true remaining time. Update on time. By doing in this way, the structure of this modification is realizable.

  Such a timer time extension effect indicates that the remaining time indicated by the dummy remaining time indicates the time until the middle part of the effect being executed or the end part of the effect being executed. Credibility can be given to the player, and the player can be trusted with respect to the dummy remaining time. Then, by executing the timer time extension effect and updating the remaining time indicated by the timer of the timer effect from the dummy remaining time to the true remaining time, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness and expectation.

  Also, in this modification, a fish character with an extended timer appears in the same manner as the timer time extension effect, and the fish character with the extended timer passes above the stage St. The effect that the fish character with the extension timer hanging without passing through it passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a, that is, the dummy effect that appears to be the timer time extension effect is also executed. By performing a dummy effect that looks like a timer time extension effect, a player who recognizes that a fish character with a timer hung has appeared and guesses whether the timer will fall or not. It is possible to guess whether the remaining time indicated by is extended or not, and to give a sense of urgency. And when an extension timer falls, a sense of superiority and expectation can be given to a player.

A7-25. Modification 25:
In the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot lottery of the continuous effect final game times to be executed later as the number of times the accumulated points are continuously carried forward, that is, the more times the carry-over game times are continuously executed. Control that increases the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot may be executed. As a specific example, compared to a case where a continuous effect final game time is executed after one carry-over game time is executed, a continuous effect final game time after three carry-over game times are continuously executed. In the case where is executed, control is performed so that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit in the big win lottery of the continuous production final game times is higher.

  For example, when it is determined that a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery for the reserved game times by the destination determination process, the more game times (preceding game times) to be executed prior to the reserved game times, Control is performed so that a continuous effect is easily executed from the game times executed after determining that the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery of the reserved game times through the determination process. Specifically, in the effect information setting process, when the execution game number Np is determined by lottery based on the resettable game number Fn, the case where the reserved game number (processing target game number) is a big hit. The lottery table data for determining the number Np of executed games is set so as to increase the probability that the value of the number Np of executed games will increase as compared with the case of losing (reach occurrence). By doing in this way, the control is performed so that the higher the number of times the carry-over game times are continuously executed, the higher the degree of expectation that is won in the jackpot lottery of the consecutive performance final game times executed thereafter. can do. By adopting such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be increased as the carry-over gaming times are continuously executed.

  In addition, the greater the number of times the accumulation points continue to carry over the game times while maintaining the state where the accumulation points do not reach the threshold (10 points), the larger the number of wins in the big win lottery of the consecutive performance final game times executed thereafter. Control that increases the degree of expectation may be performed. For example, when it is determined that a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery for the reserved game times by the first determination process, and in the effect information setting process, an effect scenario and a point grant scenario corresponding to the number of executed games Np are determined. In addition, in the case where the reserved game number (the processing target game number) is a big hit, the accumulated points are set to the threshold value from the carry-over game number to the continuous effect final game number compared to the case of the miss (reach occurrence). Table data for lottery for determining the production scenario and the point grant scenario is set so that the probability of being determined as the production scenario and the point grant scenario that does not reach (10 points) is increased. By doing in this way, the greater the number of times the accumulation points continue to carry over the game times while maintaining the state where the accumulation points do not reach the threshold (10 points), the greater the success of the final stage game times that will be executed subsequently. It is possible to execute control that increases the degree of expectation that is won in the lottery.

  By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to a player who recognizes that the accumulation point continues to carry over the game times while maintaining the state where the accumulation point does not reach the threshold (10 points). . As a result, it can be suppressed that the player's sense of expectation declines in a state where the accumulation points have not reached the threshold value.

A7-26. Modification 26:
In the said 1st Embodiment, you may employ | adopt the structure by which the threshold value of the accumulation | storage point for a button press effect being performed is changed. Specifically, the timer effect or standby effect is not executed even though 10 accumulation points are accumulated, accumulation points are accumulated exceeding 10 points, and a predetermined number of points exceeding 10 points is accumulated. The timer effect, the standby effect, or the button press effect regardless of the configuration in which the timer effect, the standby effect, or the button press effect is executed at the timing (for example, 15 points), or the accumulation point is not stored in 10 points. A configuration in which is executed may be adopted. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the player is not notified that the threshold value of the accumulation point for executing the button press effect has been changed. In such a configuration, a production scenario and a point grant scenario specialized for processing with a changed threshold value are prepared in advance, and only when the processing is executed, values set as threshold values in various processing (usually, The process can be executed by setting “10”) to the threshold value after change (for example, “15”) and executing it. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute a button press effect at a timing that the player does not expect, and as a result, it is possible to give an unexpectedness to the player.

  Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which performs the process which changed such a threshold value, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time which performs the said process is a jackpot or lose | misses (reach generation | occurrence | production). By adopting such a configuration, a player who recognizes that the threshold has been changed, that is, a player who recognizes that the accumulation points have accumulated over 10 points, and the accumulation points are 10 points. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to a player who has recognized that a button press effect has been executed in spite of the state of not being accumulated.

  In addition, you may employ | adopt the structure which alert | reports to a player by the effect that the threshold value of the accumulation point for performing a button press effect is changed. For example, an effect that suggests that the threshold value of the accumulation points for executing the button press effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that the button press effect is executed more easily than when the threshold of accumulation points for executing the button press effect is 10 points. In addition, in a state where a predetermined number of points have already been accumulated (for example, in a state where 6 points have been accumulated), the threshold of accumulation points for executing the button press effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points. When an effect suggesting this is executed, the number of points necessary for executing the button press effect has already been accumulated. In this case, the timer effect was executed prior to the button press effect immediately after the effect suggesting that the threshold value of the accumulation points for executing the button press effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points. In this case, unexpectedness and expectation can be given to the player. Such a configuration can be realized by setting in advance in the production scenario and the point grant scenario.

A7-27. Modification 27:
In the first embodiment, the first execution game number display shown in the first execution game number display area J1, the first hold game number display shown in the first hold display area Ds1, and the second execution game number display area J2 In association with each display (hereinafter collectively referred to as game time display) of the second execution game time display shown and the second hold game time display shown in the second hold display area Ds2, You may employ | adopt the structure which displays the number of grant points provided. More specifically, when points are awarded at a predetermined game number, the game number is displayed in the vicinity of the game number display corresponding to the predetermined game number (for example, immediately above the game number display). You may display the display (grant point suggestion display) corresponding to the number of points provided. In this case, the grant point suggestion display may be displayed corresponding to all displayed game times display, or the grant point suggestion display may be displayed corresponding to some displayed game times display. May be. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give various guesses and expectations for the game times corresponding to the displayed grant point suggestion display to the player who has recognized the grant point suggestion display. For example, when a given point suggestion display is displayed in association with a game number display corresponding to a pending game number, various guesses for the pending game number are given to the player who has recognized the given point suggestion display. And a sense of expectation. In addition, for example, points are awarded in the range of less than 10 points in the game times being executed, and corresponding to the point indication that is displayed corresponding to the game times display corresponding to the next game time to be executed When the number of points to be added and the number of points currently given becomes 10 points or more, the assigned point suggestion display displayed corresponding to the game times display corresponding to the next game time to be executed is not displayed. Compared to the case, it is possible to make the player yearn for wanting to carry over the point until the next game round, and if the point is carried over, the player is given a great sense of expectation. can do.

  In addition, after giving a hint indication corresponding to a predetermined game time to a game time display corresponding to a game time different from the predetermined game time, the game point display corresponding to the predetermined game time is supported. You may employ | adopt the structure which attaches and displays. For example, an image of a number displayed as a given point suggestion display immediately above the game number display corresponding to the reserved game number for the first start opening (n = 1) is displayed at a predetermined timing. The game time display corresponding to n = 2) is moved directly above.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reverse the player's guess based on the given point suggestion display displayed in association with the game times display corresponding to the game times different from the predetermined game times. In contrast, unexpectedness can be imparted.

  In such a configuration, a game corresponding to a predetermined game time is displayed after displaying an award point suggestion display corresponding to a predetermined game time in association with a game time display corresponding to a game time different from the predetermined game time. This can be realized by setting the effect scenario and the point grant scenario in advance so as to be displayed in association with the time display.

  In addition, after displaying the point indication suggestion corresponding to the number of points different from the number of points awarded in the predetermined game times, a configuration that displays the point indication indication corresponding to the number of points granted in the predetermined game times is adopted May be. For example, an image of the number “5” displayed as the assigned point suggestion display immediately above the game number display corresponding to the reserved game number (n = 1) for the first start opening is displayed at a predetermined timing. The image is changed to “7”.

  It is possible to reverse the player's guess based on the point indication suggestion corresponding to the number of points different from the number of points to be given in a predetermined game round, and to give the player an unexpectedness, An inflection can be given to the player's expectation.

  Such a configuration can also be realized by setting in advance in a production scenario and a point grant scenario.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is used and demonstrated to the component provided with the same function as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17.

  An opened window portion 18 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the production effect by lighting or blinking at the time of winning lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning the winning, or at the time of reaching. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent out from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for a player to perform an input operation for a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball launching by the game ball launching mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and the operation handle 25 Is provided with a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the first and second rotations based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  A game ball launch button 26 for operation by the player is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched to the front of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same launch intensity as when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front, and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called “right strike”. Further, in the following description, when the operation handle 25 is operated, a game ball is fired, and when the game ball flows to the left in front of the game board and flows down the left side of the game board, It may be expressed as “strike”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to release the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is disposed inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, similarly to the weight button 25b. In this way, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with the right hand.

  FIG. 82 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is composed of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided to the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30 and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. The nails 42 and the windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 includes a general winning port 32, an upper first start port 33 (hereinafter also simply referred to as a first start port 33), a lower first start port 44 (hereinafter also simply referred to as a first start port 44), A second start port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special map unit 37, a universal map unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general prize opening 32 is a ball opening through which a game ball can enter and is provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44 are entrances into which game balls can enter. The upper first start port 33 is provided at the upper center of the game board 30, and the lower first start port 44 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first start port 33 or the lower first start port 44, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described later is executed. . The lower first starting port 44 is provided with an electric accessory 44a made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 44a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower first starting port 44. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 44a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the lower first starting port 44. The electric accessory 44a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when a lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 is won.

  The second start port 34 is a entrance for allowing game balls to enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30. Therefore, the second start port 34 is provided at a position where a game ball enters when the player makes a right turn by operating the operation handle 25. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball and a winning lottery described later is executed.

  The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as an opportunity for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 44a. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical instrument release lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric utility item 44a shifts to an electric combination open state that is in an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the lower first starting port 44 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through. It is possible to enter the lower first start port 44. In this embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an open / close door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the grand prize winning opening 36a. As described above, when a game ball enters the upper first start port 33, the lower first start port 44, or the second start port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, when the big win or the small win is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable prize-winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b transitions from a closed state where a game ball cannot enter to an open state where a game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied After that, the transition is again made to the closed state. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36 a of the variable winning device 36, 15 paying balls are paid out by the payout device 71.

  An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The 1st symbol display part 37a and the 2nd symbol display part 37b are respectively comprised by the segment indicator by which the some segment light emission part was arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44. When the winning lottery is triggered by the game ball entering the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the first symbol display unit 37a corresponds to the lottery result on the segment display. As a display mode until the display is performed, the first symbol variation display or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  The 2nd symbol display part 37b is a display part for displaying a 2nd symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second start port 34. When a winning lottery is performed in response to the game ball entering the second starting port 34, the second symbol display unit 37b displays the segment display unit until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. Then, the variation display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  Here, the time from the start of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b until the stop display is displayed. It is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the first symbol variation display displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is referred to as the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the display of the variation of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is referred to as the second variation time.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display part 37c and a second hold display part 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol display part 37b.

  The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of hold of the first start port (upper first start port 33 and lower first start port 44) according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that have entered the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44 are held as a total of the two first starting ports.

  The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of hold of the second start port 34 according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second start opening 34 are held.

  The universal map unit 38 includes a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electrified object opening lottery is triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 35, the universal map unit 38 causes the light emitting display to be turned on, blinked, or displayed in a predetermined manner. . When the electrification opening lottery is completed, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. A game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special map unit 37, the universal map unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light-emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, You may be comprised by the various display apparatus which can show a lottery result and a lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  The liquid crystal display device 41 adjusts when the first symbol display unit 37a displays a variation display or a predetermined display based on the game ball entering the upper first start port 33 or the lower first start port 44. The display of the change of the symbol or the predetermined display is performed. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 41 is configured so that when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variation display or predetermined display based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, the symbol variation display or predetermined Is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variation or predetermined display of a pattern triggered by a game ball entering the upper first start port 33, the lower first start port 44, or the second start port 34. In addition, an effect display or the like during the opening / closing execution mode that shifts to the case of winning the jackpot is also performed. Details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described below.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and a display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. FIG. 83 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a first liquid crystal symbol or a second liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), on the liquid crystal display device 41, the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design by which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a symbol which is variably displayed.

  FIG. 83 (b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the drawing, a main display area MA and a sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, there are a case where an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and a case where an image of the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed. Similarly, in the sub display area SA, similarly to the main display area MA, there are a case where an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and a case where an image of the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed. When the image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the sub display area SA, and the image of the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA. In this case, the first liquid crystal design image is displayed in the sub display area SA. Which of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA is determined by the state of the game.

  In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, symbols 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. 83 (a). A variable display is performed in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L1.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) or second starting port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodic. The variable display that scrolls in a predetermined direction is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the winning lottery result by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L1. In addition, the aspect of the 1st liquid crystal design in the main display area MA and the 2nd liquid crystal design is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Various modes can be adopted.

  In the sub display area SA, three symbol rows Z4, Z5, and Z6 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6, symbols 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order as the symbols for the first liquid crystal or the second liquid crystal shown in FIG. 83 (a). A variable display is performed in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L2.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44), the symbols in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6, and the symbol row Z5, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the winning lottery result by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L2. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L2. In addition, the aspect of the 1st liquid crystal design and the 2nd liquid crystal design in sub display area SA is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, the display mode of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, such as the number of symbol rows in the sub display area SA, the number of effective lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Various modes can be adopted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on winning in the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44) is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on winning in the second start port 34 is displayed. Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved game balls won in the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44) and second start port 34 is the maximum. Up to four.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the display surface 41a blinks and lights up in synchronization with the first symbol display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special symbol unit 37. The first synchronous display section Sync1 that performs display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37 Part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, The 1-synchronization display section Sync1 is turned on. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a variable display, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 is blinking, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a stop display, the second synchronization display is performed. The part Sync2 is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub display area SA, the first synchronous display section Sync1, and the second synchronous display section Sync2. You may employ | adopt the structure which does not display some or all of these displays.

B2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured with the main control device 60 as a center, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the program recorded in the ROM 63 is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the functions of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 is supplied with power of DC stable 24V from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning port 32, a first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning a prize. Various detection sensors provided at various entrances and through gates such as the device 36 are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Further, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery based on the entrance of game balls into the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44) and second start port 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36 c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36 b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive unit that opens and closes the electric combination 44 a of the lower first start port 44. 44b, an opening / closing door driving portion 48b for opening / closing the opening / closing door 48a, and a main display portion 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuit.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed. Further, when the electrification opening is selected, as a result of the electrification opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electrification accessory driving unit 44b so that the electrification accessory 44a is opened. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the result of entering the ball. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a game ball is entered into the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the first start port (upper side) When the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44) is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, 2 When the entry of a game ball into the start port 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize ball.

  A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 performs launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. An operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14 and driving control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, an effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. Various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control apparatus 100, etc. are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. The presence / absence of reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are variably displayed are grasped. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 45, setting the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a big hit random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When distributing the jackpot type, a jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is shifted and changed.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 44a of the second start port 34 is opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first start port 33 or the lower first start port 44, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the incoming ball are The information is stored in time series in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. Stored in time series.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), Is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and when a game ball enters the second start port 34, the second holding area of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering Stored in Rb.

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the hit / failure table stored in the hit / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not a big hit is made.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), the big hit stored in the first holding area Ra The value of the random number counter C1 is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c and collated with the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it is a big hit. When a game ball enters the process and the second start port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c, The process of collating with the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 and determining whether or not it is a big hit is executed in parallel. In the following, a process for determining whether or not a big hit is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), and the second starting port 34 is performed. In parallel with the process of determining whether or not it will be a big hit triggered by the entry of the game ball to the game, the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a and the variation display of the second symbol display unit 37b A pachinko machine that can be executed in parallel is also called a simultaneous variable machine.

  In the following description, a game (also referred to as a game time) that is executed when a game ball enters the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44) is designated as the first. It may be expressed as a game time for a start opening, and a game (also referred to as a game time) executed when a game ball enters the second start opening 34 may be expressed as a game time for a second start opening.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the win lottery result is a big win, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the table. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. . In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the winning lottery result is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). Is stored in the first holding area Ra, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not the error occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not the error occurs. However, when the winning lottery result is a big hit and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, a combination of symbols for which a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot may be established is stopped. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in the state of the remaining symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 83 (b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a symbol is displayed in the symbol row Z2, and a reach is achieved. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  As another specific example, in the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 83 (b), the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z4, and then the same symbol as Z4 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z6. Thus, a reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z5 is subjected to the variable display of symbols to reach. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z5.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state that the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when the reach effect is being performed, or prior to the reach display, it is determined whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, the variation type counter CS returns to zero.

  The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and when the variation of the symbol is started by the liquid crystal display device 41. In determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 465, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e is performed. Using the value of the counter C4, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 44a to the open state. For example, if C4 = 0 to 463, the electric accessory 44a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 464 and 465, the electric accessory 44a is maintained in a closed state.

  Note that at least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb are also called holding information.

  Next, the success / failure table will be described. The success / failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when the lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 receives the first information in the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). A hit / fail table for checking with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area Ra and a check with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. Are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first start / failure table (low probability mode), a first start / fail table (high probability mode), and a second start / fail table (low probability mode). The four success / failure tables for the probability mode and the second start opening / failure table (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success / failure table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the first start / failure table. FIG. 86 (a) shows a first start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 86 (b) shows a first start port success table (high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the first start / fail table (for the low probability mode). Yes. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the four values 0 to 3 (4 to 1199) are not included. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the first start port success / failure table (for high probability mode). Has been. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values 0 to 19 are out of place. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the low probability mode hit / fail table is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the high probability mode hit / fail table. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability that the high probability mode is a big hit is higher than the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as the big win are arbitrary.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success / failure table for the second start port. FIG. 87 (a) shows a second start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 87 (b) shows a second start port success / failure table (high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the second start opening / failing table (for the low probability mode). . In addition, 1192 values of 4 to 1195 are set as values of the big hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit, and four values of 1196 to 1199 are set as values of the big hit random number counter C1 that is out of place.

  Here, the “small winning” is a trigger result for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing of the variable winning device 36 is performed, but is a result of success / failure that does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode to be described later. is there. On the other hand, “displacement” is a result of success / failure that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and does not trigger the transition for the lottery mode and the support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, in the small win, as the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device 36 having an opening period of 1.6 sec is released once.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the success / failure table for the second start port (for high probability mode). . Further, 1176 values from 20 to 1195 are set as values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit, and four values from 1196 to 1199 are set as values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is out of place.

  As described above, also in the success / failure table for the second start port, the probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode in the same manner as the success table for the first start port. ing. Further, in the success / failure table for the second start port, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a small hit is set in both the success / failure table for the low probability mode and the success / failure table for the high probability mode. 2 When a winning lottery is executed in response to a game ball having entered the starting port, the game is set to be a small hit with a predetermined probability.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing a difference in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing door 36b of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening / closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode (3) Winning lottery mode after completion of opening / closing execution mode (low probability mode or high probability mode)

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (2) opening / closing execution mode, occurrence of a game ball (winning) in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low.

  In addition to the above (1) to (3), a jackpot that accompanies execution of a specific process can also be set when winning. As will be described later, in this embodiment, a jackpot type “specific probability variation jackpot” is set. The specific probability variation jackpot is accompanied by execution of a specific process when winning. Details will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, if the winning lottery results in a big win, the big hit type is distributed using the big win type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a sorting table in the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. 88A shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 88B shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to in the winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). The distribution table for the start port is referred to in the winning lottery based on the game ball entering the second start port 34.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the distribution table for the first start opening is used to enter the game balls into the first start openings (the upper first start opening 33 and the lower first start opening 44). As the jackpot type based on, 10R probability variation jackpot, 10R specific probability variation jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

  In the 10R probability variation jackpot, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened 10 times (10 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . In addition, for the 10R probability variation jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Furthermore, the 10R probability variation jackpot is in a state of a high frequency support mode, which will be described later, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the electric accessory 44a is more likely to be opened than in the state of the low frequency support mode. In the case of 10R probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

  In the 10R specific probability variation jackpot, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened 10 times (10 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. is there. In addition, for the 10R specific probability variation big win, the lottery mode of the win lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the big win is won in the win lottery executed thereafter. Furthermore, the 10R specific probability variation jackpot is in the high-frequency support mode state after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than in the low-frequency support mode state. In the case of 10R specific probability variation jackpot, the high frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter.

  Further, as described above, the 10R specific probability variation jackpot is accompanied by execution of a specific process when winning. Details will be described later.

  In the 8R normal jackpot, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened eight times (8 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . In the 8R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. Further, the 8R normal jackpot is in the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the electric accessory 44a is more likely to be opened than in the low-frequency support mode. However, in the case of 8R normal jackpot, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is limited to 100 times, and when the total number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times. The support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 11” corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot, and “12 to 19” corresponds to the 10R specific probability variation jackpot. Correspondingly, “20 to 39” is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the sorting table for the second starting port, 2R probability variation big hit and 2R normal big hit are listed as big hit types based on the game balls entering the second starting port 34. Is set.

  In 2R probability variation jackpot, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened twice (two rounds), and the opening / closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . In addition, in the 2R probability variation jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Further, the 2R probability variation jackpot is in a state of a high frequency support mode, which will be described later, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than in the state of the low frequency support mode. In the case of 2R probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

  In 2R normal jackpot, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened twice (two rounds), and the opening / closing control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . In the 2R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the low probability mode. Further, the 2R normal jackpot is in the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than in the low-frequency support mode. However, in the case of 2R normal jackpot, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is limited to 100 times, and when the total number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times The support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 19” corresponds to the 2R probability variation jackpot, and “20 to 39” corresponds to the 2R normal jackpot It is set to be.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is a game to the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44). There is a difference between a case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the ball and a case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, and the advantage to the player is clear. There is a difference.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 after the end of the above-described (3) opening / closing execution mode, a mode in which a game ball is launched with respect to the game area PA is similar. When the comparison is made in the situation where the electric support 44a of the lower first start port 44 is compared with the high frequency support mode and the low frequency so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high. Frequency support mode can be set.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of becoming an electrification opening win in the electric accessory release lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning an electric combination opening in the electric combination opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, the time for one opening of the electric combination 44a is set longer when the electric combination release is won than in the low frequency support mode.

  Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the electrification opening is elected in the high frequency support mode and the electrified state of the electric accessory 44a occurs a plurality of times, the next after the one opened state is completed. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric actor release lottery is performed after the first electric agent release lottery than in the low-frequency support mode. May be.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a game ball will enter the lower first start port 44 than in the low frequency support mode, and the game ball enters the lower first start port 44. It becomes easy to sphere. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success / failure table (electrical accessory release lottery success / failure table) used when executing the electrical accessory release lottery.

  FIG. 89 (a) shows an electrical accessory release lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), in the electric component release lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric component release counter C4 that is elected to open the electric role. Value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 to be detached. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electrified product release lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electrified role is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the electrification release is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

  FIG. 89 (b) shows an electrical accessory release lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), in the electric component release lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric component release counter C4 that is elected to win the electric utility Value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as values of the electric accessory release counter C4 to be detached. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric component release lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric combination release win is made with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the electrification release is won in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

  As described above, the high-frequency support mode is set to have a higher probability that a game ball will enter the second start port 34 than in the low-frequency support mode, according to the electric component release lottery success / failure table. .

B3. Game flow:
Next, a general flow of gaming of the gaming machine in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of games in the gaming machine.

  When the game is started, in step F <b> 101, the player is left-handed, the game ball is caused to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and the game ball is allowed to enter the upper first start port 33. At this time, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. When a game ball enters the upper first start port 33, a first start port game is executed and a winning lottery is performed.

  When the winning lottery in the first start opening game round is out (F101: NO), the game ball is repeatedly entered into the upper first start opening 33 to execute the first start opening game round.

  In the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery executed in the first opening game game (F102: YES), when the winning jackpot type is a normal jackpot (F103: NO), the first starting game A round game is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of the game (F104). Specifically, a suggestion effect that prompts the player to make a right strike is executed. In accordance with the suggestion effect, the player performs a right turn after the end of the first start opening game round, and enters the game winning ball 36a to obtain a winning ball.

  When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode (limited to 100 game times). The suggestion effect that encourages the player to make a left strike is executed, and the player makes a left strike to cause the game ball to enter the first start opening (the upper first start opening 33 and the lower first start opening 44). The first start opening game is executed (F105).

  The high frequency support mode is continued until the game times are executed 100 times (F106: NO → F107: NO), and when the big win is won within 100 times (F106: YES), the game proceeds from step F103. .

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won within 100 game times in the high frequency support mode (F106: NO → F107: YES), the game proceeds from step F101.

  The description returns to step F103. In step F103, if the winning jackpot type of winning is a probable jackpot (F103: YES) and not a specific probable jackpot (F108: NO), after the first start opening game round A round game is executed as a privilege given to the player (F109). Specifically, a suggestion effect that prompts the player to make a right strike is executed. In accordance with the suggestion effect, the player performs a right turn after the end of the first start opening game round, and enters the game winning ball 36a to obtain a winning ball.

  When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode (until the next jackpot winning). The suggestion effect that encourages the player to make a left strike is executed, and the player makes a left strike to cause the game ball to enter the first start opening (the upper first start opening 33 and the lower first start opening 44). The first start game is executed (F110).

  The high-frequency support mode is continued until a big win is won in the win lottery (F110 → F111: NO).

  When the first start game is executed and the jackpot is won (F110 → F111: YES), the game proceeds from step F103.

  The description returns to Step F108. In step F108, when the winning jackpot type is the specific probability variation jackpot (F108: YES), a round game is executed as a privilege given to the player after the first start opening game round. (F112). Specifically, a suggestion effect that prompts the player to make a right strike is executed. In accordance with the suggestion effect, the player performs a right turn after the end of the first start opening game round, and enters the game winning ball 36a to obtain a winning ball.

  When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The suggestion effect that encourages the player to make a left strike is executed, and the player makes a left strike to cause the game ball to enter the first start opening (the upper first start opening 33 and the lower first start opening 44). The first starting game is executed (F113).

  When the first start opening game times are executed, and the winning lottery in the first start opening game times is executed (F114: YES), the start of the first start opening game times is started. Sometimes, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency port mode (F115). In a normal gaming machine, when a big win is won in the winning lottery in the first start opening game times, the high frequency support mode is changed to the low frequency port mode after the end of the first start opening game times. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency port mode at the start of the first start opening game.

  Also, at this time, at the start of the first start opening game round, a suggestion effect that prompts the player to make a right strike is executed.

  In the period in which the first start opening game is won in the winning lottery, the player makes a right turn in accordance with the suggestion effect that prompts the right turn and enters the game ball into the second start opening 34. The ball is made to play, and the second starting game is executed (F116). At this time, the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

  In the second start opening game times executed during the period in which the first start opening game times won in the winning lottery are executed (hereinafter also referred to as first start opening winning game times execution period) When winning a small hit (F117: YES), a round game of one round is executed as a privilege for the small hit (F118). The player enters a game ball into the big prize opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

  On the other hand, even if the winning game is not won in the second start opening game round (F117: NO), if the game ball enters the second start opening 34, the second start again. Mouth game times are executed.

  In the first start opening winning game times execution period, the average game time of the second start opening game times is compared with the average value of the second start opening game times in other periods. It is set to be shorter, and a plurality of second start opening game times can be executed during the first start opening winning game time execution period. In addition, as can be seen from the second start opening success / failure table (for the high probability mode) in FIG. 87 (b), when the second start opening game is executed, the winning combination is won with high probability. To do. Therefore, it is possible to execute the second start opening game times a plurality of times during the first start opening winning game time execution period, and to win a plurality of hits per bonus. Can be obtained multiple times. Hereinafter, the process of granting a privilege to the player by the small win winning by the second start opening game times during the first start opening winning game times execution period is also referred to as “special bonus processing”.

  The special bonus process is executed until the first start-up winning game times execution period ends. That is, it is executed until the first start opening game round won in the jackpot started in step F114 (F119: NO). When the first start opening game round winning the jackpot ends (F119: YES), the game proceeds from step F103. That is, the game progresses in different directions depending on whether the type of jackpot of the first start-up game times won for the jackpot is a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, or a specific probability variation jackpot. Hereinafter, the special bonus process will be described using a time chart.

  FIG. 91 is a time chart for explaining the special bonus process.

  FIG. 91 shows the time from the time T0 until the player starts playing and the special bonus process ends. The illustrated time T0 corresponds to the progress state of the game in step F101 in FIG. The player starts a game at time T0, enters a game ball into the upper first start port 33, and executes a first start port game. At this time, as shown in FIG. 91, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 83 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, an effect image (hereinafter referred to as the first image) corresponding to the first start opening game times. An effect image corresponding to the second start opening game times (hereinafter also referred to as a second start opening effect image) is displayed in the sub display area SA.

  If the 8R specific probability variation jackpot is won at the first start opening game round at time T1 (corresponding to F108: YES in FIG. 90), after the first start opening game round won at the 8R specific probability variation jackpot (time T2) A round game is executed (corresponding to F112 in FIG. 90). As an internal process by the main controller 60, an opening / closing execution mode flag indicating that a round game is to be executed is turned ON. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a round effect image triggered by the jackpot of the first start opening game times.

  At time T3, when the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned off and the round game ends, the high frequency support mode flag indicating the high frequency support mode is turned on as internal processing by the main controller 60. Further, as the internal processing by the main controller 60, a high probability mode flag indicating that the high probability mode is set is turned ON. The state at time T3 in FIG. 91 corresponds to the game progress state in step F113 in FIG.

  In the state of the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode, when the player hits the left and enters a game ball into the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44), One start opening game is executed. The first start opening game times executed at this time have a shorter average game time of the game times than in other periods.

  After that, when the first start game game that has won the jackpot at time T4 is started, the special bonus process is started. Specifically, when the first start-up game round that has won the jackpot is started, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In addition, during the first start opening winning game times execution period, the average game time of the second start opening game times is compared with the average value of the second start opening game times. Is set to be shorter. In addition, a suggestion effect that encourages the player to make a right strike is executed. The process at time T4 in FIG. 91 corresponds to step F114 and step F115 in FIG. Further, as shown in the column of the liquid crystal display device in FIG. 91, when the special bonus process is started, the second start opening effect image is displayed in the main display area MA, and the first start opening display is displayed in the sub display area SA. An effect image is displayed.

  When the player hits the right and enters a game ball into the second start port 34 to execute the second start port game times and wins a small hit, each of the second start port game times won by the small hit One round game is executed after the end, and as an internal process in the main controller 60, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON after the end of the second start opening game round, and OFF after the round game ends. It becomes.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 91, the first start opening game round is being executed, but during the period when the round game is being executed along with the second start opening game round, the main controller 60 As the internal processing, the measurement of the game time of the first start game time is interrupted. The period during which the game time measurement of the first start opening game times is interrupted is indicated by hatching in the chart showing the first start opening game times in FIG. As shown in the figure, during the first start opening winning game number execution period, when the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON with the second start opening game number small hit, Execution time measurement is interrupted.

  Then, when the game time of the first start opening game times measured by the internal processing has passed a predetermined time, the first start opening game times are ended at time T5, and the special bonus processing is performed. finish.

  When the game time of the first start opening game time exceeds a predetermined time, a round game corresponding to the first start opening game time is executed in the period from time T5 to time T6. Then, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on at time T5 and turned off at time T6.

  In addition, after time T5, the game time set as the second start opening game times is set to a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes. Therefore, even if the player makes a right turn and executes the second start opening game round and wins a small hit, the game time is very long, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing in this way, the action of the player who does not follow the legitimate game flow of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a special bonus process, which is a process for giving a privilege during the execution of the first start opening game round winning the jackpot. On the other hand, in addition to giving a sense of expectation for a round game (opening / closing execution mode) as a privilege given after the end of the game round winning the jackpot, the execution of the game round winning the jackpot A sense of expectation can be given to the inside.

  In addition, during the period when the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus is triggered by the fact that the second start opening game times are won during the execution of the first start opening game times. As a bonus (1R round game) will be granted, even if a big win is won in the first start opening game round, the second start opening game round is executed and the small hit It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation by letting them win.

  Furthermore, after the first start opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, the round game is executed in response to the big win in the first start opening game round. Can be granted to a person.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment switches the support mode from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the first start opening game time in which the special bonus processing is executed, so that the special bonus processing is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that the second start opening game times can be executed in the special bonus processing is based on the game time of the first start opening game times corresponding to the period of the special bonus processing. In other words, after winning the specific probability variation jackpot, the upper limit of the privilege to be given to the player by the special bonus process can be controlled by controlling the game time of the game times to be won next.

  Note that if the jackpot type at time T1 shown in FIG. 90 is a specific probability variation jackpot, it is specially triggered by the start of the first start opening game round of the jackpot winning at time T1 regardless of the jackpot type at time T4. Bonus processing is started.

B4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In step S20101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (entrance detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step S20102.

  In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20103.

  In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20104. Note that the variation type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 94) described later.

  In step S20104, the entrance processing for the start port accompanying the entrance of the game ball into the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44) and second start port 34 is executed. Details of the starting ball entry processing in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Pick-up processing for starter>
Next, the ball entering process for the start port will be described. The starting ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 92: S20104).

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a start port. In step S20201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (start winning prize) is determined based on the first starting port (upper first starting port). 33, based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the lower first starting port 44). If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202 and payout control is performed. A prize ball command for causing the device 70 to pay out three game balls is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20203.

  In step S20203, an external signal is used to output a signal to the management controller on the game hall side that a game ball has entered the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44). Perform the setting process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20204.

  In step S20204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) that is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first start reservation number RaN indicates the number of reservations based on the ball entering the first start port (upper first start port 33, lower first start port 44). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20209.

  If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205. Whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 34 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second start port 34.

  If it is determined in step S20205 that a game ball has entered the second start port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has not entered the second start port 34 (S20205: NO), the start processing for the start port is terminated.

  In step S20207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that a game ball has entered the second start port 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20208.

  In step S20208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second starting reserved number RbN indicates the reserved number based on the ball entering the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20209.

  In step S20209, it is determined whether the number N of start suspensions (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S20209, when the number N of starting suspension is not less than the upper limit value (S20209: NO), the ball entry processing for the starting port is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S20209, when the number N of starting suspension is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210. 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved number CRN). The total reserved number CRN indicates the total value of the first start reserved number RaN and the second start reserved number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20212.

  In step S20212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) are used as the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reserved area, that is, step In step S20210, the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92). The value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. When the second start hold number RbN is set as a processing target, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) are The first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reserved area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reserved number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. After executing Step S20212, the process proceeds to Step S20213.

  In step S20213, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which the determination of the presence or absence or the like is executed before the hold information is subject to a lottery by the main control device 60. After executing Step S20213, the process proceeds to Step S20214.

  In step S20214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (destination determination information) of the destination determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a holding command. To do.

  The hold command indicates that a ball has entered the first start port (the upper first start port 33, the lower first start port 44) or the second start port 34, and the hold information acquired based on the received ball This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the determination result (predetermined determination information) based on the above before the hold information becomes a winning lottery target by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 94: step S20302) of a normal process described later.

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44), the liquid crystal display A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 41 in response to the increase in the number of hold is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second start port 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 as the number of hold. A command for changing in accordance with the increase is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the start port.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20301, a startup process is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20302.

  In step S20302, output data such as a command set in the timer interruption process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step S20302, the process proceeds to Step S20303.

  In step S20303, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20304.

  In step S20304, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20305. In step S20305, a game times control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, winning lottery, setting of symbol variation display by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing Step S20305, the process proceeds to Step S20306.

  In step S20306, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20307.

  In step S20307, a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the motor combination 44a provided at the right first start port 44 is executed. In the electric combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 44a is opened. The details of the power combination support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20308.

  In step S20308, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (after the second round, the start of the command output process in step S20302). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached.

  If it is determined in step S20308 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S20308: NO), the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in steps S20309 and S20310. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time. Specifically, in step S20309, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S20310, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20308 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S20308: YES), the process returns to step S20302, and the processes from step S20302 to step S20307 are performed. Run.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S20302 to step S20307 changes according to the game state, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 94: S20305).

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S20401, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing when the symbol variation in the winning game is finished and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and is turned OFF at the timing when the opening / closing execution mode ends. By determining whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S20401, the following two functions are realized. As a first function, by preventing step S20403 (and step S20406) from being executed during the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, game times are not started during the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. can do. Further, as a second function, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed during the execution of the game times, the opening / closing execution mode is executed by not performing step S20404 (and step S20407) described later. It is possible to interrupt the measurement of the variation time of the game times being executed during a certain period. Details will be described below.

  If it is determined in step S20401 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S20401: YES), it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect, and the game is not executed without executing any processing after step S20402. The control process ends. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44) or the second start port 34 has occurred. Regardless of whether or not the game times will not be started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20401 that the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress (S20401: NO), the process proceeds to step S20402.

  In step S20402, it is determined whether or not the first game execution flag is ON. The first game execution flag is a flag that is turned ON when the first start opening game turn is started and turned OFF when the first start opening game turn is ended. If it is determined in step S20402 that the first game execution flag is not ON (S20402: NO), the process proceeds to step S20403.

  In step S20403, the fluctuation start process for the first start port is executed. The variation start process for the first start opening is a process for starting the first start opening game. Details of the fluctuation start process for the first start port will be described later. After executing step S20403, the process proceeds to step S20405.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20402 that the first game execution flag is ON (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20404.

  In step S20404, a first fluctuation stop process is executed. The first variation stop process is a process for stopping the variation of the symbol of the first start opening game times. Details of the first variation stop process will be described later. After executing step S20404, the process proceeds to step S20405.

  In step S20405, it is determined whether the second game execution flag is ON. The second game execution flag is a flag that is turned ON when the second start opening game turn is started and turned OFF when the second start opening game turn is ended. If it is determined in step S20405 that the second game execution flag is not ON (S20405: NO), the process proceeds to step S20406.

  In step S20406, the fluctuation start process for the second start port is executed. The variation start process for the second start opening is a process for starting the second start opening game. Details of the variation start process for the second start port will be described later. After executing Step S20406, the game times control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20405 that the second game execution flag is ON (S20405: YES), the process proceeds to step S20407.

  In step S20407, a second variation stop process is executed. The second variation stop process is a process for stopping the variation of the symbol of the second start opening game times. Details of the second variation stop process will be described later. After executing Step S20407, the game times control process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the first start port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the first start port will be described. The variation start process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 95: S20403).

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the first start port. In step S20501, it is determined whether or not the first start hold number RaN = 0. If it is determined in step S20501 that the first start hold number RaN = 0 is not satisfied (S20501: NO), the process proceeds to step S20502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20501 that the first start hold number RaN = 0 (S20501: YES), the variation start process for the first start port is terminated.

  In step S20502, a first start port hold information shift process is executed. In the first start port hold information shift process, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is shifted. Details of the first start opening hold information shifting process will be described later. After executing step S20502, the process proceeds to step S20503.

  In step S20503, determination processing for the first start port is executed. In the determination process for the first start port, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, whether or not to determine whether or not there is a jackpot or a small hit based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and sorts the jackpot type Distribution determination and reach determination for determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the first start port will be described later. After executing Step S20503, the process proceeds to Step S20504.

  In step S20504, the process for setting the variation time for the first start port is executed. In the setting process of the variation time for the first start port, a variation time that is a time from the start of the symbol to the stop is set. Details of the process for setting the variation time for the first start port will be described later. After executing Step S20504, the process proceeds to Step S20505.

  In step S20505, a first variation command is set. The first variation command relates to special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44). In addition to the information indicating that it is, information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step S20504 are included. After executing Step S20505, the process proceeds to Step S20506.

  In step S20506, a first type command is set. The first type command includes information on presence / absence of jackpot and jackpot type information. Specifically, the first type command includes 10R probability change jackpot information, 10R specific probability change jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or out-of-band information.

  The change command and the first type command set in steps S20505 and S20506 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). Based on the received change command and the first type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect in the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing Step S20506, the process proceeds to Step S20507.

  In step S20507, the variable display on the first symbol display unit 37a is started, the process proceeds to step S20508, and the first game execution flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20509, and the first changing flag is turned ON.

  The first game execution flag is set to ON when the first start opening game turn is started, and the variable display in the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped and the symbol display is stopped. This flag is turned OFF when the first symbol display stop time has ended. On the other hand, the first changing flag is a flag that is turned on when the first start opening game turn is started and turned off when the changing display in the first symbol display section 37a is stopped. .

  After executing step S20509, the process proceeds to step S20510.

  In step S20510, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is set to a value in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the game number is executed. After executing step S20510, the fluctuation start process for the first start port is terminated.

<Holding information shift process for the first start port>
Next, the hold information shift process for the first start port will be described. The first start port hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the first start port change start process (FIG. 96: S20502).

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the first start port hold information shifting process. In step S20601, 1 is subtracted from the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20602.

  In step S20602, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20603.

  In step S20603, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing step S20603, the hold information shift process is terminated.

<Determination process for the first start port>
Next, the determination process for the first start port will be described. The determination process for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the change start process for the first start port (FIG. 96: S20503).

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first start port. In step S20701, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high probability mode flag is turned on when the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the probable big hit is completed. It is turned OFF at the start of the opening / closing execution mode related to the next jackpot winning. If it is determined in step S20701 that the mode is the high probability mode (S20701: YES), the process proceeds to step S20702.

  In step S 20702, whether or not to win is determined with reference to the first start / fail opening table (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the first start port success / failure table (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 86 (b). It is determined whether or not it matches a certain value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20701 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S20701: NO), the process proceeds to step S20703.

  In step S20703, whether or not to make a decision is made by referring to the first start / failure table (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the first start opening success / failure table (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 86 (a). It is determined whether or not it matches a certain value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20704.

  In step S20704, it is determined whether the determination result in step S20702 or step S20703 is a big hit. If it is determined in step S20704 that the result of the determination is a big hit (S20704: YES), the process proceeds to step S20705.

  In step S20705, it is determined whether or not the probability change for the second start port or the normal jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S20705 that the probability change for the second start port or the normal jackpot flag is ON (S20705: YES), the process proceeds to step S20722, and the stop indicating the lottery result of the first start port game times is displayed. Set the symbol as a stop symbol for removal. Thereafter, the determination process for the first start port is terminated. That is, at the start of the variation of the first start opening game times, if the second start opening game number is being executed, the opening / closing execution mode of the stop pattern of the first start opening game times is not executed. Set to a combination of symbols.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20705 that the probability change for the second start port or the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S20705: NO), the process proceeds to step S20706, and whether or not the specific process flag is ON is determined. judge. The specific processing flag is set to ON when a specific probability variation jackpot is won in the game times executed before the game time for the first start opening that is the determination target, and the specific probability variation jackpot is determined. This flag is turned OFF when the special bonus process is executed. If it is determined in step S20706 that the specific process flag is ON (S20706: YES), the process proceeds to step S20707.

  In step S20707, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. That is, a process corresponding to the special bonus process is executed. After executing Step S20707, the process proceeds to Step S20708.

  In step S20708, a special bonus start command is set. The special bonus start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the special bonus process is started. The command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (S20302) of the normal process (FIG. 94). After executing step S20708, the process proceeds to step S20709.

  In step S20709, the specific process flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20710.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20706 that the specific process flag is not ON (S20706: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S20710.

  In step S20710, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 88 (a)). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical value range contains the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. After executing Step S20710, the process proceeds to Step S20711.

  In step S20711, it is determined whether or not the result of the allocation determination in step S20710 (a jackpot type) is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S20711 that the distributed jackpot type is a probable jackpot (S20711: YES), the process proceeds to step S20712.

  In step S20712, the probability variation big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S20711 is turned ON. After executing Step S20712, the process proceeds to Step S20713.

  In step S20713, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot is a specific probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S20713 that the probability variation jackpot is a specific probability variation jackpot (step S20713: YES), the process proceeds to step S20714.

  In step S20714, the specific probability variation jackpot flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20715, and a specific probability variable jackpot command is set. The specific probability variation jackpot command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the specific probability variation jackpot has been won in the first start opening game round to be determined. The command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (S20302) of the normal process (FIG. 94). After executing Step S20715, the process proceeds to Step S20716.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20713 that the probability variation jackpot is not the specific probability variation jackpot (step S20713: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S20716.

  In step S20716, a probabilistic big hit stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game round that is a probability variation jackpot, it is set in the first symbol display section 37a which stop result is displayed and the variation display is terminated (stop display). Execute the process for Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, Address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S20716, the determination process for the first start port is ended.

  If it is determined in step S20711 that the assigned jackpot type is not a probable change jackpot (S20711: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S20717.

  In step S20717, the normal jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S20711 is turned ON. After executing Step S20717, the process proceeds to Step S20718.

  In step S20718, a normal jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the normal jackpot stop symbol setting process, in the current game round, which is a normal jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a is set to which stop result is displayed and the variable display is ended (stop display). Execute the process for Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. Address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20718, the determination process for the first start port is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S20704 that the result of the determination in step S20702 or step S20703 is not a big win (S20704: NO), the process proceeds to step S20719, and the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is reached. With reference to the determination table, reach determination is made as to whether or not reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as the reach occurrence in the referenced reach determination table. The process of step S20719 is executed when the result of the determination as to whether or not (winning lottery) in step S20704 is not a big win. That is, in step S20719, it is determined whether or not the game times in which reach is generated among the game times in which the result of the determination is not a big hit. After executing Step S20719, the process proceeds to Step S20720.

  In step S20720, it is determined whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S20719 is the occurrence of reach. If it is determined in step S20720 that a reach has occurred (S20720: YES), the process proceeds to step S20721, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing Step S20721, the process proceeds to Step S20722.

  In step S20722, a stop symbol setting process for removal is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for detachment, in this game game that becomes detachment, in order to set which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a, the variable display is ended (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20722, the determination process for the first start port is terminated.

<Variation time setting process for the first start port>
Next, the variation time setting process for the first start port will be described. The process for setting the variation time for the first start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for the variation start process for the first start port (FIG. 96: S20504).

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variation time for the first start port. In step S20801, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20802.

  In step S20802, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination as to whether or not the current game is successful is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON. If any flag is ON (S20802: YES), the process proceeds to step S20803.

  In step S20803, referring to the jackpot variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S20803, the process proceeds to step S20807, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time for the first start port is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S20802 that the determination result of the current game round is not a big hit (S20802: NO), the process proceeds to step S20804, and the reach determination result related to the current game round is reach occurrence. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag is ON. If it is determined that the reach generation flag is ON (S20804: YES), the process proceeds to step S20805.

  In step S20805, referring to the reach occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S20805, the process proceeds to step S20807, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time for the first start port is terminated.

  In step S20804, if it is determined that the reach determination result relating to the current game round is not a reach occurrence (S20804: NO), the process proceeds to step S20806, and the reach non-occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is not generated. The fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for use. After executing step S20806, the process proceeds to step S20807, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time for the first start port is terminated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN is larger. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of the first start hold number RaN may be used, and the variation time is set shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN is smaller. May be.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variation time that is easy to select and the variation time that is difficult to select at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach reach may be different Good. In addition, a variation time table for probability variation jackpot and a variation time table for normal jackpot may be set individually.

<First change stop processing>
Next, the first variation stop process will be described. The first variation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 95: S20404).

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop process. In step S20901, it is determined whether the first changing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S20901 that the first changing flag is ON (S20901: YES), the process proceeds to step S20902.

  In step S20902, a first variation time measurement process is executed. Specifically, the first variation time counter PTC1 for measuring the variation time of the first start game time (the variation time of the first symbol display unit) is counted down. In this process, the value of the first variation time counter PTC1 is down-counted every time the thread of step S20902 is passed. That is, the value of the first variation time counter PTC1 is down-counted only when it passes through the thread of step S20902. After executing step S20902, the process proceeds to step S20903.

  In step S20903, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display unit has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first variation time counter PTC1 that is down-counted by the process of step S20902 has become zero. If it is determined in step S20903 that the variation time of the first symbol display unit has ended (S20903: YES), the process proceeds to step S20904, and the variation of the first symbol display unit is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20905.

  In step S20905, the first changing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20906.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20903 that the variation time of the first symbol display unit has not ended (S20903: NO), the first variation stop process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S20901 that the first changing flag is not ON (S20901: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S20906.

  In step S20906, a first symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The first symbol stop display time is the time during which the first symbol is stopped. In step S20906, the first symbol stop display time is set. However, when the first symbol stop display time is already set, the setting is not performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol stop display time of all the first start opening game times is set to the same length of time. After step S20906 is executed, step S20907 is executed.

  In step S20907, the first symbol stop display time measurement process is executed. Specifically, the counter for counting the first symbol stop display time is counted down. In this process, every time the thread of step S20907 is passed, the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time is counted down. After executing Step S20907, the process proceeds to Step S20908.

  In step S20908, it is determined whether the first symbol stop display time has expired. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time has become zero. In step S20908. If it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has ended (S20908: YES), the process proceeds to step S20909. On the other hand, in step S20908. If it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has not ended (S20908: NO), the first variation stop process is ended as it is.

  In step S20909, the first game execution flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20910.

  In step S20910, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag (big hit flag corresponding to each big hit type) or the small hit flag is ON. When it is determined in step S20910 that the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (S20910: YES), the process proceeds to step S20911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20910 that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (S20910: NO), the first variation stop process is terminated as it is.

  In step S20911, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20912, and after setting the opening / closing execution mode start command, the first variation stop process is terminated.

<Variation start processing for the second start port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the second start port will be described. The variation start process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 95: S20406).

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the second start port. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the second start hold number RbN = 0. If it is determined in step S21001 that the second start hold number RbN = 0 is not satisfied (S21001: NO), the process proceeds to step S21002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21001 that the second start hold number RbN = 0 (S21001: YES), the variation start process for the second start port is terminated.

  In step S21002, a second start port hold information shift process is executed. In the second start port hold information shift process, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is shifted. Details of the hold information shift process for the second start port will be described later. After executing Step S21002, the process proceeds to Step S21003.

  In step S21003, a determination process for the second start port is executed. In the determination process for the second start port, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, whether or not to determine whether or not there is a jackpot or a small hit based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and sorts the jackpot type Distribution determination and reach determination for determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the second start port will be described later. After executing Step S21003, the process proceeds to Step S21004.

  In step S21004, the process for setting the variation time for the second start port is executed. In the setting process of the variation time for the second start port, a variation time that is a time from the start of the symbol to the stop is set. Details of the process for setting the variation time for the second start port will be described later. After executing Step S21004, the process proceeds to Step S21005.

  In step S21005, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time relates to special information acquired based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, and reach. Information on presence / absence of occurrence and information on the variation time set in step S21004 are included. After executing Step S21005, the process proceeds to Step S21006.

  In step S21006, a second type command is set. The second type command includes information on presence / absence of jackpot and information on jackpot type. Specifically, the second type command includes information on 2R probability variation jackpot information, information on 2R normal jackpots, information on jackpots, or information on loss.

  The variation command and the second type command set in step S21005 and step S21006 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). Based on the received change command and the second type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect at the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing step S21006, the process proceeds to step S21007.

  In step S21007, the variable display on the second symbol display unit 37b is started, and the process proceeds to step S21008, where the second game execution flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21009, and the second changing flag is turned ON.

  The second game execution flag is set to ON when the second start opening game turn is started, and the variable display in the second symbol display section 37b is stopped and the symbol display is stopped. This flag is turned OFF when the second symbol display stop time has ended. On the other hand, the second variation flag is a flag that is turned on when the second start opening game turn is started and turned off when the variation display in the second symbol display section 37b is stopped. .

  After executing Step S21009, the process proceeds to Step S21010.

  In step S21010, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is set to a value in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the game number is executed. After executing step S21010, the variation start process for the second start port is terminated.

<Holding information shift process for the second start port>
Next, the hold information shift process for the second start port will be described. The hold information shift process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for the change start process for the second start port (FIG. 101: S21002).

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process for the second start port. In step S21101, 1 is subtracted from the second start reserved number RbN of the second reserved area Rb. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21102.

  In step S21102, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21103.

  In step S21103, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing step S21103, the hold information shifting process is terminated.

<Decision processing for second start port>
Next, the determination process for the second start port will be described. The determination process for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the change start process for the second start port (FIG. 101: S21003).

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the second start port. In step S22101, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high probability mode flag is turned on when the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the probable big hit is completed. Normally, it is turned OFF at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the big win. If it is determined in step S2211 that the mode is the high probability mode (S21201: YES), the process proceeds to step S22102.

  In step S21202, whether or not it is determined is determined with reference to the second start opening determination table (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the second start opening success / failure table (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 87 (b). It is determined whether or not it matches a certain value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2211 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S21201: NO), the process proceeds to step S2203.

  In step S2203, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the second start port (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the second start port success / failure table (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 87 (a). It is determined whether or not it matches a certain value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21204.

  In step S21204, it is determined whether the determination result in step S21202 or step S2203 is a big hit. If it is determined in step S21204 that the result of the determination is a big hit (S21204: YES), the process proceeds to step S21205.

  In step S21205, it is determined whether or not the probability change for the first start port or the normal jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21205 that the probability change for the first start opening or the normal jackpot flag is ON (S21205: YES), the process proceeds to step S21218, and the stop indicating the lottery result of the second start opening game times is displayed. Set the symbol as a stop symbol for removal. Thereafter, the determination process for the second start port is terminated. That is, when the first start opening game times are being executed at the start of the variation of the second start opening game times, the opening / closing execution mode of the stop pattern of the second start opening game times is not executed. Set to a combination of symbols.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21205 that the first start opening probability change or the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S21205: NO), the process proceeds to step S21206.

  In step S21206, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 88B). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical value range contains the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. After executing Step S21206, the process proceeds to Step S21207.

  In step S21207, it is determined whether or not the result of the allocation determination in step S21206 (a jackpot type) is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S21207 that the assigned jackpot type is a probable jackpot (S21207: YES), the process proceeds to step S21208.

  In step S21208, the probability variation big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S21206 is turned ON. After executing Step S21208, the process proceeds to Step S21209.

  In step S21209, a probabilistic big hit stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game round that is a probability variation jackpot, the second symbol display unit 37b is set to which stop result is displayed and the variation display is terminated (stop display). Execute the process for Specifically, by referring to the probability variation jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is acquired, and Address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21209, the determination process for the second start port is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21207 that the assigned jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (S21207: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S21210.

  In step S21210, the normal jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S21206 is turned ON. After executing step S21210, the process proceeds to step S21211.

  In step S21211, a normal jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for normal jackpot, it is set in the second symbol display section 37b which one of the stop results is displayed in the state where the variation display is to be ended (stop display) in the current game round that is a normal jackpot. Execute the process for Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. Address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S21211, the determination process for the second start port is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21204 that the result of the determination in step S21202 or step S2203 is not a big hit (S21204: NO), the process proceeds to step S21212.

  In step S21212, it is determined whether the determination result in step S21202 or step S2203 is a small hit. If it is determined in step S21212 that the result of the determination is a small hit (S21212: YES), the process proceeds to step S21213.

  In step S21213, the small hit flag is turned ON. After executing step S21213, the process proceeds to step S21214.

  In step S21214, a stop symbol setting process for small hits is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for small hits, in the current game round that is a small hit, it is set in the second symbol display section 37b which stop result is displayed and the variable display is ended (stop display). Execute the process for Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the small hit is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the small hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, and the address information is stored in the RAM 64. Store in the stop result address storage area. After executing step S21214, the determination process for the second start port is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21212 that the result of the determination is not a small hit (S21212: NO), the process proceeds to step S21215.

  In step S21215, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referred to determine whether or not a reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as the reach occurrence in the referenced reach determination table. The process of step S21215 is executed when the result of the determination of success (winning lottery) in step S21204 is not a big win. In other words, in step S21215, it is determined whether or not the game times in which reach is generated among the game times in which the result of the determination is not a big hit. After executing Step S21215, the process proceeds to Step S21216.

  In step S21216, it is determined whether or not the reach determination result in step S21215 is reach occurrence. If it is determined in step S21216 that a reach has occurred (S21216: YES), the process proceeds to step S21217, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing Step S21217, the process proceeds to Step S21218.

  In step S21218, a stop symbol setting process for removal is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for detachment, in the current game round that is losing, the second symbol display part 37b is set to indicate which stop result is displayed and the variable display is to be ended (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S21218, the determination process for the second start port is ended.

<Variation time setting process for second start port>
Next, the process for setting the variation time for the second start port will be described. The process for setting the variation time for the second start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for the variation start process for the second start port (FIG. 101: S21004).

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the variation time for the second start port. In step S23101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step S21302.

  In step S21302, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21302 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (S21302: NO), the process proceeds to step S21303.

  In step S21303, low-accuracy time variation time information acquisition processing is executed. The low-accuracy time variation time information acquisition processing is processing for acquiring variation time information of the second start opening game times when the second start opening game times are executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. . Specifically, when the game start state of step F101 in FIG. 90 and the game progress state of step F105 are executed when the second start port game turn is executed, the second start port This is a process of acquiring variable time information of game times. Details of the low-accuracy time variation information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing Step S21303, the process proceeds to Step S21307.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21302 that the high probability mode flag is ON (S21302: YES), the process proceeds to step S21304.

  In step S21304, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21304 that the frequent support mode flag is ON (S21304: YES), the process proceeds to step S21305.

  In step S21305, high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. When the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is performed for the second start-up game. This is a process for acquiring game time variation time information. Specifically, when the game start state of step F110 in FIG. 90 and the game progress state of step F113 are executed when the second start opening game round is executed. This is a process of acquiring variable time information of game times. Details of the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing Step S21305, the process proceeds to Step S21307.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21304 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (S21304: NO), the process proceeds to step S21306.

  In step S21306, highly accurate low frequency time varying time information acquisition processing is executed. When the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the second start opening game time acquisition process is performed when the second start opening game time is executed. This is a process for acquiring game time variation time information. Specifically, in the process of acquiring the variation time information of the second start opening game times when the second start opening game times are executed in the game progress state of step F116 in FIG. is there. Details of the highly accurate low frequency time varying time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing Step S21306, the process proceeds to Step S21307.

  In step S21307, the variable time information acquired by the processes in steps S21303, S21305, and S21306 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time for the second start port is terminated.

<Low-accuracy time variation information acquisition processing>
Next, the low-accuracy time varying time information acquisition process will be described. The low-accuracy time variation time information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S2303) of the variation time setting processing for the second start port.

  As described above, the low-accuracy time varying time information acquisition process is executed by the second start-up game times when the game is progressing in step F101 in FIG. 90 and when the game is progressing in step F105. In the case where it is performed, this is a process of acquiring the variation time information of the second start opening game times. In other words, a period in which the first start opening game round should be executed by making a left-hand strike and letting a game ball enter the first start opening (upper first start opening 33, lower first start opening 44). The game is executed when the player makes a right turn and enters a game ball into the second start opening 34 to execute a second start opening game turn. The player performs the second start opening game turn. Since there is a possibility that an act to get a privilege during a period that should not be obtained by winning a small win is performed, it is acquired in the low-accuracy time variation information acquisition process to prevent the act The variation time information (variation time) is set to a relatively long time. Hereinafter, the low-accuracy time varying time information acquisition process will be described.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the low-accuracy time varying time information acquisition processing. In step S21401, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination as to whether or not the current game is successful is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON. If any flag is ON (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21402.

  In step S21402, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the variation time table for low probability big hit stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the variation time set in the low probability big hit variation time table is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the variation time is 7 minutes. After executing step S21402, the low-accuracy time variation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21401 that the determination result of the current game round is not a big hit (step S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21403.

  In step S21403, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. If it is determined in step S21403 that a reach will occur in the current game round (step S21403: YES), the process proceeds to step S21404.

  In step S21404, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for low probability reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for low probability reach occurrence is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the variation time is 7 minutes. After executing step S21404, the low-accuracy time variation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21403 that no reach occurs in the current game round (step S21403: NO), the process proceeds to step S21405.

  In step S21405, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for low probability reach non-occurrence stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time table for non-reliable time non-occurrence occurrence is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value obtained as the fluctuation time is 7 minutes. . After executing step S21405, the low-accuracy time variation time information acquisition processing is terminated.

  Thus, the variation time information acquired in the low-accuracy time variation time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time.

<Accurate high frequency variable time information acquisition processing>
Next, the highly accurate high frequency time varying time information acquisition process will be described. The high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21305) for setting the fluctuation time for the second start port.

  As described above, the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is performed when the game progress state in step F110 and the game progress state in step F113 in FIG. 90. Is executed, the variable time information of the second start opening game times is acquired. In other words, a period in which the first start opening game round should be executed by making a left-hand strike and letting a game ball enter the first start opening (upper first start opening 33, lower first start opening 44). The game is executed when the player makes a right turn and enters a game ball into the second start opening 34 to execute a second start opening game turn. The player performs the second start opening game turn. Acquired in high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuating time information acquisition processing to prevent such an action, because there is a possibility that an action to get a privilege during a period that should not be obtained by winning a small win The variable time information (variable time) to be set is set to a relatively long time. In addition, the average value of the fluctuation time acquired in the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a value shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time acquired in the low-accuracy time fluctuation time information acquisition process. This is because the period in which the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed is more advantageous to the player when compared with the period in which the low-accuracy variable time information acquisition process is executed. The reason is that the unfairness of the act in which the player executes the second start opening game round and gains a profit by winning a small hit is not so much as in the case of the time variation information acquisition process. Hereinafter, this highly accurate high frequency variation time information acquisition process will be described.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing highly accurate high frequency time varying time information acquisition processing. In step S21501, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON. If any flag is ON (S21501: YES), the process proceeds to step S21502.

  In step S21502, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the high-accuracy high-frequency jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the variation time set in the high-accuracy high-frequency jackpot variation time table is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. . After executing step S21502, the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21501 that the result of the determination of whether or not the current game is successful is not a big hit (step S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21503.

  In step S21503, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. If it is determined in step S21503 that a reach will occur in the current game round (step S21503: YES), the process proceeds to step S21504.

  In step S21504, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for high-accuracy and high-frequency reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. . In this embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for high-accuracy high frequency reach occurrence is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. is there. After executing step S21504, the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21503 that no reach will occur in the current game round (step S21503: NO), the process proceeds to step S21505.

  In step S21505, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for non-occurrence occurrence with high probability stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. To do. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the high-accuracy high-frequency reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value obtained as the fluctuation time is 3 minutes. It is. After executing step S21505, the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  Thus, the variable time information acquired in the high-accuracy high-frequency variable time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time, but the variable time acquired in the high-precision high-frequency variable time information acquisition process The average value is set to a value shorter than the average value of the variation time acquired in the low-accuracy time variation information acquisition process.

<Accuracy and low frequency variable time information acquisition processing>
Next, the highly accurate low frequency variation time information acquisition process will be described. The highly accurate low frequency variation time information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21306) of variation time setting processing for the second start port.

  As described above, the highly probable low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is performed when the second start opening game times are executed in the game progress state of step F116 in FIG. This is a process of acquiring variable time information of game times. In other words, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, the process is executed when the player makes a right turn and enters a game ball into the second start opening 34 to execute the second start opening game round. The process is in line with the original game flow. The variable time information (variable time) acquired in the highly accurate low frequency variable time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Hereinafter, this highly accurate low frequency variation time information acquisition process will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing high-accuracy low frequency variation time information acquisition processing. In step S21601, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the current game round is a small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (S21601: YES), the process proceeds to step S21602. Note that during the period of the special bonus process in which the high-accuracy low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed, at the start of the fluctuation of the second start opening game times, the first start opening game times are being executed. Therefore, the symbols of the game times for the second opening are stopped and displayed in combinations of symbols in which the opening / closing execution mode is not executed (see FIG. 103 / S21205: NO). Therefore, unlike the processes of FIGS. 104 and 105, the second start opening game times will not win a big hit during the special bonus process in which the high-accuracy low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed. There is no processing for determining whether or not the jackpot is won.

  In step S21602, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the high-precision low frequency hourly hit fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. . In this embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the high-precision low-frequency hourly fluctuation time table is a value between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, and the average value obtained as the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. is there. After executing step S21502, the high-accuracy / low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21601 that the result of the determination as to whether or not the current game is successful is not a small hit (step S21601: NO), the process proceeds to step S21603.

  In step S21603, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the high-precision low-frequency non-small hit fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. To do. In the present embodiment, the variation time set in the high probability low frequency non-small hit variation time table is a value between 1 second and 3 seconds, and the average value obtained as the variation time is 2 seconds. It is. After executing step S21603, the high-accuracy / low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  As described above, the fluctuation time information (fluctuation time) acquired in the high-precision low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Therefore, a plurality of second start opening game times can be executed during the execution period of the special bonus process, that is, during the period in which the first start opening game time is won. As a result, the player can acquire a privilege during the execution of the first start opening game round by winning multiple hits.

<Second variation stop processing>
Next, the second variation stop process will be described. The second variation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 95: S20407).

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the second variation stop process. In step S21701, it is determined whether the second changing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21701 that the second changing flag is ON (S21701: YES), the process proceeds to step S21702.

  In step S21702, a second variation time measurement process is executed. Specifically, the second variation time counter PTC2 for measuring the variation time of the second start opening game times (the variation time of the second symbol display unit) is counted down. In this process, the value of the second variation time counter PTC2 is down-counted every time the thread of step S21702 is passed. That is, instead of continuously down-counting after passing through the thread of step S21702, the value of the second variation time counter PTC2 is down-counted only when passing through the thread. After executing step S21702, the process proceeds to step S21703.

  In step S21703, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display unit has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second variation time counter PTC2 that is down-counted by the process of step S21702 has become zero. If it is determined in step S21703 that the variation time of the second symbol display unit has ended (S21703: YES), the process proceeds to step S21704, and the variation of the second symbol display unit is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21705.

  In step S21705, the second changing flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21706.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21703 that the variation time of the second symbol display unit has not ended (S21703: NO), the second variation stop process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S21701 that the second changing flag is not ON (S21701: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21706.

  In step S21706, a second symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The second symbol stop display time is the time during which the second symbol is stopped. In step S21706, the second symbol stop display time is set. However, when the second symbol stop display time is already set, the setting is not performed. In the present embodiment, the second symbol stop display time of all second start opening game times is set to the same length of time. After step S21706 is executed, step S21707 is executed.

  In step S21707, the second symbol stop display time measurement process is executed. Specifically, the counter for counting the second symbol stop display time is counted down. This process counts down the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time every time it passes through the thread of step S21707. After executing step S21707, the process proceeds to step S21708.

  In step S21708, it is determined whether the second symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time has become zero. In step S21708. If it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has ended (S21708: YES), the process proceeds to step S21709. On the other hand, in step S21708. If it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has not ended (S21708: NO), the second variation stop process is ended as it is.

  In step S21709, the second game execution flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21710.

  In step S21710, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag (big hit flag corresponding to each big hit type) or the small hit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21710 that the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (S21710: YES), the process proceeds to step S21711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21710 that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (S21710: NO), the second variation stop process is terminated as it is.

  In step S21711, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21712, and after setting the opening / closing execution mode start command, the second variation stop process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 94: S20306).

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S21801, it is determined whether an ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing process period in the opening / closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S21801 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21801: NO), the process advances to step S21802 to determine whether the opening / closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening / closing process period flag is turned ON when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing process period, and is turned OFF when the opening / closing process period is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21802 that the opening / closing process period flag is not ON (S21802: NO), the flow proceeds to step S21803, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  If it is determined in step S21803 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21803: NO), the process proceeds to step S21804, and it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game time that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is ended, and is turned OFF when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  If it is determined in step S21804 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S21804: YES), the process proceeds to step S21805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21804 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S21804: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  In step S21805, it is determined whether or not a small hit. Specifically, by determining whether or not the small hit flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the opportunity for starting the opening / closing execution mode is a small win. If it is determined in step S21805 that the game is not a small hit (S21805: NO), the process proceeds to step S21806.

  In step S21806, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. In step S21805, since it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the winning lottery) is not a small hit, the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big hit. The high probability mode flag is turned OFF in order to set the lottery mode during execution of the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the jackpot is won as a trigger. After executing Step S21806, the process proceeds to Step S21807.

  In step S21807, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In step S21805, since it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the winning lottery) is not a small hit, the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a big hit. The high-frequency support mode flag is set to OFF in order to set the support mode in the open / close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-frequency support mode. After executing Step S21807, the process proceeds to Step S21808.

  In step S21808, a jackpot opening / closing execution mode command is set. The jackpot opening / closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening / closing execution mode is started upon winning of the jackpot winning. The jackpot opening / closing execution mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: step S20302) of the normal process. After executing step S21808, the process proceeds to step S21809.

  In step S21809, an opening / closing execution mode start command is set. The opening / closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening / closing execution mode is started when a big hit is won or when a small hit is made. In other words, the opening / closing execution mode start command is set when the opening / closing execution mode is started regardless of the big hit or the small win. The opening / closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 94: step S20302). After executing step S21809, the process proceeds to step S21810.

  In step S21810, an open / close scenario setting process is executed. The open / close scenario setting process is a process for setting an open / close scenario in which an opening pattern of the open / close door 36b is set in a round game. The open / close scenario setting process will be described later. After executing Step S21810, the process proceeds to Step S21811.

  In step S21811, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the special gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S21811, the process proceeds to Step S21812.

  In step S21812, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot or jackpot that triggered the execution of the current opening / closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S21812, the process proceeds to step S21813, and the opening period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21803 that the opening period flag is ON (S21803: YES), the process proceeds to step S21814.

  In step S21814, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting process is “0”. If it is determined in step S21814 that the opening period has ended (S21814: YES), the process proceeds to step S21815, and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21816.

  In step S21816, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing Step S21816, the process proceeds to Step S21817.

  In step S21817, the open / close processing period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21802 that the opening / closing process period flag is ON (S21802: YES), the process proceeds to step S21818, and the big prize opening / closing process is executed. The big prize opening / closing process will be described later. After executing Step S21818, the process proceeds to Step S21819.

  In step S21819, it is determined whether or not the special prize opening / closing process has been completed. If it is determined that the special prize opening / closing process has been completed (S21819: YES), the process proceeds to step S21820. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21819 that the big prize opening / closing process has not ended (S21819: NO), the gaming state transition process is ended as it is.

  In step S21820, the open / close processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S21821.

  In step S21821, a round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step S21821, the process proceeds to Step S21822.

  In step S21822, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period in the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as an ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing Step S21822, the process proceeds to Step S21823.

  In step S21823, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). The sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing Step S21823, the process proceeds to Step S21824.

  In step S21824, the ending period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21801 that the ending period flag is ON (S21801: YES), the process proceeds to step S21825.

  In step S21825, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21822), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step S21825 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S21825: YES), the process proceeds to step S21826.

  In step S21826, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21827, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21827, the process proceeds to step S21828, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21829, and an opening / closing execution mode end command is set. The opening / closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening / closing execution mode has ended. The opening / closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21825 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not “0” (S21825: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Open / close scenario setting process>
Next, the open / close scenario setting process will be described. The open / close scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 109: S21810) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an open / close scenario setting process. In step S21901, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21901 that the big hit flag is ON (S21901: YES), the process proceeds to step S21902.

  In step S21902, a jackpot opening / closing scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. The opening / closing scenario is a program in which an opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b in a round game is set. After executing step S21902, the open / close scenario setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21901 that the big hit flag is not ON (S21901: NO), the process proceeds to step S21903.

  In step S21903, a small hit opening / closing scenario is set. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the opening / closing door 36b once in a round game is set in the opening / closing scenario for small hits. After executing step S21903, the open / close scenario setting process is terminated.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 109: S21811) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S22001, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON.

  In step S22001, if it is determined that the trigger for the current opening / closing execution mode is a big win (S22001: YES), the process proceeds to step S22002.

  In step S22002, 3000 (about 6.0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22001 that the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big win, that is, if the current opening / closing execution mode is determined to be a small win (S22001: NO), step The process proceeds to S22003.

  In step S22003, 0 (0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the prize winning opening / closing process will be described. The big prize opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 109: S21818) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. In step S2211, it is determined whether the open / close door 36b is open. If it is determined in step S22101 that the open / close door 36b is not open (S22101: NO), the process proceeds to step S22102.

  In step S22102, it is determined whether the opening condition of the open / close door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the open / close scenario set by the open / close scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the open / close door 36b. If it is determined in step S22102 that the opening condition of the open / close door 36b is satisfied (S22102: YES), the process proceeds to step S22103.

  In step S22103, the open / close door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22104.

  In step S22104, an open / close door opening command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The open / close door opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: S20302) of the normal process. After step S22104 is executed, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22102 that the opening condition of the open / close door 36b is not satisfied (S22102: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22101 that the open / close door 36b is being opened (S22101: YES), the process proceeds to step S22105.

  In step S22105, it is determined whether the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. The closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b was detected as the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b set in the opening / closing scenario elapses or the number of game balls set in advance in the big winning opening 36a was detected. The case holds. If it is determined in step S22105 that the closing condition of the open / close door 36b is satisfied (S22105: YES), the process proceeds to step S22106.

  In step S22106, the open / close door 36b is closed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22107.

  In step S22107, a door closing command is set. The open / close door close command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the open / close door 36b is closed. The open / close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: S20302) of the normal process. After step S22107 is executed, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22105 that the closing condition of the open / close door 36b is not satisfied (S22105: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 109: S21827).

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S2221, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S2221 that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit (S22201: YES), the process proceeds to step S22202, and the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a promising big hit. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is the probability variation jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S22202 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a probable big hit (S22220: YES), the process proceeds to step S22203. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22202 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not a probable big hit (S22220: NO), the process proceeds to step S22212.

  In step S22203, the corresponding probability variation jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, a process of turning off an ON flag of the 10R probability variation big hit flag and the 2R probability variation flag is executed. After executing Step S22203, the process proceeds to Step S22204.

  In step S22204, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned ON. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing Step S22204, the process proceeds to Step S22205.

  In step S22205, it is determined whether or not the specific probability variation jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S22205 that the specific probability variation jackpot flag is ON (S22205: YES), the process proceeds to step S22209.

  In step S22209, the specific probability variation jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, in step S22210, the specific process flag is turned ON. After executing step S22210, the process proceeds to step S22211 to set a specific process command. The specific processing command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the specific processing (special bonus processing) is executed. The specific process command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). After executing step S22211, the process proceeds to step S22206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22205 that the specific probability variation jackpot flag is not ON (S22205: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S22206.

  In step S22206, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The high probability mode command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode. After executing Step 06, the process proceeds to Step 07.

  In step S22207, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22208, and a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22202 that the current transition to the opening / closing execution mode is not a probable big hit (S22202: NO), the process proceeds to step S22212 and the corresponding normal big hit flag is turned OFF. After executing step S22212, the process proceeds to step S22213.

  In step S22213, the low probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The low probability mode command is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. After executing step S22213, the process proceeds to step S22214.

  In step S22214, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22215, and 100 is set as a counter value in the game number counter PNC. After executing step S22215, the process proceeds to step S22216.

  In step S22216, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high-frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22201 that the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is not a big win (S22201: NO), that is, if the trigger for shifting to the current open / close execution mode is a small hit, step In step S22217, the small hit flag is turned off. After executing step S22217, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power combination support process will be described. The electric power support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 94: S20307).

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the power combination support process. In step S22301, it is determined whether support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supporting flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 44a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S22301 that the supporting flag is not ON (S22301: NO), the process proceeds to step S2232.

  In step S2232, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the electrified winning combination lottery of whether or not the electric accessory 44a is to be opened is turned ON, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S 22302 that the support winning flag is not ON (S 22302: NO), the process proceeds to step S 22303.

  In step S22303, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S22303 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S22303: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S22303: YES), the process proceeds to step S22304.

  In step S22304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the normal unit 38. In step S22304, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (S22304: YES), the process proceeds to step S22305, and after setting the out-of-display, the main role support process is ended. By setting the out-of-display, the symbol change display in the general-purpose unit 38 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S22304: NO), the process proceeds to step S22306.

  In step S22306, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory reservation number SN is greater than “0”. If it is determined in step S22306 that the value of the reserved item SN is “0” (S22306: NO), the main character support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22306 that the value of the accessory reservation number SN is greater than “0” (S22306: YES), the process proceeds to step S22307.

  In step S22307, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect, and then the process proceeds to step S22308 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S22307 (S22307: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is in step S22308 (S22308: YES), the process proceeds to step S22309, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric utility release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric appliance release lottery is performed. Winning. Further, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 simultaneously with the lottery for opening the electric accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22310.

  In step S22310, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S22309 is support winning. In step S22310, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for opening the electrical equipment is support winning (S22310: YES), the process proceeds to step S22311, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is provided. Then, “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times that the electric accessory 44a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22310 that the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery is not support winning (S22310: NO), the process proceeds to step S22312 without executing the process of step S22311.

  In step S22312, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S22312 that the winning / raising lottery mode is the low probability mode (S22312: YES), the process proceeds to step S22313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22312 that the success / failure lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S22312: NO), the main role support process is terminated.

  In step S22313, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S22313 that the game number counter area is not “0” (S22313: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22313 that the game number counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S22314, and the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22315.

  In step S22315, the low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the electronic role support process is terminated.

  The low frequency support command set in step S22315 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: S20302) of the normal process. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode.

  When it is determined in step S22307 that the opening / closing execution mode is selected (S22307: YES), or in step S22308, when it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S22308: NO), the process proceeds to step S22316, and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric utility release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric appliance release lottery is performed. Winning. Also, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electrification opening lottery. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22317.

  In step S22317, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S22316 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S22317 that the support is not won (S22317: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22317 that the support win is selected (S22317: YES), the process proceeds to step S22318, the support win flag is turned ON, and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2. Then, the main power support process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2232 that the support winning flag is ON (S22302: YES), the process proceeds to step S22319, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. If it is determined in step S22319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22319: NO), since the variation display of the pattern in the normal unit 38 is being performed, the main role supporting process is performed as it is. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S22319: YES), the process proceeds to step S22320.

  In step S22320, a win display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the general map unit 38 is terminated in a state where the hit display is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22321 where the supporting flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22301 that the supporting flag is ON (S22301: YES), the process proceeds to step S22322, and an electric combination opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric combination 44a is executed. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

<Electrical opening and closing process>
Next, the electric role opening / closing process will be described. The power combination opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the power combination support process (FIG. 114: S22322).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the power combination opening / closing process. In step S22401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 44b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is opened (S22401: YES), the process proceeds to step S22402.

  In step S22402, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S22402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S22402: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric utility item 44a has not ended, the main electric character opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S22402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S22402: YES), the process proceeds to step S22403 to perform a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the closed state. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the duration of opening of the electric accessory 44a is “0”, the electric accessory 44a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is now electrically operated. As a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 44a, “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step S22403, the process proceeds to Step S22404.

  In step S22404, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S22405, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S22405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S22405: NO), the main role opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S22405: YES), the process proceeds to step S22406, and the supporting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22401 that the electric accessory 44a is not open (S22401: NO), the process proceeds to step S22407, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S22407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S22407: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22407 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S22407: YES), the process proceeds to step S22408 to execute an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the opened state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22409.

  In step S22409, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode (S22409: NO), the process proceeds to step S22410, and it is determined whether or not it is the high-frequency support mode. To do.

  If it is determined in step S22410 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S22410: YES), the flow advances to step S22411 to set “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22409 that it is the opening / closing execution mode (S22409: YES), or if it is determined in step S22410 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (S22410: NO), the process proceeds to step S22412. “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

B5. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 116 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. A part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted.

  An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in part of the ROM 93 area.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in part of the RAM 94 area. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, an effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected, and a display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control apparatus 100 includes an MPU 102 which is a chip in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image data.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106. Further, it is possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are respectively referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side. The ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

B6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described.

  In step S23101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling the command received from the main MPU 62 to be stored and read out. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step S23101, the process proceeds to Step S23102.

  In step S23102, state storage processing is executed. The state storage process is a process of storing the state of the game being executed using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The state of the game stored as the flag is used to determine the effect to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing Step S23102, the process proceeds to Step S23103.

  In step S23103, display mode switching processing is executed. The display mode switching process is a process of switching the area for displaying the first start opening effect image and the second start opening effect image. Specifically, when the first start opening effect image is displayed in the main display area MA and the second start opening effect image is displayed in the sub display area SA, and the second start opening effect is displayed in the main display area MA. A process of switching between displaying an image and displaying the first start opening effect image in the sub display area SA is executed. The first start opening effect image includes the first liquid crystal design, and the second start opening effect image includes the second liquid crystal design. Details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing Step S23103, the process proceeds to Step S23104.

  In step S23104, special 1 game times effect processing is executed. The special game time effect process is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the first start game time. Details of the special 1 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing Step S23104, the process proceeds to Step S23105.

  In step S23105, special 2 game times effect processing is executed. The special 2 game times effect process is a process of setting and executing effects corresponding to the second start game times. The details of the special 2 game times effect processing will be described later. After executing Step S23105, the process proceeds to Step S23106.

  In step S23106, special bonus effect setting processing is executed. The special bonus effect setting process is a process for setting an effect to be executed during a period in which the special bonus process is being executed. Details of the special bonus effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step S23106, the process proceeds to Step S23107.

  In step S23107, other display processing is executed. The other display processing is processing for executing various settings related to display based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, a process for updating the number of holds displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is performed. After executing Step S23107, the process proceeds to Step S23108.

  In step S23108, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the processes from step S23103 to step S23107. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so as to obtain a light emission mode corresponding to the effect set in Steps S23103 to S23107. After executing Step S23108, the process proceeds to Step S23109.

  In step S23109, an audio output control process for performing audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read out in the processes of steps S23103 to S23107. That is, sound output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that sound corresponding to the effect set in step S23103 to step S23107 is output. After executing step S23109, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<State storage process>
Next, the state storage process will be described. The state process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23102).

  FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. In step S 23201, it is determined whether a specific probability change jackpot command has been received from the main MPU 62. The specific probability variable jackpot command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the game round won for the specific probability variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S23201 that the specific probability variation jackpot command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23201: YES), the process proceeds to step S23202, and the sound side specific probability variation jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing Step S23202, the process proceeds to Step S23203.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23201 that the specific probability variation jackpot command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23201: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S23203.

  In step S23203, it is determined whether a specific process command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. The specific process command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 when the game round won for the specific probability change jackpot ends and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the specific probability change jackpot win ends. If it is determined in step S23203 that the specific process command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23203: YES), the process proceeds to step S23204, and the sound light side specific process flag is turned ON. After executing Step S23204, the process proceeds to Step S23205.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23203 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23203: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S23205.

  In step S23205, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. The special bonus start command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the game round when the jackpot is won in a subsequent game round after winning the specific probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S23205 that a special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23205: YES), the flow advances to step S23206 to turn off the sound light side identification flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S23207, and the special bonus start flag is turned ON. After executing Step S23207, the process proceeds to Step S23208.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23205 that the special bonus start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23205: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S23208.

  In step S23208, it is determined whether a jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. The jackpot opening / closing execution mode command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot winning. If it is determined in step S23208 that a jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23208: YES), the flow proceeds to step S23209.

  In step S23209, it is determined whether or not the special bonus start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23209 that the special bonus start flag is ON (S23209: YES), the process proceeds to step S23210. In step S23210, the special bonus start flag is turned OFF. Then, this state storage process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23208 that no big hit opening / closing execution mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23208: NO), and if it is determined in step S23209 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (S23209). : NO), the state storage process is terminated as it is.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23103).

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing. In step S23301, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. If it is determined in step S23301 that a special bonus start command has been received (S23301: YES), the process proceeds to S23302. In step S23302, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON. The special 2 main display flag displays the first start opening effect image including the first liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 and the second start port effect image including the second liquid crystal symbol. When displaying in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41, the display is turned off, and the second start opening effect image including the second liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the first This is a flag that is turned on when the first start opening effect image including the liquid crystal design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. In step S23302, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON when the special bonus process is started. As shown in FIG. 91, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, the second start opening game times are executed a plurality of times, and the lottery result in the second start opening game times is also a small hit for the player. In this embodiment, when the special bonus process is started, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON. After executing Step S23302, the process proceeds to Step S23303.

  In step S23303, the special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control device 100 that has received the special 2 main display command displays the second start opening effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 by controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and A first start opening effect image including a liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing Step S23303, the process proceeds to Step S23304.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23301 that the special bonus start command has not been received (S23301: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S23304.

  In step S23304, it is determined whether a jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has been received. If it is determined in step S23304 that a jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has been received (S23304: YES), the process proceeds to step S23305.

  In step S23305, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23305 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23305: YES), the process proceeds to S23306, and the special 2 main display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S23307, and the special 1 main display command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. In other words, when the opening / closing execution mode is started in response to the jackpot winning, the first start opening effect image including the first liquid crystal design is displayed on the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 and the second liquid crystal display. A display mode in which the second start opening effect image including the design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41 is set.

  In the present embodiment, when a game is executed along a legitimate game flow, the probability of winning a big win in the winning lottery in the second start opening game times is low, and the opening / closing execution mode executed with the big win winning as a trigger Is a big win in the first starting game. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed due to the big win, the first start opening effect image including the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

  In step S23307, the special 1 main display command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 as described above. The display control device 100 that has received the special 1 main display command displays the first start opening effect image on the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 by controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and also performs the second operation. A second start opening effect image including a liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S23307, the display mode switching process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S23304 that the jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has not been received (S23304: NO) and in step S23305, it is determined that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23305: NO). Then, the display mode switching process is terminated as it is.

<Special game processing for special 1>
Next, the special 1 game round effect process will be described. The special 1 game round effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23104).

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the special 1 game times effect processing. In step S 2401, it is determined whether or not a special 1 change command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S23401 that a special 1 variation command has been received (S23401: YES), the flow advances to step S23402.

  In step S23402, the specially received variation command received this time is read out, and information on the presence / absence of jackpot, type of jackpot, presence / absence of reach, and variation time is read from the command. The read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S23403.

  In step S23403, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23403 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23403: NO), the process proceeds to step S23404, and the special 1 effect pattern setting process for the main display area is executed. The special display pattern setting process for the main display area is a process of setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the main display area MA based on the information read in step S23402. Details of the special display pattern setting process for the main display area will be described later. After executing Step S23404, the process proceeds to Step S23406.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23403 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23403: YES), the process proceeds to step S23405, and a special display pattern setting process for the sub display area is executed. Specifically, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the sub display area SA are set based on the information read out in step S23402.

  Here, the process of step S23405, that is, the special display pattern setting process for the sub display area is executed during the period during which the special bonus process is executed. That is, the first start opening effect image is displayed in the sub display area SA during the period when the special bonus process is executed. As described with reference to FIG. 91, during the period when the special bonus process is executed, the second start opening game times are executed during the execution of the first start opening game times, and the probability is small. A win is won and a round game is executed. Then, during the period in which the round game is executed with the small hit of the second start opening game times, the measurement of the game time of the first start opening game times is interrupted as an internal process of the main controller 60. Accordingly, the display time of the first start opening effect image displayed in the sub display area SA during this period is variable, and cannot be specified when the display of the first start opening effect image is started in the sub display area SA. . Therefore, as the first start opening effect image displayed in the sub display area SA, an image that does not give the player a sense of incongruity at any timing is set. For example, an image in which the first liquid crystal pattern changes monotonously without a story or an image in which a predetermined character repeats a monotonous operation is set. By doing in this way, it is possible to display the first start opening effect image in the sub display area SA whose display time is variable without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  After executing Step S23405, the process proceeds to Step S23406.

  In step S23406, the liquid crystal symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the game game winning lottery is a big hit, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the active line L (L1 or L2). Is set as information on the design for the current liquid crystal. If the result of the lottery for the current game round is out of play, the presence / absence of reach is determined from the contents of the special 1 change command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol on the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and is on the effective line L (L1 or L2). Information corresponding to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established is set as information on the current liquid crystal symbol. After executing Step S23406, the process proceeds to Step S23407.

  In step S23407, processing for determining a variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game time is identified from the contents of the special 1 variation command received this time, the information on the variation time, and information on the liquid crystal symbol identified in step S23406 above. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing Step S23407, the process proceeds to Step S23408.

  In step S23408, a hold information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, the information in the first hold number counter area is updated so that the first hold number stored in the first hold number counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing Step S23408, the process proceeds to Step S23409.

  In step S23409, the special 1 effect setting flag is turned ON. The special 1 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that an effect pattern, a stop liquid crystal pattern, a variable display pattern, and the like in the first start opening game times are set. After executing Step S23409, the process proceeds to Step S23410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23401 that the special 1 variation command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to step S23410.

  In step S23410, a special 1 game round effect execution process is executed. The special 1 game round effect execution process is a process for controlling the start and end of the fluctuation of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the first start opening game round. Details of the special 1 game round effect execution process will be described later. After executing step S23410, the process proceeds to step S23411.

  In step S23411, a special 1 variation time measurement process is executed. The special 1 variation time measurement process is a process of measuring the time for which the liquid crystal symbols of the first start opening game times are variably displayed. Details of the special 1 variation time measurement process will be described later. After executing step S23411, the special game play effect processing for special 1 is terminated.

<Special 1 effect pattern setting process for main display area>
Next, the special 1 effect pattern setting process for the main display area will be described. The special 1 effect pattern setting process for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the special 1 game times effect process (FIG. 120: S23404).

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the special 1 effect pattern setting process for the main display area. In step S23501, based on the received special 1 change command, it is determined whether or not the game time that is the processing target is the game time that has been won. If it is determined in step S23501 that the game time that is the processing target is the game time that has been won by the jackpot (S23501: YES), the process proceeds to step S23502.

  In step S23502, based on the received special 1 change command, it is determined whether or not the game times to be processed is the game times won in the probable big hit. If it is determined in step S23502 that the game time that is the processing target is the game time that has been won for the probable bonus (S23502: YES), the process proceeds to step S23503.

  In step S23503, it is determined whether the sound side specific probability variation jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23503 that the sound side specific probability variation jackpot flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that it is 10R probability variation jackpot (step S23503: NO), the process proceeds to step S23504.

  In step S23504, an effect pattern for probability variation big hit is set as a special 1 effect pattern (first start opening effect image) displayed in the main display area MA. Thereafter, the special effect pattern setting process for the main display area is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23503 that the sound side specific probability variation jackpot flag is ON (S23503: YES), the process proceeds to step S23505. In step S23505, an effect pattern for specific probability variation big hit is set as a special 1 effect pattern (first start opening effect image) displayed in the main display area MA. After executing Step S23505, the process proceeds to Step S23506.

  In step S23506, the sound side specific probability variation jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the special effect pattern setting process for the main display area is terminated.

  A configuration may be employed in which the effect pattern for probability variation jackpot set in step S23504 and the effect pattern for specific probability variation jackpot set in step S23506 are the same or similar effect patterns. By doing so, it is difficult to identify whether the current jackpot is a probable big jackpot or a specific probable big jackpot, and a sense of expectation as to which type of jackpot is given to the player Can do.

  If it is determined in step S23502 that the game times to be processed are not the game times won in the probable bonus (S23502: NO), the process proceeds to step S23507.

  In step S23507, an effect pattern for a normal jackpot is set as the special 1 effect pattern (first start opening effect image) displayed in the main display area MA. Thereafter, the special effect pattern setting process for the main display area is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23501 that the game times to be processed are not the game times won in the jackpot (S23501: NO), the process proceeds to step S23508.

  In step S23508, it is determined whether or not the sound side identification processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23508 that the sound light side specific processing flag is not ON (S23508: NO), the process proceeds to step S23509.

  In step S23509, an off-stage effect pattern is set as the special 1 effect pattern (first start opening effect image) displayed in the main display area MA. Thereafter, the special effect pattern setting process for the main display area is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23508 that the sound light side specific processing flag is ON (S23508: YES), the process advances to step S23510.

  In step S23510, an effect pattern setting process for specific processing is executed. The process is executed when the first start opening game is executed after winning the specific probability variation jackpot in the first starting opening game and after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the winning is completed. is there. That is, this process is a process of setting an effect pattern for losing in the first start opening game times executed in the period from time T3 to time T4 in FIG. In the present embodiment, as an effect pattern for losing in the first start opening game times executed during the period, an effect pattern that suggests that a special bonus process will be started when a big win is won next time. adopt. In this way, a sense of expectation can be given to the player. Thereafter, the special effect pattern setting process for the main display area is terminated.

<Special game play production process for special 1>
Next, the special 1 game round effect execution process will be described. The special 1 game times effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 120: S23410) of the special 1 game times effect process.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing special 1 game round effect execution processing. In step S23601, it is determined whether or not the special 1 effect setting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23601 that the special effect setting flag is ON (step S23601: YES), the process proceeds to step S23602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23601 that the special 1 effect setting flag is not ON (step S23601: NO), the special 1 game round effect execution process is terminated as it is.

  In step S23602, it is determined whether or not the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23602 that the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (S23602: NO), the process proceeds to step S23603.

  In step S23603, processing for starting the variation of the first liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display based on the current game times effect pattern, stop liquid crystal symbol, and variable display pattern set in steps S23404 to S23408 of the special 1 game times effect processing. The operation content of the control device 100 is set. After executing Step S23603, the process proceeds to Step S23604.

  In step S23604, a first liquid crystal symbol variation start command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Specifically, the information on the effect pattern, stop liquid crystal design, and variation display pattern set in the current game round is set in the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command and transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command uses the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal design, and the change display pattern based on the content of the first liquid crystal symbol change start command as the first start opening effect image of the liquid crystal display device 41. It displays on the display surface 41a. After executing Step S23604, the process proceeds to Step S23605.

  In step S23605, the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is turned ON. Then, this special 1 game round effect execution process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23602 that the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S23602: YES), the process proceeds to step S23606.

  In step S23606, it is determined whether or not the value of the sound light side variation time counter SPTC1 is zero. The sound light side variation time counter SPTC1 is a counter for measuring the variation time in the first start opening game times. The sound light side variation time counter SPTC1 is down-counted in a special 1 variation time measurement process described later, and the sound light side MPU 92 recognizes the timing when the sound light side variation time counter SPTC1 becomes 0, so that the sound light side MPU 92 performs the first start. The timing at which the variable time ends in the game time for mouth is specified. If it is determined in step S23606 that the value of the sound light side variation time counter SPTC1 is 0 (S23606: YES), the process proceeds to step S23607. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23606 that the value of the sound light side variation time counter SPTC1 is not 0 (S23606: NO), the special 1 game round effect execution process is terminated.

  In step S23607, a process for ending the variation of the first liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, the display control device 100, etc. for ending the change of the first liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stop symbol) are set. After executing Step S23603, the process proceeds to Step S23608.

  In step S23608, a first liquid crystal symbol variation end command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command stops the first liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command. After executing Step S23608, the process proceeds to Step S23609.

  In step S23609, the special 1 effect setting flag and the special 1 variation display start flag are turned OFF. Then, this special 1 game round effect execution process is terminated.

<Special 1 variation time measurement process>
Next, the special 1 variation time measurement process will be described. The special 1 variation time measurement process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 120: S23411) of the special 1 game round effect process.

  This special 1 variation time measurement process is a process of measuring the variation time of the first start game time. In addition, this process has a function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period when the opening / closing execution mode is being executed.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the special 1 variation time measurement process. In step S23701, it is determined whether or not the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23701 that the special 1 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S23701: YES), the process proceeds to step S23702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23701 that the special 1 variation display start flag is not ON (S23701: NO), the special 1 variation time measurement processing is terminated as it is.

  In step S23702, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode start command has been received. If it is determined in step S23702 that an opening / closing execution mode start command has been received (S23702: YES), the process proceeds to step S23703.

  In step S23703, the special 1 count stop flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S23706.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23702 that the opening / closing execution mode start command has not been received (S23702: NO), the process proceeds to step S23704.

  In step S23704, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S23704 that the open / close execution mode end command has been received (S23704: YES), the process proceeds to step S23705, and the special 1 count stop flag is turned OFF. After executing Step S23705, the process proceeds to Step S23706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23704 that the open / close execution mode end command has not been received (S23704: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S23706.

  In step S23706, it is determined whether or not the special 1 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23706 that the special 1 count stop flag is not ON (S23706: NO), the process proceeds to step S23707.

  In step S23707, the sound light side variation time counter SPTC1 is counted down. This process counts down the value of the sound light side variation time counter SPTC1 every time it passes through the thread of step S23707. That is, only when the thread of step S23707 is passed, the value of the sound light side variation time counter SPTC1 is down-counted. After executing step S23707, the special 1 variation time measurement process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23706 that the special 1 count stop flag is ON (S23706: YES), the special 1 variation time measurement process is terminated.

  By executing such processing, the variation time measurement process for the special 1 is a variation of the first start-up game time having a function of interrupting the measurement of the variation time during the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Time measurement can be realized.

  In this way, by receiving the opening / closing execution mode start command indicating the start of the opening / closing execution mode from the main MPU 62 during the execution of the game times, the measurement of the game time variation time in the sound light side MPU 92 is interrupted, and the game times When the open / close execution mode end command indicating the end of the open / close execution mode is received from the main MPU 62 during the execution of, the measurement of the variation time of the game times in the interrupted light side MPU 92 is resumed. When such a process is executed, for example, when the change time measurement is repeatedly stopped and restarted frequently, such as a period during which the special bonus process is executed, the change time measured by the main MPU 62 and the sound There is also a possibility that a deviation occurs in the variation time measured in the optical side MPU 92. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which information related to the current value of the variation time measured by the main MPU 62 is included in the open / close execution mode start command and the open / close execution mode end command transmitted by the main MPU 62. The sound light side MPU 92 measures the sound light side MPU 92 based on the information on the current value of the variation time measured by the main side MPU 62 included in the received opening / closing execution mode start command and the opening / closing execution mode end command. A configuration in which the value of the fluctuation time is corrected may be employed. In addition, when it is known that an error occurs in the variation time measured by the sound light side MPU 92 as compared with the variation time measured by the main MPU 62, the error value or the error value is previously determined. When the average value is specified and the measurement of the variation time is executed in the sound light side MPU 92, a configuration in which the error value is corrected may be employed. By doing in this way, it is possible to accurately synchronize the measurement of the variation time between the main MPU 62 and the sound light MPU 92.

<Special game processing for special game 2>
Next, the special 2 game times effect processing will be described. The special 2 game times effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23105).

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing special 2 game times effect processing. In step S23801, it is determined whether a special 2 variation command is received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S23801 that the special 2 variation command has been received (S23801: YES), the flow proceeds to step S23802.

  In step S23802, the specially received change command received this time is read out, and information on the presence / absence of jackpot, type of jackpot, presence / absence of jackpot, and variation time is read from the command. The read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S23803.

  In step S23803, it is determined whether or not the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23803 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23803: NO), the flow advances to step S23804 to execute a special 2 effect pattern setting process for the main display area. The special 2 effect pattern setting process for the main display area is a process for setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the main display area MA based on the information read in step S23802. Details of the special display effect pattern setting process for the main display area will be described later. After executing Step S23804, the process proceeds to Step S23806.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23803 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23803: YES), the process advances to step S23805 to execute a special 2 effect pattern setting process for the sub display area. Specifically, based on the information read in step S23802, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the sub display area SA are set.

  After executing Step S23805, the process proceeds to Step S23806.

  In step S23806, the liquid crystal symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the game game winning lottery is a big hit, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the active line L (L1 or L2). Is set as information on the design for the current liquid crystal. In addition, when the result of the lottery for the current game round is out of play, the presence / absence of reach is determined from the contents of the special 2 variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol on the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and is on the effective line L (L1 or L2). Information corresponding to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established is set as information on the current liquid crystal symbol. After executing Step S23806, the process proceeds to Step S23807.

  In step S23807, processing for determining a variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, information on the variation time of the current game time is identified from the contents of the special 2 variation command received this time, the information on the variation time, and information on the liquid crystal symbol identified in step S23806 above. Select the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing Step S23807, the process proceeds to Step S23808.

  In step S23808, a hold information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, the information in the second hold number counter area is updated so that the second hold number stored in the second hold number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing Step S23808, the process proceeds to Step S23809.

  In step S23809, the special 2 effect setting flag is turned ON. The special 2 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that an effect pattern, a stop liquid crystal symbol, a variable display pattern, and the like in the second start opening game times are set. After executing Step S23809, the process proceeds to Step S23810.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23801 that the special 2 variation command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to step S23810.

  In step S23810, special 2 game times effect execution processing is executed. This is a process for controlling the start and end of the fluctuation of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the second start opening game times. Details of the special 2 game round effect execution process will be described later. After executing Step S23810, the process proceeds to Step S23811.

  In step S23811, a special time variation measurement process is executed. The special 2 variation time measurement process is a process of measuring a time for variably displaying the liquid crystal symbols of the second start opening game times. Details of the special 2 variation time measurement process will be described later. After executing step S23811, the special 2 game times effect processing is terminated.

<Special 2 effect pattern setting process for main display area>
Next, the special 2 effect pattern setting process for the main display area will be described. The special 2 effect pattern setting process for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the special 2 game times effect process (FIG. 124: S23804).

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the special 2 effect pattern setting process for the main display area. In step S23901, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game time that is the processing target is a game time that has been won. In step S23901, when it is determined that the game time to be processed is the game time won in the jackpot (S23901: YES), the process proceeds to step S23902.

  In step S23902, an effect pattern for jackpot including probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot is set. Then, the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

  If it is determined in step S23901 that the game times to be processed are not the game times won in the jackpot (S23901: NO), the process proceeds to step S23903.

  In step S23903, it is determined whether or not the special bonus start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23903 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (S23903: NO), the process proceeds to step S23904.

  In step S23904, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game time that is the processing target is the game time that is won in the small hit. If it is determined in step S23904 that the game time that is the processing target is the game time that is won in the small hit based on the received special 2 variation command (S23904: YES), the process proceeds to step S23905.

  In step S23905, an effect pattern for small hits at normal time (not at the time of special bonus) is set. Then, the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

  If it is determined in step S23904 that the game times to be processed are not the game times won in the small hit based on the received special 2 variation command (S23904: NO), the process proceeds to step S23906.

  In step S23906, an effect pattern for detachment in the normal time (when not in the special bonus time) is set. Then, the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

  If it is determined in step S23903 that the special bonus start flag is ON (S23903: YES), the process proceeds to step S23907.

  In step S23907, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game time that is the processing target is the game time that is won in the small hit. If it is determined in step S23907 that the game time that is the processing target is the game time that is won in the small win based on the received special 2 variation command (S23907: YES), the process proceeds to step S23908.

  In step S23908, an effect pattern for small hits at the time of a special bonus is set. The setting method of the effect pattern for small hits at the time of the special bonus differs depending on the game state at the time of execution of the processing. Details of the small hit effect pattern setting process at the time of the special bonus will be described later. After executing Step S23908, the special 2 effect pattern setting process for the main display area is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23907 that the game times to be processed are not the game times won in the small hit based on the received special 2 variation command (S23907: NO), the process proceeds to step S23909.

  In step S23909, an effect pattern for removal at the time of a special bonus is set. Then, the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

  FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing for setting the effect pattern for small hits at the time of the special bonus in step S23908.

  In the process for setting the effect pattern for small hits at the time of the special bonus, the effect pattern is set with reference to the effect pattern table data (TB1 to TB9) in which the variation times of the game times to be processed are associated with the effect pattern. To do. FIG. 126 is a correspondence table in which the effect pattern table data to be referred to is associated with each state of the game at the time of execution of the setting process of the effect pattern for small hits at the time of the special bonus.

  As shown in the figure, the type of jackpot of the first start opening game times that triggered the start of the special bonus process (the type of jackpot of the first start opening game times at time T4 in FIG. 91), and the jackpot This is used for setting the effect of the second start opening game times executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed for each remaining time RT after the first start opening game times change is started. Production pattern table data is set in association with each other.

  For example, when the type of jackpot of the first start game time that triggered the start of the special bonus process (type of jackpot of the first start game time at time T4 in FIG. 91) is 10R specific probability variable jackpot When the remaining time RT of the variation time of the first start opening game times at the timing of setting the second start opening game times is 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, the effect pattern table With reference to data TB2, the effect pattern of the second start opening game times is determined.

  As shown in the figure, each effect pattern table data is set in association with an effect pattern for each variation time UT of the second start opening game times, and an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time is selected and set. .

  In this way, by determining the method of setting the effect pattern of the second start game time at the time of the special bonus according to the state of the game when setting the effect pattern, various suggestive effects can be given to the player. Can be executed.

  For example, when the remaining time RT of the first start opening game time during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed decreases, an effect that suggests that the remaining time of the special bonus process is short is executed, A feeling of impatience can be imparted. In addition, when there is a sufficient remaining time RT for the first start opening game times, an effect that suggests that the remaining time of the special bonus process is small is executed, and after that, the remaining time of the special bonus process remains sufficiently. By performing an effect that suggests this, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation.

  Also, by changing the method of setting the production pattern for each jackpot type of the first start opening game times that triggered the start of the special bonus process, the jackpot type of the first start opening game times is suggested. An effect can be executed.

<Special game play production process for special 2>
Next, the special 2 game round effect execution process will be described. The special 2 game times effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special 2 game times effect process (FIG. 124: S23810).

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing special 2 game times effect execution processing. In step S24001, it is determined whether or not the special 2 effect setting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24001 that the special 2 effect setting flag is ON (step S24001: YES), the process proceeds to step S24002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24001 that the special 2 effect setting flag is not ON (step S24001: NO), the special 2 game times effect execution process is terminated as it is.

  In step S24002, it is determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24002 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (S24002: NO), the process proceeds to step S24003.

  In step S24003, processing for starting the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display based on the current game times effect pattern, stop liquid crystal design, and variable display pattern set in steps S23404 to S23408 of the special 2 game times effect processing. The operation contents of the control device 100 and the like are set. After executing step S24003, the process proceeds to step S24004.

  In step S24004, a second liquid crystal symbol variation start command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Specifically, the information on the effect pattern, stop liquid crystal symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command and transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command uses the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal design, and the change display pattern based on the content of the second liquid crystal symbol change start command as the second start opening effect image of the liquid crystal display device 41. It displays on the display surface 41a. After executing Step S24004, the process proceeds to Step S24005.

  In step S24005, the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is turned ON. Then, this special 1 game round effect execution process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S24002 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S24002: YES), the process proceeds to step S24006.

  In step S24006, it is determined whether or not the value of the sound light side variation time counter SPTC2 is zero. The sound light side variation time counter SPTC2 is a counter for measuring the variation time in the second start-up game times. The sound light side variation time counter SPTC2 is down-counted in a special 2 variation time measurement process described later, and the sound light side MPU 92 recognizes the timing when the sound light side variation time counter SPTC2 becomes 0, so that the sound light side MPU 92 performs the second start. The timing for ending the variable time in the mouth game times is specified. If it is determined in step S24006 that the value of the sound light side variation time counter SPTC2 is 0 (S24006: YES), the process proceeds to step S24007. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24006 that the value of the sound light side variation time counter SPTC2 is not 0 (S24006: NO), the special 2 game times effect execution process is terminated as it is.

  In step S24007, a process for ending the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, the display control device 100, etc. for ending the change of the second liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stop symbol) are set. After executing Step S24003, the process proceeds to Step S24008.

  In step S24008, a second liquid crystal symbol variation end command is transmitted to display control apparatus 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command stops the second liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command. After executing step S24008, the process proceeds to step S24009.

  In step S24009, the special 2 effect setting flag and the special 2 fluctuation display start flag are turned OFF. Then, this special 2 game round effect execution process is terminated.

<Special 2 variation time measurement process>
Next, the special 2 variation time measurement process will be described. The variation time measurement process for special 2 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 124: S23811) of the special game effect production process for special 2.

  This special 2 variation time measurement process is a process of measuring the variation time of the second start game time. In addition, this process has a function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period when the opening / closing execution mode is being executed.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special 2 variation time measurement process. In step S24101, it is determined whether or not the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24101 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S24101: YES), the process proceeds to step S24102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24101 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (S24101: NO), the special 2 fluctuation time measurement process is terminated as it is.

  In step S24102, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode start command has been received. If it is determined in step S24102 that an opening / closing execution mode start command has been received (S24102: YES), the process proceeds to step S24103.

  In step S24103, the special 2 count stop flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S24106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24102 that the opening / closing execution mode start command has not been received (S24102: NO), the process proceeds to step S24104.

  In step S24104, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S24104 that an opening / closing execution mode end command has been received (S24104: YES), the process proceeds to step S24105, and the special 2 count stop flag is turned OFF. After executing Step S24105, the process proceeds to Step S24106. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24104 that the open / close execution mode end command has not been received (S24104: NO), the process proceeds to step S24106.

  In step S24106, it is determined whether or not the special 2 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24106 that the special 2 count stop flag is not ON (S24106: NO), the process proceeds to step S24107.

  In step S24107, the sound light side variation time counter SPTC2 is counted down. This process counts down the value of the sound light side variation time counter SPTC2 every time it passes through the thread of step S24107. That is, only when the thread of step S24107 is passed, the value of the sound light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is down-counted. After executing step S24107, the special 2 variation time measurement process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24106 that the special 2 count stop flag is ON (S24106: YES), the special 2 variable time measurement process is terminated.

  By executing such a process, the variation time measurement process for the special 2 is a variation of the game time for the second start opening having a function of interrupting the measurement of the variation time during the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Time measurement can be realized.

<Special bonus production setting process>
Next, the special bonus effect setting process will be described. The special bonus effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23106).

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing special bonus effect setting processing. In step S24201, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. If it is determined in step S24201 that a special bonus start command has been received (S24201: YES), the process proceeds to step S24202.

  In step S24202, a special bonus effect is set. In the special bonus effect, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, the image for the special bonus process period is displayed in the area other than the main display area MA and the sub display area SA on the display surface 41a, the sound is output, and the lamp is displayed. Is a setting process for executing the lighting of. After executing step S24202, the special bonus effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24201 that a special bonus start command has not been received (S24201: NO), the special bonus effect setting process is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the V interrupt process by quickly reflecting the contents of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S24301, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the process of clearing the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. The compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S24302.

  In step S24302, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process thereafter executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. In step S24401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instruction.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction for the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the image is stored. Hereinafter, details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S24501, command response processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 131) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the presentation operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24. If it is determined that it is the reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24, the presentation operation is performed. Image rendering and display control are started so that an effect mode corresponding to pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period for accepting the pressing of the presentation operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S24501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect of the effect such as the notice effect or the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90, and the effect image corresponding to the aspect is displayed. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41.

  In step S24502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command response processing (S24501) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S24503.

  In step S24503, task processing is executed. In the task processing, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S24502). In addition to specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S24504.

  In step S24504, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S24503) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S24505, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a special bonus process, which is a process for giving a privilege during the execution of the first start opening game round winning the jackpot. On the other hand, in addition to giving a sense of expectation for a round game (opening / closing execution mode) as a privilege given after the end of the game round winning the jackpot, the execution of the game round winning the jackpot A sense of expectation can be given to the inside.

  In addition, even if the jackpot is won in the first starting game, the special bonus process may or may not be executed during the game, so the jackpot is won. When the first start opening game round is started, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the special bonus process is executed.

  In addition, during the period when the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus is triggered by the fact that the second start opening game times are won during the execution of the first start opening game times. As a bonus (1R round game) will be granted, even if a big win is won in the first start opening game round, the second start opening game round is executed and the small hit It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation by letting them win.

  Furthermore, after the first start opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, the round game is executed in response to the big win in the first start opening game round. Can be granted to a person.

  In addition, the upper limit value of the number of times of the second start opening game times that can be executed during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed is the time during which the first start opening game times are being executed during the period. Depends on. In other words, the upper limit value of the amount of privilege granted as a special bonus is determined by the time during which the first start opening game is being executed during the period. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first start opening game times that are being executed continue for a longer period of time during which the special bonus process is being executed. In addition, as the end of the first start opening game round approaches, it is hoped that a special bonus will be obtained as much as possible, that is, the second start opening game round will be executed to win as much as possible. Feeling and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the first start opening game round can be given, and inflection can be given to the player's feelings.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment switches the support mode from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the first start opening game time in which the special bonus processing is executed, so that the special bonus processing is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

  Whether or not the special bonus process is executed in the first start opening game times won in the winning lottery is executed prior to the first start opening game times in which the special bonus process is executed. This is determined based on the jackpot type corresponding to the winning game round for the first opening. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the first start opening game times that are executed prior to the first start opening game times where the special bonus process is executed is specified. In the case of a promising jackpot, a special bonus process is executed in the first starting game game that is won. That is, prior to the execution of the special bonus process, it is possible to specify that the special bonus process is executed in the case where a big win is won in the first start opening game round. As a result, for example, during the execution of the first start opening game times won for the specific probability change jackpot, the special bonus process will be executed if the next winning start game win is won (suggestion) The special bonus process is executed after the first start opening game round is executed after the first start opening game round is executed until the start of the first start opening game round. It is possible to execute an effect of giving notice (suggestion) to be executed. Other conditions for switching the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode when winning the specific probability variation jackpot at the first start opening game round and then winning the big win at the first start opening game round It can be one of. In this way, in the first start opening game times won in the winning lottery, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus processing is made before the first start opening game times in which the special bonus processing is executed. By making a determination based on the jackpot type corresponding to the first start-up game game that has been executed and won the jackpot, it is possible to execute various corresponding processes for executing the special bonus process.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment switches the setting method of the variation time of the second start opening game times between the period for executing the special bonus process and the other period. More specifically, the average value of the variation times of the second start opening game times set during the period for executing the special bonus process is the value of the variation times of the second start opening game times set during other periods. Shorter than average. Therefore, the period during which the special bonus process is executed can be made advantageous to the player. In addition, when such a process is executed, there is a possibility that it may be excessively advantageous to the player. However, in the present embodiment, the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency during the special bonus process. Since the mode is switched to the support mode, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is based on the jackpot type of the first start opening game times executed during the period during which the special bonus process is executed, and the second start opening game times executed during the period. Determine the production pattern. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to guess indirectly about the lottery result (big hit type) of the first start opening game times through the effect of the second start opening game times. In other words, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the first start opening game times by using an effect executed in the second start opening game times. In addition, based on the lottery mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) after the end of the first start game executed in the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus process is executed in the period. The effect pattern of the second start opening game times is determined. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the lottery mode after the end of the first start opening game round by using the effect executed in the second start opening game round.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the first start opening game at the timing of setting the effect for the setting of the second start opening game times executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed. Based on the elapsed time, the effect pattern of the second start opening game times is set. Therefore, for a player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed second start opening game times, the elapsed time from the execution of the first first start opening game times and the first start opening game times. It is possible to estimate the remaining time until the time is finished and indirectly give a sense of expectation to the first start port special information game times through the effect corresponding to the second start port special information game times. Further, as one of the conditions for executing such a process, that is, a process for setting an effect pattern of the second start opening game times based on the elapsed time of the first start opening game times, It is a condition that the game time for the starting opening is won. Therefore, if the second start opening game times are executed during the execution of the first start opening game times, whether or not the presentation of the second start opening game times is based on the elapsed time of the first start opening game times. By making the player guess this, it can be made to guess whether or not the first start opening game number is won. That is, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding whether or not the winning lottery of the first start opening game times is won through the effect of the second start opening game times. Further, as one of the conditions for executing such a process, that is, a process for setting an effect pattern of the second start opening game times based on the elapsed time of the first start opening game times, It is a condition that the specific probability variation jackpot is won in the first start opening game times executed before the start opening game times. Therefore, if the second start opening game times are executed during the execution of the first start opening game times, whether or not the presentation of the second start opening game times is based on the elapsed time of the first start opening game times. By making the player infer whether or not the first start opening game round was executed before the first start opening gaming round, that is, whether or not It is possible to guess whether or not the special bonus process is executed in the game round for one start opening, and a great expectation can be given to the player.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can display the first liquid crystal design depending on the state in which the first start opening game round is executed even if the first start opening game round is won. There are cases where the process of exchanging the display area for displaying and the display area for displaying the second liquid crystal design is executed or not executed. Specifically, in the case where the specific probability variation jackpot is won before the first winning game game winning the jackpot is executed, the first starting game game winning the jackpot is started. In response to this, the display area for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is switched. On the other hand, in the state where the jackpot other than the specific probability variable jackpot is won before the first winning game game winning the jackpot is executed, the first gaming game game winning the jackpot is started. As a result, the process of switching the display area for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is not performed. Therefore, by allowing the player to recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, is the state in which the first start opening game round is executed after the game round won for the specific probability variation jackpot? Or it can be made to guess whether it is after the game time which won the jackpot other than the specific probability variation jackpot. As a result, by allowing the player to recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to cause the player to guess whether or not the special bonus process is to be performed, thereby giving a great sense of expectation. Further, by performing an effect using whether or not display areas can be replaced, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not a special bonus process will be executed.

B6. Modification of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are possible. In the modification described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those in the above embodiment is omitted.

B6-1. Modification 1:
In the second embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first starting game game won in the jackpot is made at the start of the first starting game game that executes the special bonus process. Therefore, it may be performed, or may be performed based on the jackpot type in the first start opening game times. That is, in the above-described embodiment, whether or not the special bonus process is executed in the first start opening game number won in the jackpot is determined based on the first start opening game number (post-execution first). It was determined based on whether or not the specific probability variable jackpot was won in the first starting game (winning first starting game) that was won the jackpot executed before the starting game). However, in this modified example, the jackpot type in the first execution game game for the first execution opening is not referred to, the determination based on the jackpot type in the first execution game for the first start opening, or the game execution for the first execution of the first execution opening Judgment by lottery at the start of By doing in this way, it is not necessary to execute a process (for example, storage by a flag) for storing the jackpot type of the first start-up game times that was executed first and won the jackpot, thereby reducing the processing load. Can be planned.

  In addition, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot can be set as the types of jackpots, and if the winning jackpot is won in the first start opening game round, then the probability variation big hit or the normal jackpot in the first starting opening game round. A configuration may be adopted in which special bonus processing is executed at the timing of winning. By doing so, it is not necessary to set a jackpot type such as a specific probability variation jackpot and a specific probability variation jackpot flag, and the processing can be simplified.

  In addition, when the type of high-frequency support mode is set as the jackpot type, and the high-frequency support mode set in the game times executed after winning the jackpot and the opening / closing execution mode ends is a specific high-frequency support mode A configuration may be adopted in which special bonus processing is executed when a big win is won in the first start opening game times during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode. Specifically, as the jackpot type, the 10R probability variation jackpot A in which the high frequency support mode A in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is the pattern A is executed, and the high frequency in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is the pattern B. A configuration is adopted in which the 10R probability variation jackpot B in which the support mode B is executed can be set. Then, for example, a configuration is adopted in which special bonus processing is executed when a big win is won in the first start opening game times during execution of the high-frequency support mode B. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment are obtained. Further, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a during execution of the high frequency support mode.

B6-2. Modification 2:
In the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the first start opening game round. However, the support mode is reduced at the start of the first start opening game round. You may employ | adopt the structure which performs the process which switches from frequency support mode to high frequency support mode. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive disadvantage of the player during the execution of the first start opening game.

B6-3. Modification 3:
In the above embodiment, the special bonus process is started at the start of the first symbol variation of the first start opening game times won in the jackpot, but as a modification, the first start opening game times won in the jackpot A configuration may be adopted in which the first symbol variation display ends and the first symbol stops. That is, in the period from the time when the first symbol variation of the first starting game game won in the jackpot is stopped until the display of the stopped first symbol is ended (hereinafter also referred to as a stop display period). A configuration for executing the special bonus process may be employed. Specifically, from the setting method in which the setting method of the variation time of the game time for the second start opening is changed at the start of the stop display period, and a relatively long time (5 minutes to 10 minutes) is set as the variation time, Switch to a setting method in which a relatively short time (2 to 5 seconds) is set. Then, at the start of the stop display period, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. In addition, the stop display period when executing the special bonus process is set to a relatively long time such as 30 seconds to 1 minute. By doing in this way, the structure of the said modification can be implement | achieved.

B6-4. Modification 4:
In the above embodiment, when winning a promising jackpot, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode from the end of the opening / closing execution mode executed after the winning game times, and the high probability mode until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and as a modified example, when winning a promising big hit, the lottery mode is a high probability mode from the end of the opening / closing execution mode executed after the winning game round. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which a low probability mode is entered after a predetermined number of game times have been executed. That is, there is a limit on the number of game times executed in the high probability mode. In this way, for example, when winning a specific probability variation jackpot, if a bonus is won after that, a special bonus process is executed, but the configuration of this modification is a game cycle that can be executed in the high probability mode Since there is a limit on the number of times, the special bonus process is not executed unless a big win is won by the time the limited number of games are executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency and agitation during the period in which the game is won in the specific probability variation jackpot and the game times are subsequently executed in the high probability mode, and it is possible to give an emotional inflection.

B6-5. Modification 5:
In the above-described embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is executed after the jackpot of any jackpot type is won in the first start game. Therefore, during the period in which the high-frequency support mode is being executed, the player can have a sense of expectation during the high-frequency support mode by executing an effect that suggests the winning jackpot jackpot type. For example, in the period when the high-frequency support mode is being executed, if an effect is performed that suggests that the winning jackpot type of the winning jackpot is a 10R specific probability variation jackpot or a 10R probability variation jackpot, On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility that the special bonus process may be started when the jackpot is won next.

  In addition, during the period in which the high-frequency support mode is being executed, if the effect that suggests that the winning jackpot type is 10R specific probability variation jackpot or 8R normal jackpot is executed, A player who recognizes that the transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start is due to the fact that the transition to the support mode is due to the start of the special bonus process. It is difficult to determine whether the number of games to be executed (100 times) has ended, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

B6-6. Modification 6:
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type in the first start opening game round that was previously won in the big jackpot is a specific probability variation jackpot, it is triggered by the first start opening game round executed later. As described above, the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first start opening game, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, regardless of the jackpot type in the first starting game game won previously, the jackpot in the executed first starting game game, or a jackpot of a specific jackpot type As an opportunity, you may employ | adopt the structure which switches a high frequency support mode to a low frequency support mode at the time of the start of the said 1st start opening game time. In this way, a player who recognizes that the high frequency support mode has been switched to the low frequency support mode can be given a sense of expectation for the progress of the subsequent game.

B6-7. Modification 7:
In the above embodiment, the process at the start of the first start opening game round won in the jackpot depends on whether the jackpot type in the first start opening game round previously won in the jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot. It is determined whether or not the special bonus process is started at the start of the first start game game winning the jackpot, but not limited to such a configuration, Based on this, another configuration may be adopted as long as it determines the processing at the start of the game round that was won later. For example, if the jackpot type in the game win that was won first is a promising jackpot, a configuration that starts a specific effect at the start of the game win that won the jackpot later, and the high-frequency support mode is infrequently supported Various configurations such as a configuration for switching to a mode, a configuration for switching a low-frequency support mode to a high-frequency support mode, and a configuration for changing a game time variation time setting method may be adopted.

B6-8. Modification 8:
In the present embodiment, with the start of the special bonus process, the variation time of the game time for the second start opening is high despite the fact that the average value of the variation time set compared to other periods is short. Although the frequency support mode has been switched to low frequency support, the frequency support mode is not limited to such a configuration, and the high frequency support mode is changed even though the average value of the variation time of the game times set based on a specific trigger is shortened. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration is switched to the low frequency support. For example, with the transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the change method of the change time is switched so that the average value of the change time of the set game times is shortened, and the high frequency support mode is set to the low frequency mode. You may employ | adopt the structure switched to support. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player.

B6-9. Modification 9:
In the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first start opening game round, especially when the big win is won and the special bonus process is executed in the first start opening game round, the first start opening The second start opening game times executed during the period in which the game times are executed are executed in the second start opening game times with respect to the second start opening game times executed in other periods. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, but is not limited to such a configuration, and the game for the second start port that is executed during the period from the start to the end of the first game for the first start port. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the effect to be executed in the times is determined based on the design (lottery result) corresponding to the first game for the first start opening. For example, in the case where the lottery result corresponding to the first first opening game game is a promising big hit and in the case of a normal jackpot, the first starting game game ends and ends. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which effects (or setting methods for effects) executed in the second start-up game times executed during the period until this time are different. Even in this case, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the first start opening game times by using the effect executed in the second start opening game times.

B6-10. Modification 10:
In the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a bonus is awarded to the player in the form of special bonus processing during the period when the first start opening game round that has been won by the jackpot is executed. Other configurations may be adopted as long as a privilege is given to the player during the period in which the game is being played. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a privilege is given to the player by switching from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode during the execution of the first start-up game round winning the jackpot. In addition, the pachinko machine in the present embodiment is a so-called simultaneous variable pachinko machine in which the first start opening game time and the second start opening game time are executed in parallel. A pachinko machine in which the game times and the game times for the second start opening are executed exclusively may be adopted. In this case, during the execution of the first start-up game round winning the jackpot, the low-frequency support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode, and it becomes easier for a game ball to enter the second start-up port. You may employ | adopt the structure which pays out a prize ball when a game ball enters into the said 2nd starting port.

B6-11. Modification 11:
In the above embodiment, the elapsed time information (remaining time RT) that is information related to the elapsed time (including the remaining time of the first starting opening game time) from the start of the first starting opening game time to the predetermined timing. And, based on the elapsed time information, an effect corresponding to the second start opening game time executed during the period in which the first start opening game time is being acquired. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration is set. For example, based on the remaining time of the first start opening game times, information corresponding to the remaining time is displayed in the second start opening game times executed during the period in which the first start opening game times are executed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that suggests that more time than the remaining time of the actual first start game time remains as the remaining time is executed based on the actual remaining time. Even if it does in this way, with respect to the player who recognized the production | generation corresponding to the executed 2nd start opening game times, the elapsed time after the 1st start opening game times are executed, The remaining time until the game times are completed can be estimated, and a sense of expectation for the first start port game times can be indirectly given through an effect corresponding to the second start port game times.

B6-12. Modification 12:
In the above embodiment, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, the change in the design of the first start opening game times won in the second start opening game times is won in the second start opening game times. You may employ | adopt the structure which stops on the occasion of having performed. In this way, a sense of urgency can be given to the player.

B6-13. Modification 13:
In the above embodiment, when the second start opening game times are executed while the first start opening game times are changed, the second start opening game times are won. Even if it is set to stop with a symbol indicating that the jackpot is not won, if it wins the jackpot, it stops with a symbol indicating that the jackpot is won However, only if you win a specific jackpot, it will stop with the design that indicates that you have won the jackpot, and if you win other bonuses, you will win the jackpot You may employ | adopt the structure set so that it may stop by the symbol which shows not doing.

B6-14. Modification 14:
In the above-described embodiment, in the state where the first winning opening game round is won with a specific probability variation jackpot, when the first starting slot game round is won, that is, a special bonus process is executed. In such a case, a configuration is employed in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and other configurations may be employed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched when a game win that wins a jackpot is executed in the high probability mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched when a game win that wins a jackpot is executed in the frequency support mode. In addition, a display for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol when a game win that wins a big jackpot is executed in a state where a specific jackpot has been won in the previously executed game round. You may employ | adopt the structure which an area | region switches. In addition, the target of the symbol for which the display area is switched is not limited to the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, but the first liquid crystal symbol and the symbol for the electric character opening lottery, the second liquid crystal symbol and the electric symbol. It may be a symbol for open lottery. Even in this case, by causing the player to recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to make the player make various assumptions and to give the player a sense of expectation.

B6-15. Modification 15:
In the above embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the upper limit value of the amount of the privilege given as the privilege, that is, the number of times that the second start-up game times that can be won in small wins can be executed. Was determined based on the length of variation time of the first start game time corresponding to the special bonus process, but the upper limit value of the amount of benefits is the variation of game times that satisfies a specific condition. Other configurations may be adopted as long as they are determined based on the length of time. For example, the upper limit value of the number of game balls that can enter the second start opening during execution of the first start opening game round is determined based on the length of variation time of the first start opening game round. A configuration may be adopted. Even in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player wants to acquire as many benefits as the end of the game round approaches, and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the game round. Can give inflection to emotions.

C. Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right by generating a right, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  Also, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the reel rotation is started by the insertion of medals and the operation of the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, a part of the function realized by software may be realized by hardware, or a part of the function realized by hardware may be realized by software.

D. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc .:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
In the game times, provided with changing means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment),
The changing means is
A game machine comprising: a change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulation point) so as to reach a preset threshold (10 points).

  According to the feature A1, since the change control means for changing the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold value in the game round is provided, the player can change the predetermined amount until the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value. Can be noticed. Further, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the game after the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to feature A1,
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment);
The specific process executing means includes
When the special information corresponding to the gaming times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing in the gaming times is performed more than when the special information corresponding to the gaming times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of running is high,
The change control means includes
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulation point) reaches the threshold (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing as described above.

  According to the feature A2, when the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific information corresponding to the game times executes the specific process in the game times than when the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the player by executing a specific process. Further, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the change control unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold value until the specific process is executed. Every time the predetermined amount is changed, the player can be given a sense of expectation. Therefore, expectation can be given to the player step by step by changing the predetermined amount and executing the specific process.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
And a reset unit that executes a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value when the game round ends. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature A3, since the reset means for executing the reset process for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game time to the preset initial value when the game time is ended is provided, until the game time is ended. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation so that the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value. In addition, it is possible to make the player who recognizes that the game turn has started and the predetermined amount has started to change conscious of the time when the game turn ends, and to pay attention to the manner in which the predetermined amount changes.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A3,
The reset means includes
In the first case (when the game time is not a carry-over game time), the predetermined amount (accumulation point) changed in the game time is returned to the initial value at the end of the game time, and in the second case In the case where the game time is a carry-over game time, means for not returning the predetermined amount (accumulation point) changed in the game time to an initial value (carrying over the accumulation point) at the end of the game time. A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  According to the feature A4, the predetermined amount may return to the initial value at the end of the game time, or may not return, so even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game time And giving the player a sense of expectation that the predetermined amount is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round, and that the predetermined quantity may reach the threshold at the next game round. Can do. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the game round ends.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to feature A3 or feature A4,
The reset means includes
Based on the special information corresponding to the second game time executed after the first game time, a reset execution for determining whether or not to execute the reset process triggered by the end of the first game time A gaming machine comprising a control means.

  According to the feature A5, based on the special information corresponding to the second game time executed after the first game time, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process when the first game time is ended. Therefore, the mode of returning or maintaining the predetermined amount to the initial value can be a mode having relevance over a plurality of game times. That is, in addition to giving a sense of expectation in the first game time to a player who has recognized a change in a predetermined amount in the first game time, further giving a sense of expectation in the second game time. And can create new playability.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5,
A reset process execution suggesting means (stage) that suggests whether or not the reset means returns the initial value to the initial value at the end of the predetermined game time as a trigger when the predetermined amount has changed in the predetermined game time. A game machine having a function of executing display control processing.

  According to the feature A6, the reset means suggests whether or not the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round is returned to the initial value when the predetermined game round ends. For a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round as suggested by the processing execution suggestion means, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value becomes the threshold value in the next game round. It can give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
Specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by the change means being changed;
Reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
With
The reset means includes
In the first case (when the game time is not a carry-over game time), the predetermined amount changed in the game time is returned to the initial value at the end of the game time, and in the second case (when the game time is In the case of a carry-over gaming time), the gaming machine comprises means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the gaming time to an initial value when the gaming time ends.

  According to the feature B1, the predetermined amount may return to the initial value at the end of the game round, or may not return, so that the player pays attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of the game round. be able to. Even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round, the predetermined amount is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the amount may reach a threshold value. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the game round ends.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature B1,
The reset means includes
Based on the special information corresponding to the second game time executed after the first game time, a reset execution for determining whether or not to execute the reset process triggered by the end of the first game time Provided with control means (effect information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B2, whether or not to execute the reset process triggered by the end of the first game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Therefore, the aspect in which the predetermined amount is changed can be an aspect having relevance over a plurality of game times. That is, in addition to giving a sense of expectation in the first game time to a player who has recognized a change in a predetermined amount in the first game time, further giving a sense of expectation in the second game time. And can create new playability.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2,
When the predetermined game number at which the predetermined amount (accumulation point) reaches the threshold value (10 points) is the third game time,
The specific process executing means includes
Based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game time executed after the third game time, the specific process (button pressing effect) is executed in the third game time or the third game time. Specific process execution control means for deciding whether to execute in game times executed after game times (effect information setting processing in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B3, based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game time executed after the third game time, the specific process is executed in the third game time or after the third game time. Since it is determined whether or not to execute in the game times to be executed, it is possible to give relevance over a plurality of game times with respect to the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, based on the timing at which the specific process is executed, various assumptions are made to the player regarding the special information corresponding to the third game time and the special information corresponding to the game time executed after the third game time. Can be made. For example, even when a specific process is not executed in a game time, various processes such as a speculation that a specific process may not be executed in the game time because the specific process is executed in the next game time. The guess can be made to the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

  According to the feature B4, since the specific effect is executed as the specific process, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game times. Moreover, a player can be given a sense of expectation by executing a specific performance.

[Feature B5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4,
It has an operation receiving means (production operation button) that accepts input operations from players,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after the button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

  According to the feature B5, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a process set in advance when the input operation is accepted, and therefore the timing at which the player is expected to be expected by executing the specific process. Therefore, by actively engaging the player in the game through the input operation, the player can be further paid attention and the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

[Feature B6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
A gaming machine comprising: a predetermined amount display means (a function for executing point accumulation processing / a function for displaying an image of a pearl on a stage) for displaying corresponding to the predetermined amount (accumulation point).

  According to the feature B6, since the predetermined amount display means for displaying corresponding to the predetermined amount is provided, the player can always be aware of the predetermined amount, and can be focused on the game.

[Feature B7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6,
A reset process execution suggesting unit that suggests in the predetermined game round whether or not the reset unit returns the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to an initial value when the predetermined game round ends. (Production information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B7, the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round indicates whether or not the reset means returns to the initial value at the end of the predetermined game round. For a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round as suggested by the processing execution suggestion means, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value becomes the threshold value in the next game round. It can give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
Specific processing execution means for executing specific processing (button pressing effect in the first embodiment);
With
The changing means is
When the specific process execution unit executes the specific process (button press effect), the predetermined amount is changed so as to reach a preset threshold value before the specific process is executed. A game machine comprising a change control means.

  According to the characteristic C1, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the change unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Therefore, every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount, the player can be given a sense of expectation.

[Feature C2]
A gaming machine according to feature C1,
The changing means includes a change amount determining means for determining the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game time based on special information corresponding to a second game time executed after the first game time. Provided (production information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C2, the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. The predetermined amount which changes can be made into the aspect which has relevance over several game times. That is, in addition to giving a sense of expectation in the first game time to a player who has recognized a change in a predetermined amount in the first game time, further giving a sense of expectation in the second game time. And can create new playability.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The changing means includes change timing determining means for determining a timing for changing the predetermined amount in a game time based on special information corresponding to the game time (effect information setting process and effect setting in the first embodiment). processing)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C3, since the timing for changing the predetermined amount in the game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round, the special information that determines the variation time of the game round and other special information are used. The predetermined amount can be changed at a timing adapted to various factors to be determined.

[Feature C4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3,
Reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value triggered by the end of the game round;
The reset means includes
Means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process triggered by the end of the first game round based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round; Provided (production information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C4, based on the special information corresponding to the second game time executed after the first game time, it is determined whether or not the reset process is executed when the first game time is ended. Therefore, the mode of returning or maintaining the predetermined amount to the initial value can be a mode having relevance over a plurality of game times. That is, in addition to giving a sense of expectation in the first game time to a player who has recognized a change in a predetermined amount in the first game time, further giving a sense of expectation in the second game time. And can create new playability.

[Feature C5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4,
A reset means for executing a reset process for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game times to a preset initial value triggered by the end of the game times;
The reset means includes
Based on the special information corresponding to the game times, there is provided means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process triggered by the end of the game times (effect information setting process in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature C5, based on the special information corresponding to the game time, it is determined whether or not the reset process is executed at the end of the game time. Therefore, the special information that determines the variation time of the game time, In consideration of various factors determined by other special information, it is possible to determine whether or not to return the predetermined amount changed in the game times to the initial value.

[Feature C6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

  According to the feature C6, since the specific effect is executed as the specific process, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game times. Moreover, a player can be given a sense of expectation by executing a specific performance.

[Feature C7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6,
It has an operation receiving means (production operation button) that accepts input operations from players,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after the button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

  According to the feature C7, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a process set in advance when the input operation is accepted. Therefore, the timing at which the player has a sense of expectation through the execution of the specific process Thus, by actively allowing the player to be involved in the game through the input operation, the player can be more focused on the game, and the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
Specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect) when the predetermined amount (accumulation point) reaches a preset threshold (10 points) by changing the change means;
Time suggesting means (point filling control) for executing a time suggesting process (timer effect) suggesting a time until the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value Processing function), and
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature D1, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, the time suggesting unit for executing the time suggesting process for suggesting the time until the specific process is executed is provided, and thus the specific process is executed. May give a player a sense of expectation regarding a specific process executed after the suggested time has elapsed during the period from the time until it can. In addition, since the time suggesting means suggests that the time until the specific process is executed as time elapses, the player's expectation can be increased as time elapses.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine according to feature D1,
When the game time when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is the first game time,
The time suggestion means (function to execute the control process at the time of point filling)
In the first case, the execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) is started in the first game time,
In the second case, in the second game time which is a game time executed after the first game time without starting execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) in the first game time. A gaming machine comprising: means for starting execution of the time suggestion process.

  According to the feature D2, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value in the first game time, the execution of the time suggestion process is executed in the first game time and after the first game time. By recognizing whether or not the time suggestion process is executed in the game time when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, the game time may be executed in the second game time. The player can be given pleasure to guess when a specific process is executed.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D2,
The first case is a case where the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect) in the first game round.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second case is a case where the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect) in a game time executed after the first game time.

  According to the feature D3, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and the execution of the time suggestion process is started in the first game time, the player is notified in the first game time. It is possible to recognize that a specific process is executed and to give a player a sense of expectation for the first game round. Further, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and the execution of the time suggestion process is not started in the first game time, the game after the first game time is given to the player. It is possible to recognize that a specific process is executed at the time, and to give the player a sense of expectation for the subsequent game times.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
When the game times at which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is the third game time,
The specific process executing means includes
Based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game time executed after the third game time, the specific process is executed in the third game time or after the third game time. A game machine, comprising: a specific process execution control means for determining whether to execute the game in a game.

  According to the feature D4, the relevance over a plurality of game times can be given with respect to the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, based on the timing at which the time suggestion process suggesting the time until the specific process is executed, the player can guess which game times can be expected, and a new game performance can be obtained. Can be created.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

  According to the feature D5, since the specific effect is executed as the specific process, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game times. Moreover, a player can be given a sense of expectation by executing a specific performance.

[Feature D6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5,
It has an operation receiving means (production operation button) that accepts input operations from players,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (an effect executed after the button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

  According to the feature D6, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a process set in advance when the input operation is accepted. Therefore, the timing at which the player is expected to be expected by executing the specific process. Therefore, by actively engaging the player in the game through the input operation, the player can be further paid attention and the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
A first process execution means for executing a first process (stand-by effect) when a specific condition is satisfied (when 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated in the first embodiment);
A second process execution means for executing a second process (timer effect) when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated);
With
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round,
The first process execution means includes:
When the second process execution means executes the second process (timer effect) in the second game time executed after the first game time, the first game time in the first game time. Process (standby production)
When the second process execution means executes the second process (timer effect) in the first game round, the first process (standby effect) is not executed. .

  According to the characteristic E1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the second process is executed in the second game round, the specific condition is satisfied. There is a period until the second process is executed. In such a case, since the first process execution means executes the first process in the first game round, even in a period that occurs from when the specific condition is satisfied until the second process is executed. The player can be made aware that the second process will be executed later, and the expectation for the second process can be maintained.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine according to feature E1,
When the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated), a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect) is provided,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the specific process (button pressing effect) is executed in the first game round, the second game is performed in the first game round. Processing (timer effect) is executed,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the specific process (button press effect) is executed in the second game round, the second game round includes the second game round. A gaming machine characterized in that processing (timer effect) is executed.

  According to feature E2, when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game round, the player executes the specific process by recognizing in which game round the second process is executed. The game times to be played can be estimated, so that the player can concentrate on the timing at which the second process is executed, and expect the player who has recognized the execution of the second process. A feeling can be imparted.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E2,
The specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect) in the first game time based on the special information corresponding to the second game time, or in the second game time, the A gaming machine comprising a specific process execution control means for determining whether to execute a specific process (button press effect).

  According to the feature E3, the specific process is executed in the first game time or executed in the second game time based on the special information corresponding to the second game time executed after the first game time. Since it is determined whether or not to perform, it is possible to give relevance over a plurality of game times with respect to the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, the player who has recognized the execution of the second process can be made to guess the timing at which the specific process is executed, and the special information in each game round is based on the timing at which the estimated specific process is executed. Can be made to guess whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can be made to guess whether or not the special information in each game round satisfies a predetermined condition by various factors, and the player's expectation can be maintained.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to feature E2 or feature E3,
The second process (timer effect) is performed until the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated). A gaming machine characterized by time-related processing.

  According to the feature E4, after the time until the specific process is executed after the time until the specific process is executed by the execution of the second process is executed, the execution is performed after the suggested time has elapsed. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation regarding the specific processing to be performed. Further, since it is suggested that the time until the specific process is executed is shortened with the passage of time, the player's expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The first process (standby effect) is a process that suggests that the second process (timer effect) is executed.

  According to the feature E5, since the first process is a process that suggests that the second process is executed, the player who recognizes that the first process has been executed is An expectation can be given about execution of processing.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
In the game times, provided with changing means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment),
The changing means is
When the first process (predetermined effect in the first modification of the first embodiment) is executed in the game times, the predetermined amount is set after the first process of the game times is executed. There are cases where it is changed and cases where the predetermined amount is not changed,
When the second process (specific effect in the first modification of the first embodiment) is executed in the game times, the predetermined amount is set after the second process of the game times is executed. A gaming machine that is characterized by changes.

  According to the feature F1, when the second process is executed in a game time, the predetermined amount always changes in the game time. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the execution of the process and to draw attention to the game. In addition, when the second process is executed, it is possible to give a sense of excitement to a player who desires a predetermined amount of change, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect);
The changing means is
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect), the predetermined amount (accumulation point) is set to a predetermined threshold (10) before the specific process is executed. A game machine characterized by comprising change control means for changing to reach a point).

  According to the feature F2, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the change unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold value until the specific process is executed. Therefore, every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount, the player can be given a sense of expectation. In addition, when the second process is executed, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the second process has been executed has a specific process. A sense of expectation about execution can be given.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F2,
When the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process (in the game times) is more specific than the case where the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability that a button press effect will be executed.

  According to the feature F3, a great sense of expectation can be given to the player by executing a specific process. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation step by step by executing the second process, a predetermined amount change, and the specific process.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to Feature F3,
The first process is a predetermined effect (a predetermined effect in the first modification of the first embodiment),
The gaming machine, wherein the second process is a specific effect set in advance (specific effect in Modification 1 of the first embodiment).

  According to the feature F4, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effects executed in the game times. And when a specific production is performed, a big expectation and a feeling of uplifting can be given to a player.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F4,
It has an operation receiving means (production operation button) that accepts input operations from players,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (effect executed after the button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

  According to feature F5, since the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a process set in advance when the input operation is accepted, timing at which a player has a sense of expectation by executing the specific process Therefore, by actively engaging the player in the game through the input operation, the player can be further paid attention and the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
A predetermined process executing means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for executing a predetermined process (granting points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
The predetermined process execution means includes
In the case where the mode of the game times is the first mode, there are a case where the predetermined process is executed and a case where the predetermined process is not executed in the game times executed after the game time.
When the game times are in the second mode, the predetermined process is always executed in the game times executed after the game times.

  According to the feature G1, when the game mode is the second mode, the predetermined process is always executed in the game times executed after the game time. On the other hand, a sense of expectation can be given to the mode in the game times, and a game in the game times can be noted. If the game mode is the second mode, the predetermined process is executed in the game times executed after the game time for the player who wished to execute the predetermined process. In addition to being able to give a sense of expectation, it is possible to give a sense of excitement and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G2]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
The predetermined process execution means includes
In the game times, provided with changing means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment),
The changing means (the function of executing the point giving effect in the second modification of the first embodiment)
In the case where the mode of the game times is the first mode, in the game times executed after the game times, there are cases where the predetermined amount is changed and cases where the predetermined amount is not changed,
In the case where the game mode is the second mode, the predetermined amount is necessarily changed in a game cycle executed after the game cycle.

  According to the feature G2, when the game mode is the second mode, the predetermined amount always changes in the game times executed after the game time. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the mode at the game time and to pay attention to the game at the game time. In addition, when the mode of the game times is the second mode, the predetermined amount changes in the game times executed after the game times for the player who wanted the change of the predetermined amount. As well as being able to give a sense of expectation, it is possible to give a sense of uplifting and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G2,
Reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
The first mode of the game times is a mode in which the reset unit returns the predetermined amount to an initial value when the game times are ended.
The second aspect of the gaming times is an aspect in which the reset means does not return the predetermined amount to the initial value when the gaming times end.

  According to the feature G3, when the reset means does not return the predetermined amount to the initial value at the end of the game round, the predetermined quantity always changes in the game round executed after the game round. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to a player who desires a change in the predetermined amount that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value when the game round ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even at the end of the game round. In addition, when the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, a predetermined number of game rounds executed after the game round for the player who wanted to change the predetermined quantity In addition to being able to give a sense of expectation about the amount of change, it is possible to give a sense of excitement and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3,
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect);
The changing means is
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, change control means for changing the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  According to the characteristic G4, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the change unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold value until the specific process is executed. Therefore, every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount, the player can be given a sense of expectation. In addition, if the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round executed after the game round. As a result, a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount has not returned to the initial value can be given a sense of expectation regarding the execution of a specific process.

[Feature G5]
A gaming machine according to Feature G4,
When the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process (in the game times) is more specific than the case where the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability that a button press effect will be executed.

  According to the feature G5, a great expectation can be given to the player by executing a specific process. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in stages by the presence / absence of the reset process, the change in the predetermined amount, and the execution of the specific process.

[Feature G6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5,
A reset process execution suggesting means (stage) that suggests whether or not the reset means returns the initial value to the initial value at the end of the predetermined game time as a trigger when the predetermined amount has changed in the predetermined game time. A game machine having a function of executing display control processing.

  According to the feature G6, the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round indicates whether the reset means returns to the initial value at the end of the predetermined game round. Due to the suggestion by the process execution suggestion means, for a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game time, the predetermined amount always changes in game times after the predetermined game time. It is possible to give an expectation that the predetermined amount that has not returned to the initial value may reach a threshold value at a game time after the predetermined game time.

[Feature G7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G4 to G6,
It has an operation receiving means (production operation button) that accepts input operations from players,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (effect executed after the button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

  According to the characteristic G7, the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a process set in advance when the input operation is accepted, so that the timing when the player is expected to be expected by executing the specific process Therefore, by actively engaging the player in the game through the input operation, the player can be further paid attention and the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Predetermined processing execution means for executing predetermined processing in the game times;
Prior to the predetermined process executing means executing the predetermined process, predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (point giving effect);
With
The predetermined process execution means includes
A non-execution means for executing a non-execution process (a point grant effect with 0 grant points) that does not execute the predetermined process even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature H1, the predetermined process execution means includes the non-execution means for executing the non-execution process that does not execute the predetermined process even though the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect. It is possible to make a player who recognizes that no has been executed not expect the non-execution process to be executed. In addition, when the non-execution process is not executed, the player can be given a sense of excitement, and when the non-execution process is executed, the player is discouraged. That is, depending on whether or not the non-execution process is executed, an inflection can be given to the player's expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
The predetermined process execution means includes
As the predetermined process, a change means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulation point in the first embodiment) in the game times,
The non-execution means is
There is provided a non-change means for executing a non-change process that does not change the predetermined amount even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature H2, since the non-change means for executing the non-change process that does not change the predetermined amount is provided even though the predetermined effect executing means has executed the predetermined effect, the fact that the predetermined effect has been executed is provided. The recognized player can be expected not to execute the unchanged process. Further, when the unchanged process is not executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement, and when the unchanged process is executed, the player is discouraged. In other words, depending on whether or not the unchanged process is executed, an inflection can be given to the player's expectation and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
Reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value triggered by the end of the game round;
There is an upper limit on the number of times that the non-change means executes the non-change process (point giving effect with 0 points given) during the period from the start of game play to when the reset means executes the reset process. (Modification 3 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature H3, since there is an upper limit on the number of times the non-change means executes the non-change process during the period from the start of the game time until the reset means executes the reset process, It is possible to give a strong expectation that a predetermined effect is executed to a player who has recognized that the number of executions has reached the upper limit. This is because when the number of executions of the unchanged process reaches the upper limit, the predetermined amount always changes when a predetermined effect is executed. Therefore, even when the unchanged process is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of executions will reach the upper limit. That is, when a predetermined effect is executed, if the unchanged process is not executed, the predetermined amount changes, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of elevation, and the unchanged process is executed. Even in this case, the player can be given a sense of expectation (a sense of expectation regarding the number of executions reaching the upper limit). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation regardless of whether the unchanged process is not executed or the unchanged process is executed.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to Feature H2 or Feature H3,
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process;
The specific process executing means includes
When the special information corresponding to the gaming times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing in the gaming times is performed more than when the special information corresponding to the gaming times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of running is high,
The changing means is
When the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the specific process execution unit includes a change control unit that changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature H4, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the change unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Since the change control means is provided, the player can be given an expectation every time the change means changes the predetermined amount. Further, by executing a specific process, it is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the player. Accordingly, the player can be given a sense of expectation step by step by a predetermined performance, presence / absence of unchanged processing, number of executions of unchanged processing, change of a predetermined amount, and execution of specific processing. it can.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to Feature H3 or Feature H4,
The reset means includes
In the first case (when the game time is not a carry-over game time), the predetermined amount changed in the game time is returned to the initial value at the end of the game time, and in the second case (when the game time is In the case of a carry-over gaming time), the gaming machine comprises means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the gaming time to an initial value when the gaming time ends.

  According to the feature H5, the predetermined amount may return to the initial value when the game round ends, or may not return, so even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold during the game round The predetermined amount is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game time, but is maintained until the next game time, and the player can be expected to reach the threshold value at the next game time. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the game round ends.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A first specific process executing means for executing a first specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by changing the change means; ,
A second specific process execution means for executing a second specific process (unfilled effect in the modified example 4 of the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold;
With
When the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed, the amount of change (accumulation point) from the initial value of the predetermined amount before the second specific process is executed is The special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition when the second change amount is larger than the first change amount than when it is the first change amount. A gaming machine characterized by high expectations.

  According to the feature I1, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, the predetermined amount is obtained when the second specific process is executed. As the amount of change from the initial value increases, the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher, and a sense of expectation can be given to the player. That is, when the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, and the amount of change from the initial value of the predetermined amount is relatively large, the second specific It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation that the process is executed.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
In the first specific process (button pressing effect), the special information corresponding to the gaming times satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the gaming times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a higher probability of being executed.

  According to the feature I2, it is possible to give a strong sense of expectation to the player who has recognized that the first specific process has been executed that the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition. it can. In addition, since the first specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2,
The content of the second specific process (unfilled effect) differs depending on the predetermined amount (accumulation point) before the second specific process is executed (in the first embodiment). Modification 4)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature I3, the content of the process varies depending on the predetermined amount before the second specific process is executed. Therefore, the second specific process can be performed regardless of the predetermined amount. A player can be paid attention to the content, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
After the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed, a third specific process executing means is provided for executing a third specific process (unfilled development effect in the modified example 4 of the first embodiment). ,
In the game times, the case where the third specific process (unfilled development effect) is executed is more suitable for the game time than the case where the first specific process (button press effect) is executed. There is a high expectation that the corresponding special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to feature I4, when the third specific process is executed, the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition, compared to the case where the first specific process is executed. Expectation is high. Therefore, even when the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, when the second specific process is executed, It is possible to give a strong expectation that the third specific process is executed. Further, when the third specific process is executed, the expectation that the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than when the first specific process is executed. It is possible to give a stronger sense of expectation to the player who has recognized that the third specific process has been executed. In summary, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, the first specific process is executed, so that the player can be given a sense of expectation, and the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value. However, when the second specific process is executed, the player is given a sense of expectation, and when the second specific process is executed, the third specific process is executed. This can give a strong sense of expectation to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regardless of the situation of the game.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
A game times display means for displaying a game times display which is a display indicating one game time being held or executed;
Display mode changing means for executing a display mode changing process for changing the display mode of the game times display being displayed (function of executing a process for changing the display mode of the game times display in the modified example 5 of the first embodiment); ,
A predetermined process executing means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for executing a predetermined process (granting points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
With
The timing at which the display mode changing unit executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the predetermined process execution unit executes the predetermined process have a temporal correlation.

  According to the feature J1, the player's expectation can be increased in a synergistic manner by executing the change in the display mode of the game times display and the execution of the predetermined process while correlating the timing. it can.

[Feature J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
The predetermined process execution means includes
A change means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulation point in the first embodiment) in game times (modification 5 in the first embodiment);
The timing at which the display mode changing unit executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the changing unit changes the predetermined amount have a temporal correlation.

  According to the feature J2, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation by executing a change in the display mode of the game times display and a predetermined amount of change with a correlation in timing. it can.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J2,
The changing means is
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined amount is changed within a predetermined time after the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process.

  According to the feature J3, the player who has recognized that the display mode of the game times display has changed and has increased expectation can further recognize that the predetermined amount has changed within a predetermined time period. A stronger sense of expectation and uplifting feeling can be imparted.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to feature J2,
The timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the changing means changes the predetermined amount are simultaneous.

  According to the feature J4, the player's sense of expectation can be synergistically increased by causing the player to simultaneously recognize the change in the display mode of the game times display and the change in the predetermined amount.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to feature J2,
The display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process within a predetermined time after the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

  According to the feature J5, the player who has recognized that the predetermined amount has changed and has increased his / her expectation further recognizes that the display mode of the game times display has changed within a predetermined time. A stronger sense of expectation and uplifting feeling can be imparted.

[Feature J6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J5,
The display mode of the game times display after the display mode changing means has changed and the predetermined amount of change changed by the changing means have a correlation (Modification 5 in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature J6, the display mode changing means has a correlation between the display mode of the game times display after the display mode changing means has changed and the predetermined amount of change changed by the changing means. When the display mode of the game times display after the change is a mode that meets the player's expectation, and when the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the change means is large, for the player, A stronger sense of expectation and superiority can be imparted.

[Feature J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J6,
The display mode changing means includes
When the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition, the display mode of the game times display is changed to the second display mode rather than changing the display mode of the game times display to the first display mode. The probability of changing to the display mode is high,
When the display mode changing means changes the game time display to the first display mode, the change amount of the predetermined amount that is changed by the changing means is set as a first change amount,
When the display mode changing means changes the game time display to the second display mode, the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the changing means is a second change amount.
The average value of the second change amount is larger than the average value of the first change amount (Modification 5 in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature J7, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, there is a high probability that the display mode of the game times display is changed to the second display mode, and the display mode changing means further displays the game times display. When the display mode is changed to the first display mode, the change amount of the predetermined amount is often larger than when the display mode is changed to the first display mode. This change is executed with a correlation in timing, so that the player's expectation that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition can be synergistically increased.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
Change mode information display means for displaying change mode information that is information about the change mode of the predetermined amount that has already been changed (displays an image of the pearl on the stage St indicating the accumulation point in the modified example 13 of the first embodiment) Function)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K1, since it is provided with the change mode information display means for displaying the change mode information that is information related to the change mode of the predetermined amount that has already been changed, the player can determine how the predetermined amount has changed. It is possible to easily grasp the information, prompt the player to make various guesses based on the change mode information, and give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature K2]
A gaming machine according to the feature K1,
The changing means includes means for changing a predetermined amount at a plurality of timings,
The change mode information display means includes:
Means for displaying the change mode information in a manner in which the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the change means at each timing can be identified (on the stage St indicating the accumulation point in the modification 13 of the first embodiment). A game machine characterized by having a function of displaying an image of a pearl.

  According to the feature K2, since the change mode information is displayed in such a manner that the change amount of the predetermined amount changed at each timing can be identified, the player who has recognized the change mode information, for example, , Urge to try to find regularity for the amount of change of the predetermined amount that has changed at each previous timing, or to infer the amount of change of the predetermined amount at the next and subsequent timings It is possible to provide a new enjoyment based on the change mode information to the player.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The changing means is
Based on special information corresponding to the game times, a means for determining a mode of change of the predetermined amount (a function for determining a point grant scenario based on a production scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment) is provided. A gaming machine that features.

  According to the feature K3, since the mode of change of the predetermined amount is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game times, the change mode information that is information regarding the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed is recognized. An expectation can be given to the player about the special information corresponding to the game times.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K3,
Based on the special information corresponding to the game times, provided with an effect determining means for determining an effect to be executed in the game times,
The changing means is
Based on the determined effect (effect scenario in modification 12 of the first embodiment), means for determining a mode of change of the predetermined amount (point grant scenario in modification 12 of the first embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  According to the feature K4, since the effect to be executed in the game time is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game time, and the mode of change of the predetermined amount is determined based on the determined effect, it has already been changed. The player who has recognized the change mode information, which is information related to the change mode of a predetermined amount, makes various assumptions about the contents of the effects to be executed later in the game round, and has a sense of expectation based on the change mode information Can be granted.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (a point giving suggesting effect in the modified example 14 of the first embodiment) that is an effect suggesting changing the predetermined amount;
After the first effect is executed, the second effect is executed to execute the second effect (the point giving execution effect in the modification 14 of the first embodiment) which is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed. Means,
With
The second effect execution means includes:
In the first case, after the first effect is executed once, the second effect is executed once. In the second case, after the first effect is executed once. A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the second effect N (an integer of N ≧ 2) times.

  According to the feature L1, since the first effect is an effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed, the predetermined amount may be changed for the player who has recognized the first effect. A sense of expectation can be imparted. Since the second effect is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed, the player who has recognized the second effect is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, and gives a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. Therefore, when the second effect is executed N times after the first effect is executed once, the predetermined amount is given N times to the player after the first effect is executed once. It can be recognized that it has changed. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player who has recognized the first effect as to how many times the predetermined amount changes thereafter. When the second effect is executed N times after the first effect is executed once, it is recognized that the first effect is executed, and then the second effect is executed once. Unexpectedness and surprise can be given to a player who has been assumed to be.

[Feature L2]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
The change means includes change amount information acquisition means for acquiring change amount information that is information corresponding to the change amount of the predetermined amount to be changed,
The second effect execution means includes:
In the first case, after the first effect is executed once, the second effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by the change amount corresponding to the change amount information is executed once. And
In the second case, the change amount corresponding to the change amount information is divided into N pieces, and each change amount is divided into N pieces after the first effect is executed once. Means for executing the second performance N times indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by the division change amount (variation 14 of the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature L2, in both the first case and the second case, it is only necessary to acquire the change amount information corresponding to the first effect to be executed. Even when it is executed once, the process up to obtaining the change amount information is the same as in the first case, and the process can be simplified. Further, the change amount information can be set without distinguishing between the case where the information is used as the first case and the case where the information is used as the second case, and the setting of the change amount information can be simplified. it can.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
The change means acquires second effect change amount information acquisition means for acquiring second effect change amount information, which is information corresponding to a predetermined amount of change indicating change in one second effect. With
The second effect execution means includes:
In the first case, a change corresponding to the acquired second effect change amount information is acquired after the first effect change amount information is acquired and the first effect is executed once. The second effect indicating that the predetermined amount corresponding to the amount is changed is executed once,
In the second case, N pieces of change information for the second effect are acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, the acquired N pieces of second effect change information are obtained. The second effect indicating that the predetermined amount corresponding to the corresponding change amount is changed is executed N times corresponding to the acquired N pieces of the second effect change amount information (first embodiment). Modification 14)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature L3, in the second case, the number of pieces of second effect change amount information corresponding to the number of second effects to be executed may be acquired. For example, one acquired second effect is obtained. It is not necessary to execute a process of dividing the change amount corresponding to the use change amount information into N according to the number of second effects to be executed, and the process can be simplified.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment);
The specific process executing means includes
When the special information corresponding to the gaming times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing in the gaming times is performed more than when the special information corresponding to the gaming times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of running is high,
The changing means is
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulation point) is set to a predetermined threshold (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing to reach ().

  According to the feature L4, when the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the specific information corresponding to the game times executes the specific process in the game time when the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the player by executing a specific process. Further, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold value until the specific process is executed. Every time the amount is changed, the player can be given a sense of expectation. That is, every time the second effect is executed, a sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, expectation can be given to the player step by step by a predetermined amount of change (execution of the second effect) and execution of a specific process.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (first effect in Modification 10 of the first embodiment) which is an effect suggesting changing the predetermined amount;
After the first effect is executed, the second effect is executed to execute the second effect (the second effect in the modification 10 of the first embodiment), which is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed. Means,
With
The first effect execution means includes:
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in a second game time which is a game time executed after the first game time,
Means for starting the first effect in the first game round corresponding to the change means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round;
Means for starting the first effect in the second game round corresponding to the change means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature M1, since the first effect is an effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed, the predetermined amount may change for the player who has recognized the first effect. A sense of expectation can be imparted. Since the second effect is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed, the player who has recognized the second effect is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, and gives a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. There are a case where the first effect corresponding to the change means changing the predetermined amount in the second game time is started in the first game time and a case where the first effect is executed in the second game time. . In other words, when the first effect is executed in a predetermined game time, the predetermined amount changes in the predetermined game time and in the game time executed after the predetermined game time. In some cases, the player who recognizes that the first performance has been executed can be made to guess which case it is and can give a sense of expectation.

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine according to the feature M1,
The first effect execution means includes:
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in the second game round,
Means for notifying, in the first game round, the predetermined amount of change that is changed by the change means in the second game round;
Means for notifying in the second game round the change amount of the predetermined amount that is changed by the change means in the second game round;
(Modification 10 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature M2, when the predetermined amount is changed in the second game round, the change amount of the predetermined amount changed in the second game round is notified in the first game round; There is a case where a predetermined amount of change to be changed in the game time is notified in the second game time. In other words, when a predetermined amount of change is notified in a predetermined game round, the predetermined amount corresponding to the notified change amount changes in the predetermined game round; In game times executed after game times, a predetermined amount corresponding to the notified change amount may change, and for a player who has recognized that a predetermined amount of change has been notified, It is possible to make a guess as to which case, and to give a sense of expectation.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to the feature M1 or the feature M2,
Specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by the change means being changed;
Reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
With
The reset means includes
In the first case (when the game time is not a carry-over game time), the predetermined amount changed in the game time is returned to the initial value at the end of the game time, and in the second case (when the game time is In the case of a carry-over gaming time), the gaming machine comprises means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the gaming time to an initial value when the gaming time ends.

  According to the feature M3, the predetermined amount may return to the initial value at the end of the game round, or may not return, so that the player pays attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of the game round. be able to. Even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round, the predetermined amount is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the amount may reach a threshold value. Therefore, when the first effect is executed by the feature M1, there are a case where the predetermined amount changes in the predetermined game time and a case where the predetermined amount changes in the game time executed after the predetermined game time. Furthermore, when the predetermined amount changes due to the feature M3, there are cases where the predetermined amount returns to the initial value when triggered by the end of the game times, and sometimes does not return. Can give a player a high sense of expectation.

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
In the game times, provided with changing means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment),
The effect executing means includes a change effect executing means for executing a change effect (point giving effect) that is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount changes when the changing means changes the predetermined amount,
The change effect execution means is a mode of the change effect (point giving effect in the modification 11 of the first embodiment) based on the special information corresponding to the game times in which the change means changes the predetermined amount. A gaming machine comprising means for determining a game machine.

  According to the feature N1, the change effect execution means determines the change effect mode based on the special information corresponding to the game times in which the change means changes the predetermined amount. Can attract attention. In addition, it is possible to give a sense of expectation for a game time in which a predetermined amount changes to a player who recognizes that the change effect has been executed.

[Feature N2]
A gaming machine according to the feature N1,
The production execution means
Based on the special information corresponding to the game times, a game time effect determining means for determining a game time effect (effect scenario in the modification 11 of the first embodiment) which is an effect executed in the game time,
Based on the content of the game times effect (the effect scenario in the modification 11 of the first embodiment), the change effect executing means changes the aspect of the change effect (the point giving effect in the modification 11 of the first embodiment). A gaming machine comprising means for determining.

  According to the feature N2, the change effect execution means determines the change effect mode based on the contents of the game effect, so that the player who has recognized that the change effect has been executed is notified of the change effect. Based on the aspect, it is possible to make a guess about the content of the game round effect to be executed later, and to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine described in feature N2,
The change effect execution means includes:
In the case where a specific effect is included in the game time effect, and the changing means changes the predetermined amount before the specific effect is executed, the predetermined amount changes. Means for executing the change effect indicating that in a specific manner (Modification 11 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature N3, the change effect execution means is a case where a specific effect is included in the game time effect, and the change means changes a predetermined amount before the specific effect is executed. Since the change effect indicating that the predetermined amount changes is executed in a specific manner, the relationship between the aspect of each change effect to be executed and the content of the game turn effect to be executed thereafter is given to the player. Each time a change effect is executed, the contents of a game time effect to be executed are estimated. Furthermore, a sense of expectation for special information corresponding to the game times can be given based on the content of the estimated game times effect.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount;
A calculation suggestion effect executing means for executing a calculation suggestion effect which is an effect of an aspect suggesting that the calculation processing is performed on the predetermined amount displayed;
A gaming machine comprising
The calculation suggesting effect executing means includes:
As the calculation suggestion effect of one time, it is suggested that an addition process is executed on the displayed predetermined amount or that a multiplication process is executed on the displayed predetermined amount. From either one of the aspects, the aspect suggesting that the addition process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount or the multiplication process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount. Computation processing mode change effect execution means for executing a calculation processing mode change effect that is an effect to change to one of the suggested modes is provided (Modification 15 in the first embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature O1, by changing the mode of the calculation suggestion effect, it can be recognized that the calculation method executed for the displayed predetermined amount has changed, and an unexpectedness can be given. . In addition, since the new predetermined amount after the calculation process is executed may differ greatly depending on the calculation method executed for the predetermined amount, the player can be changed by changing the mode of the calculation suggestion effect. It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player and to give an inflection to the player's expectation.

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic O1,
The mode that suggests that the addition process is performed on the predetermined amount that is displayed is an additive symbol display mode that is a mode that displays "+" that is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition,
A mode that suggests that multiplication processing is performed on the displayed predetermined amount is a multiplicative symbol display mode that is a mode that displays an "x" that is an arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication.
The arithmetic processing mode change effect execution means includes:
As the arithmetic processing mode change effect, by rotating either the symbol “+” which is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition displayed or “×” which is an arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication, an arithmetic symbol indicating addition Means for executing an effect of changing to a display of either “+” or “x” which is an arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication (the modified example 15 in the first embodiment) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature O2, the meaning can be changed greatly by executing the process of rotating the symbols of almost the same line drawing such as “+” and “×”. It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player and to give an inflection to the player's expectation.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature O1 or feature O2,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing the predetermined amount (accumulation points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
Specific processing execution means for executing specific processing (button pressing effect in the first embodiment);
With
The specific process executing means includes
When the special information corresponding to the gaming times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing in the gaming times is performed more than when the special information corresponding to the gaming times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of running is high,
The changing means is
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulation point) is set to a predetermined threshold (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing to reach ().

  According to the feature O3, when the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific information corresponding to the game times executes a specific process in the game times than when the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the player by executing a specific process. Further, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold value until the specific process is executed. Every time the amount is changed, the player can be given a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of urgency to change the mode of the calculation suggestion effect, and when the mode of the calculation suggestion effect is changed, the player's feeling of expectation for the game is greatly suppressed. Can be granted.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount;
Prior to the change of the predetermined amount, a multiplication aspect effect executing means for executing a multiplication aspect effect that is an effect of an aspect suggesting that multiplication processing is executed on the displayed predetermined amount;
(Modification 15 in the first embodiment)
The predetermined amount display means includes:
A means for displaying, as a new predetermined amount, a multiplication result amount that is an amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount when the multiplication aspect effect executing means executes the multiplication aspect effect; A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature P1, since the multiplication mode effect execution means for executing the multiplication mode effect is provided, the player who recognizes the execution of the multiplication mode effect is given expectation to the value multiplied by the predetermined amount. It is possible to pay attention to the multiplication mode effect.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine according to feature P1,
The multiplication aspect effect execution means includes:
Means for controlling the aspect of the multiplication aspect effect to be executed according to the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the predetermined amount being displayed (Modification 15 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature P2, the multiplication aspect effect executing means controls the aspect of the multiplication aspect effect to be executed according to the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the displayed predetermined amount, so pay attention to the aspect of the multiplication aspect effect. Can be made.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The predetermined amount display means includes:
Means for displaying, as the new predetermined amount, an amount larger than the multiplication result amount, which is the amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, when the multiplication aspect effect executing means executes the multiplication aspect effect. (Modification 15 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature P3, when the multiplication aspect effect executing means executes the multiplication aspect effect, an amount larger than the multiplication result amount, which is the amount obtained by multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, it is possible to give unexpectedness and happiness to the player who has recognized a new predetermined amount larger than the multiplication result amount.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics P1 to P3, wherein an addition process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount before the predetermined amount is changed. An adding mode effect executing means for executing an adding mode effect that is an effect of the mode;
The predetermined amount display means includes:
And a means for displaying, as the new predetermined amount, an addition result amount that is an amount obtained by adding the displayed predetermined amount when the addition aspect effect executing unit executes the addition aspect effect. First embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature P4, since the addition mode effect execution means is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency or tension as to whether the addition mode effect is executed or the multiplication mode effect is executed.

[Feature P5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P4,
Prior to the change of the predetermined amount, there is provided an addition aspect effect executing means for executing an addition aspect effect that is an effect suggesting that an addition process is executed on the displayed predetermined amount. ,
The predetermined amount display means includes:
When the addition mode effect execution means executes the addition mode effect, an amount larger than the addition result amount, which is the amount obtained by adding the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Means (Modification 15 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature P5, when the addition mode effect execution means executes the addition mode effect, an amount larger than the addition result amount that is a result of multiplying the displayed predetermined amount is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, it is possible to give unexpectedness and happiness to a player who has recognized a new predetermined amount that is larger than the amount of addition results.

<Feature Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
First changing means for changing the first amount in the game times (function to give points in the modified example 22 of the first embodiment);
Second changing means for changing the second amount in the game times (function to give points in the modified example 22 of the first embodiment);
First specific process execution means for executing a first specific process;
A second specific process execution means for executing a second specific process;
With
The first changing means includes
When the first specific process execution means executes the first specific process, the first amount is set to a first threshold value (preliminarily set) before the first specific process is executed. Including means for changing to reach 10 points)
The second changing means includes
In a case where the second specific process execution means executes the second specific process, the second amount is set to a second threshold value (preliminarily set) before the second specific process is executed. A gaming machine comprising means for changing to reach 10 points).

  According to the characteristic Q1, the first change unit preliminarily sets the first amount until the first specific process is executed when the first specific process execution unit executes the first specific process. The second change means changes until the set first threshold is reached, and when the second specific process execution means executes the second specific process, until the second specific process is executed. In addition, since the second amount is changed so as to reach a preset second threshold, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation when the first amount changes, and further, the second amount It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation when the change occurs. In other words, in the game round, it is possible to make the player pay attention to changes in at least two quantities and to give a sense of expectation.

[Feature Q2]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The game times in which the first specific process is executed are more likely than the game times in which the first specific process is not executed that the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition A gaming machine characterized by a high price.

  According to the feature Q2, a player who recognizes that the first specific process has been executed in the game times is given an expectation that the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition. be able to.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1 or feature Q2,
Reset processing for returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value when the game round ends (point reset processing in the first embodiment) A gaming machine comprising a reset means for executing

  According to the feature Q3, since the reset means is provided, at least one of the first amount and the second amount is a threshold value corresponding to each amount (first threshold value, second threshold value) before the game round ends. A sense of expectation can be given to the player so as to reach. In addition, the player who has recognized that at least one of the first amount and the second amount has started to change has been made aware of the timing of the end of the game time, and the first amount and It can be noted that the second quantity changes.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to feature Q3,
The reset means includes
In the first case, at least one of the first amount and the second amount changed in the game round is returned to the initial value when the game round ends, and in the second case (the game round is carried forward) In the case of a game time), at least one of the first amount and the second amount changed in the game time is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game time (the accumulated point is carried forward). A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature Q4, since at least one of the first amount and the second amount may return to the initial value when the game round ends, or may not return, the first quantity and Even if at least one of the second quantities does not reach the threshold value corresponding to each quantity, the quantity is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is a possibility that the threshold will be reached in the game. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the game round ends.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
Specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by the change means being changed;
Reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
With
The reset means includes
In the first case (when the game time is not a carry-over game time), the predetermined amount changed in the game time is returned to the initial value at the end of the game time, and in the second case (when the game time is In the case of carry-over game times), the predetermined amount changed in the game times is provided with means for not returning to the initial value at the end of the game times,
The reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed at a predetermined game time to the initial value when the game time is ended. There is a high expectation that the special information corresponding to the game times executed later satisfies the predetermined condition (Modification 25 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature R1, the reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game time to the initial value when the game time is ended. There is a high expectation that the special information corresponding to the game times executed after the game times satisfies the predetermined condition, so that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value when the game times end. The longer it continues, the more expectation can be given to the player.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
When the special information in the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies a predetermined condition,
The reset means includes
Means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the first game round to an initial value until the second game round;
The changing means is
A gaming machine comprising: means for limiting a change amount of the predetermined amount so that the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold between the first game time and the second game time.

  According to feature R2, for a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, the game round ends, and the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value. , Can give a sense of expectation. As a result, it can be suppressed that the player's expectation in a state where the predetermined amount has not reached the threshold value is reduced.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
A changing means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulation point in the first embodiment) from a preset initial value in the game times;
Specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by the change means being changed;
Threshold change means for executing threshold change processing for changing the threshold value (Modification 26 in the first embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature S1, the predetermined amount is changed in the game round, and the specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value. Therefore, the player pays attention to the change of the predetermined amount. Can be made. In addition, when a predetermined amount reaches a threshold value and a specific process is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority or expectation. Furthermore, since the threshold value may be changed, it is difficult for the player to guess the timing at which the specific process is executed, and the specific process can be executed at a timing that the player does not expect. As a result, unexpectedness can be given to the player.

[Feature S2]
A gaming machine according to the feature S1,
The threshold value changing means includes
A gaming machine, comprising: a threshold value changing process determining unit that determines whether or not to execute the threshold value changing process in the game time based on the special information corresponding to the game time.

  According to the feature S2, since it is determined whether or not the threshold value changing process is executed in the game time based on the special information corresponding to the game time, the player who has recognized that the threshold value has been changed, or Giving a player who has recognized that the threshold has been changed when a specific process is executed, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition Can do.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
When the special information corresponding to the gaming times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing in the gaming times is performed more than when the special information corresponding to the gaming times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of execution.

  According to the feature S3, when the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the case where the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition executes a specific process in the game time. Therefore, when a specific process is executed, an expectation can be given to the player. Further, since the specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the predetermined amount changes.

<Feature T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising
When the game turn operation is terminated after the game turn operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started,
Change means (a function for executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
Prior to changing the predetermined amount, a change amount display (giving point suggestion display in the modified example 27 of the first embodiment) indicating information on the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the changing means is displayed. Change amount display means;
A gaming machine comprising

  According to the feature T1, since the change amount display indicating the information on the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the changing means is displayed before the predetermined amount is changed, the player who has recognized the change amount display is displayed. Thus, various guesses and expectations for the game times corresponding to the change amount display can be given.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine according to feature T1,
A game number display means for displaying a game number display, which is a display indicating one game number being held or executed;
The change amount display means includes
A gaming machine comprising: means for displaying the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined game time in association with the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game time.

  According to the feature T2, since the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game times is displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game times, the change amount display displayed in association with the game time display is displayed. Various guesses and expectations for the game times corresponding to the displayed change amount display can be given to the recognized player. For example, when a change amount display is displayed in association with a game time display corresponding to a pending game time, various guesses and expectations for the game time being held for the player who has recognized the change amount display. A feeling can be imparted.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T2,
The change amount display means includes
The game amount display corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed after the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to the game time different from the predetermined game time. A gaming machine comprising means for displaying in association with each other.

According to the feature T3, after the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to the game time different from the predetermined game time, the game time corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed. Since it is displayed in association with the display, it is possible to reverse the player's guess based on the change amount display displayed in association with the game times display corresponding to the game times different from the predetermined game times. Thus, unexpectedness can be imparted.
[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to feature T2 or feature T3,
The change amount display means includes
The change corresponding to the change amount changed by the change means in the predetermined game time after displaying the change amount display corresponding to the change amount different from the change amount changed by the change means in the predetermined game time. A gaming machine characterized by displaying a quantity display.

  According to the feature T4, after displaying the change amount display corresponding to the change amount different from the change amount changed by the change means in the predetermined game times, the change corresponding to the change amount changed by the change means in the predetermined game times. Since the amount display is displayed, it is possible to overturn the player's guess based on the change amount display corresponding to the change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in a predetermined game round. In addition to imparting sex, it is possible to impart inflection to the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature T5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T4,
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button pressing effect in the first embodiment);
The changing means is
Change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulation point) to reach a preset threshold (10 points);
The specific process executing means includes
When the special information corresponding to the gaming times satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing in the gaming times is performed more than when the special information corresponding to the gaming times does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of running is high,
The change control means includes
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulation point) reaches the threshold (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing as described above.

  According to the feature T5, when the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the case where the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition executes a specific process in the game time. Since the probability is high, it is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the player by executing a specific process. Further, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the change control unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold value until the specific process is executed. Every time the predetermined amount is changed, the player can be given a sense of expectation. Therefore, expectation can be given to the player step by step by changing the predetermined amount and executing the specific process.

  Note that the inventions of the feature A group to the feature T group solve the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there are various structures, controls, effects, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, etc. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

For gaming machines such as those mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired for the purposes of improving gaming, reducing the processing load on gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing healthier games. It is rare.
<Feature U group>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
A launching means for launching a game ball;
The entrance part where the launched game ball can enter,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry unit (the electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment),
The state of the auxiliary means includes a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and an entrance to the entrance part. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) which is a state that enables or facilitates entry of a game ball;
At least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes for controlling the state transition unit, wherein the state transition unit is different in the mode of transitioning the state of the auxiliary unit. Control means capable of executing (low frequency support mode);
A gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, at the start of a game time for notifying the result of the determination, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low frequency). A gaming machine comprising means for switching to a frequency support mode.

  According to the characteristic U1, since the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game time to notify the determination result based on the determination result by the determination means, the game It is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous or unfavorable state for the player by the process executed after the start of the game and the control mode of the state transition means. For example, if the control mode of the state transition means is a control mode advantageous to the player, and if it becomes a state advantageous to the player by the processing executed after the start of the game round, the state excessively advantageous to the player There is a possibility of becoming. However, since the gaming machine according to this feature includes means for switching the control mode based on the result of determination by the determination means at the start of the game round, for example, a state advantageous to the player by processing executed after the game round starts. In this case, the control mode is switched from the control mode advantageous to the player to the control mode not advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player. .

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
In the situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing strength by the launching means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), the control means operates in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). The game machine is characterized in that it is easier for a game ball to enter the entrance portion than to control the entrance.

  According to the feature U2, it is easier for the game ball to enter the entrance portion when the state transition unit is controlled in the first control mode than when the state transition unit is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode that is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this feature, when the state that is advantageous to the player is achieved by the processing executed after the start of the game round, the control mode is advantageously changed from the control mode advantageous to the player to the player accordingly. Since it can switch to the control mode which does not become too much, it can suppress that it will be in an excessively advantageous state for a player.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to Feature U1 or Feature U2,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege is provided,
The privilege granting means is:
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a bonus granting means after a game round that grants a bonus after the game round that informs the result of the determination (function to execute a round game) )When,
When the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition satisfy a specific condition, a bonus granting means during execution of the game times that gives a privilege during execution of the game times (function to execute special bonus processing) And
The control means includes
When the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition (when the specific process flag is ON), the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round. A gaming machine comprising a means for switching (a function for turning off the high-frequency support mode flag).

  According to the feature U3, when the game times to be executed satisfy a specific condition, a privilege is given during execution of the game times by the game-time-execution privilege giving means, and the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, the control means includes means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game time when the game time satisfies a specific condition. Even during a period in which a privilege is provided by the executing privilege providing means, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
A first entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
With
The auxiliary means includes
Arranged in either one of the first entrance part or the second entrance part,
The information acquisition means includes
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance portion. And
The acquired information storage means includes
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. And means for storing each of the second special information which is the special information,
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time that is a game time for notifying a result of determination by the determination means for the first special information; and a result of determination by the determination means for the second special information. A gaming machine comprising means for executing in parallel the second special information game times that are game times.

  According to the characteristic U4, since the first special information game times and the second special information game times are provided in parallel, for example, the second special information game times during the execution of the first special information game times. The process which provides the privilege with respect to a determination result is attained. In such a case, the process executed after the start of the first special information game is advantageous to the player. However, the gaming machine of this feature has the control mode set to the first mode at the start of the first special information game. Since the means for switching from the control mode to the second control mode is provided, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player during the execution of the first special information game.

<Feature V group>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature V1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
When the determination unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting unit (a function for executing a round game) that grants a privilege after the end of the game round that notifies the determination result;
The game times corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition (the game times that are won by the jackpot) are set as the condition-fulfilled game times, and the condition-fulfilled game times executed first out of the two condition-fulfilled game times Is a precondition fulfillment game time, and the condition fulfillment game time executed after the precondition fulfillment game time is a postcondition fulfillment game time, the processing at the start of the postcondition fulfillment game time, Processing determination means for determining based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition game play (special bonus processing at the start of the game round after winning the jackpot based on the jackpot type of the previous game win winning the jackpot Function to decide whether or not to execute the related process),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature V1, since the processing determination means for determining the process at the start of the post-condition-satisfied game times based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition-satisfying game times is provided, the post-conditions-satisfying game times are executed Before that, it is possible to execute in advance a corresponding process for the process executed at the start of the post-condition fulfillment game times. For example, in a game run executed between a pre-condition fulfillment game time and a post-condition play game time, or an effect that suggests a process to be executed at the start of the post-condition play game time It is possible to execute various corresponding processes for the process executed at the start of the post-condition-satisfied game times, such as performing an effect suggesting the process to be executed at the start of the post-condition-satisfying game times, and to improve the interest of the game be able to.
In addition, since the process at the start of the post-condition satisfaction game times is determined based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition satisfaction game times, for example, the process determined as the process at the start of the post-condition satisfaction game times is the player. If the process is advantageous to the process, the process that does not become excessively advantageous to the player by the process based on the special information corresponding to the condition-fulfilled game times is performed as a process corresponding to the process. Can be executed at the start.

[Feature V2]
A gaming machine according to feature V1,
A launching means for launching a game ball;
The entrance part where the launched game ball can enter,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry unit (the electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment),
The state of the auxiliary means includes a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and an entrance to the entrance part. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) which is a state that enables or facilitates entry of a game ball;
At least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes for controlling the state transition unit, wherein the state transition unit is different in the mode of transitioning the state of the auxiliary unit. Control means capable of executing (low frequency support mode);
With
The process determining means includes
Determining whether or not to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode (determination as to whether or not to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag) at the start of the post-condition satisfaction game times A gaming machine comprising: means for executing based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition fulfilled game times.

  According to the feature V2, the process determining means determines whether or not to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the post-condition satisfaction game times, in response to the pre-condition satisfaction game times. Since the process is executed based on the special information, for example, when a process advantageous to the player is executed at the start of the post-condition fulfillment game round based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition fulfillment game round, the response to the process Whether or not to switch the control mode from the control mode advantageous to the player to the control mode not advantageous to the player at the start of the post-condition satisfaction game times based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition achievement game times It is possible to execute the determination, and as a result, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V2,
A first entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
With
The information acquisition means includes
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance portion. And
The acquired information storage means includes
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. And means for storing each of the second special information which is the special information,
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time that is a game time for notifying a result of determination by the determination means for the first special information; and a result of determination by the determination means for the second special information. Means for executing in parallel the second special information game times which are game times;
The gaming machine further includes:
A game time setting means for setting the game time when the game time executed by the game time execution means is a game time;
The game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition are defined as first condition satisfaction game times, and the first condition satisfaction game times to be executed first out of the two first condition satisfaction game times. When the first pre-condition fulfillment game times and the first pre-condition fulfillment game times executed after the first pre-condition fulfillment game times are the first post-condition fulfillment game times,
The game time determining means includes
The game time setting method of the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game times are executed is based on the special information corresponding to the first destination condition satisfaction game times. Means for determining (variable time setting process for the second starting port in the second embodiment / first start that won the jackpot later, based on the jackpot type of the first starting port game times won first) A period during which the first start-up game times that are determined based on the state of the high-frequency support mode flag are determined based on the state of the high-frequency support mode flag at the start of the game time for the mouth. A function for determining a method for setting a variation time of the game times for the second start opening executed in the game.

  According to the feature V3, the setting method of the game time of the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game time is executed is changed to the special information corresponding to the first destination condition satisfaction game time. For example, the game time of the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game time is executed based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition satisfaction game time is determined. The setting method can be determined as a setting method advantageous to the player. More specifically, as a setting method of the game time of the second special information game times, it can be determined to be a setting method in which the average value of the game time becomes relatively short. In this case, there is a possibility that the period during which the first post-condition-satisfying game is executed will be excessively advantageous to the player. For example, as shown in the feature V2, as a response process for the process Since the control mode can be switched at the start of the first post-condition satisfying game times based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition satisfying game times, for example, it becomes advantageous to the player from the control mode advantageous to the players. By switching to the control mode that is not too much, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player during the period in which the first post-condition-satisfied game times are being executed.

<Feature W group>
The feature W group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
A game time setting means for setting the game time when the game time executed by the game time execution means is a game time;
A launching means for launching a game ball;
The entrance part where the launched game ball can enter,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry unit (the electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment),
The state of the auxiliary means includes a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and an entrance to the entrance part. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) which is a state that enables or facilitates entry of a game ball;
At least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes for controlling the state transition unit, wherein the state transition unit is different in the mode of transitioning the state of the auxiliary unit. Control means capable of executing (low frequency support mode);
A gaming machine comprising
In a situation where game balls are continuously being fired at a predetermined firing strength by the launching means, the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode). However, it is easier for the game ball to enter the entrance part than when the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode),
The game time setting means includes
As the game time setting method, at least a first setting method and a second setting method having a shorter average game time value than the first setting method can be executed.
The control means includes
The gaming time setting means switches the gaming time setting method from the first setting method to the second setting method based on a specific opportunity (at the start of the second bonus game game at the start of the specific bonus process). The control mode is changed based on the specific trigger in spite of switching the setting method of the change time / switching from the high-accuracy high-frequency change time information acquisition process to the high-precision low-frequency change time information acquisition process). A gaming machine comprising means for switching from the first control mode to the second control mode (a function for turning off the high-frequency support mode flag).

In a general gaming machine, when the game time setting method is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method in which the average value of the game time set is shorter than that of the first setting method, The control mode of the transition means is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode in which the game ball is easier to enter the entrance part than in the second control mode. However, in this case, there is a possibility that the player is excessively advantageous.
According to the gaming machine of the feature W1, the control mode is changed to the first based on the specific opportunity, although the game time setting method is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method based on the specific opportunity. Since the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player.

[Feature W2]
A gaming machine according to the feature W1,
A first entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
With
The information acquisition means includes
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance portion. And
The acquired information storage means includes
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. And means for storing each of the second special information which is the special information,
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time that is a game time for notifying a result of determination by the determination means for the first special information; and a result of determination by the determination means for the second special information. Means for executing in parallel the second special information game times which are game times;
The specific opportunity is the start of the first special information game corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition,
The control means includes
The game time of the second special information game times executed during a period in which the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed by the game time setting means. Despite switching the setting method from the first setting method to the second setting method,
A gaming machine, wherein the control mode is switched from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low frequency support mode) based on the specific trigger.

According to the feature W2, the method for setting the game time of the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed. The first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying a predetermined condition even when the player is in an advantageous state by switching from the first setting method to the second setting method. As a trigger, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode, so that an excessively advantageous state for the player can be suppressed.
Furthermore, since the opportunity to switch the control mode is the start of the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition, a privilege is granted after the first special information game times are completed. It is also possible to execute the process, it is possible to give the player various changes in the state of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature X group>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
A first entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means includes
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance portion. And
The acquired information storage means includes
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. And means for storing each of the second special information which is the special information,
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time that is a game time for notifying a result of determination by the determination means for the first special information; and a result of determination by the determination means for the second special information. Means for executing in parallel the second special information game times which are game times;
The production execution means
The effect executed in the second special information game run that is executed during the period from the start of the first special information game to the end corresponds to the first special information game of the first A game machine comprising: means for determining based on the first special information (a function for executing an effect pattern setting process for a small bonus at the time of a special bonus in the second embodiment).

  According to the characteristic X1, an effect to be executed in the second special information game times executed in a period from the start of the first special information game times to the end of the first special information game times is performed. Since it is determined based on the first special information corresponding to the special information game times, it is possible to cause the player to guess the first special information game times indirectly through the effects executed in the second special information game times. The expectation for the first special information game times can be given by using the effect executed in the second special information game times.

[Feature X2]
A gaming machine according to feature X1,
When the determination unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege grant unit that grants a privilege after the end of the game round that notifies the determination result;
A privilege type determining unit that determines a type of the privilege to be given by the privilege granting unit from a plurality of types of the privilege;
With
The production execution means
If the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the first special information game round is based on the type of the privilege given after the first special information game round is over. Means for determining an effect to be executed in the second special information game times executed during a period from the start to the end of the special information game times (a jackpot type in the first start game time corresponding to the special bonus process) And a function for setting an effect pattern table for small hits of the second start-up game times executed during the special bonus processing period.

  According to the feature X2, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation regarding the type of privilege given after the end of the first special information game using the effect executed in the second special information game.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
The determination means has at least two types of determination modes for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition: a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode). Judgment mode can be executed,
There is a higher probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the determination unit is executing the second determination mode than when the determination unit is executing the first determination mode.
The production execution means
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the determination mode executed by the determination means in the game time executed after the end of the first special information game time Means for determining an effect to be executed in the second special information game that is executed during a period from the start of the first special information game to the end based on the type of the first special information game (the first bonus corresponding to the special bonus process). And a function for setting an effect pattern table for a small hit of the second start opening game times executed during the special bonus processing period depending on whether the big hit type in the start opening game times is a probable big hit or a normal big hit) A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature X3, the game time determination mode executed after the first special information game times when the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition using the effect executed in the second special information game times. It can give a player a sense of expectation for the type.

<Feature Y group>
The feature Y group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
A first entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means includes
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance portion. And
The acquired information storage means includes
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. And means for storing each of the second special information which is the special information,
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time (game time for the first start port in the second embodiment) which is a game time for notifying the result of determination by the determination means for the first special information, and the second special information. Means for executing in parallel a second special information game time (a game time for the second opening) which is a game time for notifying the result of determination by the determination means for information;
The privilege granting means is:
Game times for providing a bonus after the end of the game round, which is a bonus, after the first special information game round ends when the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition Post-end privilege granting means (function to execute the opening / closing execution mode in the second embodiment);
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game times satisfies the predetermined condition, a bonus during game times being executed is provided during the period in which the first special information game times are being executed. A bonus granting means for executing the game times to be granted (a function for executing a special bonus process in the second embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature Y1, since the bonus granting means after the end of the game round and the bonus granting means during the game round running are provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the bonus after the round of gaming rounds and the bonus during the game round running. In addition, for example, by setting whether to give a bonus during game times execution or not, a period during which the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying a predetermined condition is being executed. Even if it exists, it can be made to guess whether the privilege during game times execution is provided, and a sense of urgency can be provided to a player.

[Feature Y2]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The bonus granting means during execution of the game is
Execution of the game times triggered by the second special information game times (game times for the second opening) that are executed during the period in which the first special information game times for granting the bonus during the game times are being executed A gaming machine comprising a means for granting a medium privilege (a privilege based on a round game triggered by a small hit in the second start opening game times).

  According to the feature Y2, since the second special information game times that are executed during the period in which the first special information game times that give the bonus during game times are executed, the bonus during game times is given. Even if the first special information corresponding to the first special information game times satisfies a predetermined condition, the player is given a greater sense of expectation by executing the second special information game times. be able to.

[Feature Y3]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2,
Game time setting means for setting a game time, which is a game time time executed by the game time execution means based on the special information,
The upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as the bonus during game play is the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game round giving the bonus during game play The gaming machine is determined on the basis of the length (the length of the variation time of the first start game executed as a special bonus process).

  According to the feature Y3, the upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as a game-running privilege is the game time set by the game-time setting means for the first special information game game that grants a game-running privilege. Since it is determined based on the length, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first special information game times will last longer. In addition, as the end of the first special information game round approaches, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that it is desired to acquire as many bonuses during the execution of the game round as much as possible, and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the first special information game round. Can give inflections to the emotions.

<Characteristic Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
A first entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means includes
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance portion. And
The acquired information storage means includes
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. And means for storing each of the second special information which is the special information,
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time that is a game time for notifying a result of determination by the determination means for the first special information; and a result of determination by the determination means for the second special information. Means for executing in parallel the second special information game times which are game times;
The production execution means
Elapsed time information, which is information relating to the elapsed time from the start of the first special information game time to a predetermined timing, is acquired, and the first target that is the acquisition target of the elapsed time information is based on the elapsed time information. Effect setting process execution means for executing an effect setting process for setting an effect corresponding to the second special information game times executed during a period in which the special information game times are executed (in the second embodiment, in the case of a special bonus) A gaming machine having a function of executing a setting process of an effect pattern for small hits).

  According to the feature Z1, based on the elapsed time information that is information related to the elapsed time from the start of the first special information game time to the predetermined timing, it is executed during the period in which the first special information game time is being executed. Since the production corresponding to the second special information game times to be performed is set, the player who has recognized the production corresponding to the executed second special information game times has executed the first special information game times. The remaining time until the end of the first special information game times and the first special information game times, and indirectly giving a sense of expectation to the first special information game times through the production corresponding to the second special information game times Can do.

[Feature Z2]
A gaming machine according to the feature Z1,
The production execution means
The apparatus comprises: means for determining whether or not to execute the effect setting process based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time that is the acquisition target of the elapsed time information. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature Z2, it is determined whether or not to execute the effect setting process based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game times that are the acquisition targets of the elapsed time information. Therefore, the first corresponding to the first special information game times is based on the effects corresponding to the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first special information game times are executed for the player. It is possible to infer whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and it is possible to indirectly give a sense of expectation to the first special information game times through an effect corresponding to the second special information game times. .

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
When the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege after the game times are completed,
The production execution means
When the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined conditions satisfy a specific condition, a predetermined time after the first special information game times satisfying the specific condition is started Elapsed time information that is information related to the elapsed time up to the timing (the remaining time RT of the variation time of the first start opening game time) is acquired, and the first special information game time that is the acquisition target of the elapsed time information is executed A game machine comprising: means for executing an effect setting process for setting an effect corresponding to the second special information game times to be executed during a given period.

  According to the feature Z3, the first special information game times are specified to the player based on the effects corresponding to the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first special information game times are executed. It is possible to infer whether or not the above condition is satisfied, and it is possible to indirectly give a sense of expectation to the first special information game times through an effect corresponding to the second special information game times.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to feature Z3,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege is provided,
The privilege granting means is:
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a bonus granting means after a game round that grants a bonus after the game round that informs the result of the determination (function to execute a round game) )When,
When the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition satisfy the specific conditions, a privilege-giving means for executing the game times that gives a privilege during execution of the game times (function to execute a special bonus process) ) And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature Z4, when the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition satisfy the specific conditions, a privilege is given during the execution of the game times. Therefore, the first special information is given to the player. Based on the production corresponding to the second special information game times executed during the period in which the game times are being executed, it is possible to make a guess whether or not the first special information game times satisfy a specific condition. Further, a greater sense of expectation can be given to a privilege that may be given during the execution of the first special information game time indirectly through the effect corresponding to the second special information game time.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Determination result notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means using a pattern;
Game times execution for executing the game times when the game operation is terminated once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means using a symbol is started. Means,
A first entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means includes
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance portion. And
The acquired information storage means includes
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. And means for storing each of the second special information which is the special information,
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time that is a game time for notifying a result of determination by the determination means for the first special information; and a result of determination by the determination means for the second special information. Means for executing in parallel the second special information game times which are game times;
The privilege granting means is:
When the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when winning the jackpot), a privilege grant means when a predetermined condition is established to grant a privilege;
When the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition (in the case of small hits), a special condition establishment privilege granting means for granting a privilege is provided,
The determination result notification means includes:
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed is When the determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is performed using the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Corresponding to the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition are executed, although the result is notified. If the determination means determines that the second special information to be satisfied satisfies the specific condition, it corresponds to a determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition Using the above design Gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a means for performing the specified condition satisfaction notifying process of notifying the result of determination.

  According to the feature Z1, the process executed when the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed, and the second special information is predetermined. It can be avoided that the process executed in response to the display of the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the above condition is satisfied competes at the same time.

[Feature αA2]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry unit (the electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment),
The state of the auxiliary means includes a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and an entrance to the entrance part. A state transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) which is a state that enables or facilitates entry of a game ball;
At least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes for controlling the state transition unit, wherein the state transition unit is different in the mode of transitioning the state of the auxiliary unit. Control means capable of executing (low frequency support mode);
With
The control means includes
At the start of the first special information game corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode ( A gaming machine comprising means for switching to a low frequency support mode.

  According to the characteristic αA2, since the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying a predetermined condition is provided, means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode is provided. It is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous or unfavorable state for the player by the process executed after the start of the first special information game and the control mode of the state transition means.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A first entrance part (first start port 33) into which game balls that circulate in the game area can enter;
A second entry part (second start port 34) into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first and second balls;
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information, which is the special information, respectively;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination (the liquid crystal display device 41 in the second embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time that is a game time for notifying a result of determination by the determination means for the first special information; and a result of determination by the determination means for the second special information. Means for executing in parallel the second special information game times which are game times;
The display means includes
First identification information (first liquid crystal pattern in the second embodiment), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information 2nd identification information (2nd liquid crystal design in 2nd embodiment) which is the identification information for showing each is provided with the display means classified by area which displays on a different display area of the display means concerned,
The area-specific display means includes:
The first special information game times when the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition are executed in a first state (a state in which the first chance game game won previously is not won by a specific probability variation jackpot). If it is, a process of switching the display area for displaying the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and the display area for displaying the second identification information corresponding to the second special information. In spite of not being executed, the first special information game times satisfying the predetermined condition are in the second state (the first winning game game won earlier is won by the specific probability variation big win. The display area for displaying the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and the second identification information corresponding to the second special information are displayed. Predetermined display area Gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises means for performing processing to replace the timing.

  According to the characteristic αB1, even if the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first identification information is changed according to the state in which the first special information game corresponding to the first special information is executed. Since the process of switching the display area to be displayed and the display area to display the second identification information may or may not be executed, the first special information game times in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition When executed, by making the player recognize whether or not the display area has been exchanged, whether or not the state in which the first special information game round has been executed is the first state is the second state. It can be made to guess whether it was in a state.

[Feature αB2]
The gaming machine according to Feature αB1, wherein the first special information game times when the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is the first state or the second state. A state determination process executing means for executing a state determination process for determining whether or not there is,
The state determination means includes
The first special information is based on special information corresponding to a pre-execution first special information game time which is a first special information game time executed before the first special information game time satisfying the predetermined condition. And a means for executing the state determination process.

  According to the characteristic αB2, whether the first special information game times that the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed is the first state or the second state. Since it is performed based on special information corresponding to one special information game time, for example, in the first special information game time satisfying a predetermined condition, processing based on special information corresponding to the first execution first special information game time is performed. Thus, it is possible to perform processing utilizing whether or not display area replacement can be executed. For example, it is possible to suggest information related to the special information corresponding to the first execution first special information game time by performing an effect such as whether or not the display area is switched.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
Game time setting means for setting a game time which is a game time time executed by the game time execution means based on the special information;
When the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition, privilege granting means for granting a privilege (a function for executing special bonus processing in the second embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising
The upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as the privilege is the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition (special bonus processing) The game machine is characterized in that it is determined on the basis of the length of fluctuation time of the first start-up game times executed as

  According to the characteristic αC1, the upper limit value of the amount of privilege granted as a privilege is determined based on the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the game times corresponding to the special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game time of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition will last longer. In addition, as the end of the game round approaches, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that it is desired to acquire as many benefits as possible, and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the game round can be given, and inflection can be given to the player's emotions .

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
A launching means for launching a game ball;
The entrance part where the launched game ball can enter,
An assisting means for assisting in entering a game ball into the entrance part;
As the state of the auxiliary means, a first state that makes it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and a game ball can enter or enter the entrance part easily or easily. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state to be performed;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the state transition means can execute at least the first control mode and the second control mode as different control modes in which the state of the auxiliary means is changed. Means,
With
The control means includes
When the privilege grant means grants the privilege, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) at the start of the game times corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine comprising means for switching to the second control mode (low frequency support mode).

  According to the feature αC2, when the privilege grant means grants a privilege, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game times corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous or unfavorable by the privilege given after the start of the game times and the control mode of the state transition means.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to the feature αC2,
In the situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing strength by the launching means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), the control means operates in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). The game machine is characterized in that it is easier for a game ball to enter the entrance portion than to control the entrance.

  According to the feature αC3, it is easier for the game ball to enter the entrance portion when the state transition unit is controlled in the first control mode than when the state transition unit is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode that is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this feature, the control mode can be switched from the control mode advantageous to the player to the control mode not advantageous to the player at the start of the game round in which the privilege is given by the privilege granting means. Since it can do, it can suppress that it becomes an excessively advantageous state for a player.

  Note that the invention of the feature U group to the feature αC group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there are various structures, controls, effects, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, etc. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  For gaming machines such as those mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired for the purposes of improving gaming, reducing the processing load on gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing healthier games. It is rare.

  Note that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature αC group are appropriately combined may be employed. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a start entrance ball that is provided in the game area and can enter a game ball flowing down the game area And an acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the start ball entering section. Machine.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: design display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, start means for starting variable display of the plurality of pictures due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of stop operation means A gaming machine comprising stop means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to or after elapse of a predetermined time, and privilege grant means for giving a privilege to the player in accordance with the stopped picture.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and the modifications corresponding to the technical features in each embodiment described in the summary section of the invention are to solve some or all of the above-described problems, or In order to achieve part or all of the effects, replacement or combination can be performed as appropriate. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. ..Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... weight button 25c ... variable resistor 26 ... game ball launch button 30 ... game board 31 ... guide rail 31a ... inner rail part 31b ... outer rail part 32 ... General prize opening 33 ... First start opening 44 ... First start opening 34 ... Second start opening 34a ... Electrical accessory 44a ... Electric accessory 34b ... Electric accessory Object drive unit 44b ... Electric accessory drive unit 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... 1st symbol display part 37 ... 2nd symbol display part 37c ... 1st hold display part 37d ... 2nd hold display part 38 ... Normal figure unit 39 ... Round display part 40 ... Variable display unit 41 .. Symbol display device 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 44b ... Electric accessory drive unit 45 ... Main display unit 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 48a ... Opening / closing door 48b. ..Opening / closing door drive unit 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main side MPU
63 ... Main ROM
64 ... Main side RAM
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 70 ... Discharge control device 71 ... Discharge device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Voice light emission control device 91 ... Sound emission control board 92 ... Sound MPU
93 ... Sound ROM
94 ... Sound side RAM
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Display control apparatus 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
Sync1 ... first synchronous display section Sync2 ... second synchronous display section PA ... gaming area MA ... main display area Ra ... first reserved area Rb ... second reserved area Ds1 .. .First hold display area Ds2 ... second hold display area RaN ... first start hold number RbN ... second start hold number

Claims (2)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Determination result notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means using a pattern;
Game times execution for executing the game times when the game operation is terminated once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means using a symbol is started. Means,
A first entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second entrance part that is an entrance part into which the launched game ball can enter,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege;
A gaming machine comprising
The information acquisition means includes
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entrance portion. And
The acquired information storage means includes
The first special information, which is the special information acquired when the game ball enters the first entrance part, and the game ball entered into the second entrance part. And means for storing each of the second special information which is the special information,
The game times executing means includes
A first special information game time that is a game time for notifying a result of determination by the determination means for the first special information; and a result of determination by the determination means for the second special information. Means for executing in parallel the second special information game times which are game times;
The privilege granting means is:
When the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege grant means when a predetermined condition is established for granting a privilege;
When the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition, a special condition establishment privilege granting means for granting a privilege is provided,
The determination result notification means includes:
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed is When the determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is performed using the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Corresponding to the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition are executed, although the result is notified. If the determination means determines that the second special information to be satisfied satisfies the specific condition, it corresponds to a determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition Using the above design Gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a means for performing the specified condition satisfaction notifying process of notifying the result of determination. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
An assisting means for assisting in entering a game ball into the entrance part;
As the state of the auxiliary means, a first state that makes it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and a game ball can enter or enter the entrance part easily or easily. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state to be performed;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the state transition means can execute at least the first control mode and the second control mode as different control modes in which the state of the auxiliary means is changed. Means,
With
The control means includes
Means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the first special information game corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition. A featured gaming machine.

Images